JP7400931B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A pachinko machine is a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a firing means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and a variable display means A variable display is made to show the results of the lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2006-271480A

By the way, in gaming machines, there is a demand for improving interest by using effects and the like.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest .

The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a condition fulfillment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
control means for conducting a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the condition establishment detection means detects the condition, and generating the special gaming state based on the result of the lottery; In a gaming machine equipped with
information acquisition means for acquiring lottery-related information regarding the lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
Storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the lottery related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a display means capable of deriving a display based on the lottery related information stored in the storage area ,
The display means is configured to be able to display a first display body and a second display body, and the display mode of the first display body and the display mode of the second display body can be distinguished,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state,
The display means is configured to be able to derive a first specific mode that is a specific mode using the first display body and a second specific mode that is a specific mode using the second display body,
By deriving the first specific aspect and the second specific aspect, respectively, a suggestion regarding the occurrence of the special gaming state is made,
It is configured such that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the second special gaming state is higher when the second specific mode is derived than when the first specific mode is derived,
configured to be able to execute a change effect in which the second specific aspect is derived after the first specific aspect is derived,
The change effect is configured to be able to derive a connecting effect representing a process in which the second specific mode is derived after the first specific mode is derived,
The change effect is configured such that the first specific mode is not derived after the second specific mode is derived,
After the first specific mode is derived, the first specific mode is configured to be able to perform a performance in which the first specific mode is derived via the connecting performance,
The change effect is characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive a mode indicating that no further change of the specific mode is to be performed .

According to the present invention , it is possible to improve interest .

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows termination setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows general figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows ordinary figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning device control process. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used for determining decorative patterns and the like. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows suspension processing. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows pending icon setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a pending look-ahead effect lottery table. It is an explanatory diagram of a hold setting table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an exchange setting table. It is an explanatory diagram of a change setting table. It is an explanatory diagram of a reservation release lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows aspect rank setting processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a rank determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a look-ahead effect progress setting process. It is a flowchart which shows pending icon shift processing. 3 is a flowchart showing a connection display process. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation stop processing. It is a schematic sectional view of the 1st starting prize winning device. It is a schematic sectional view of the 1st starting prize winning device. It is a front view showing a visual recognition mode of a decorative pattern display device (reservation display area). It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of a hold icon. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a pending effect counter in a pending information storage area and a pending icon in a pending display area in normal data shift processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between a hold effect counter in a hold information storage area and a hold icon in a hold display area in a data shift process involving a pre-hold movement effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between a hold effect counter in a hold information storage area and a hold icon in a hold display area in a data shift process involving a move effect after hold. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a hold effect counter in a hold information storage area and a hold icon in a hold display area in a data shift process involving a hold exchange effect. It is a flowchart which shows the hold icon setting process in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the content of the variable display included in the variation information stored in the pending information storage area and the value of the pending pre-reading effect lottery counter that is won in the pending pre-reading effect lottery process. . In the second embodiment, the first interval between the pending icon whose appearance is to be changed and the prefetched pending icon that precedes the pending icon, and the first appearance lottery process and the second appearance lottery process win the prize. It is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence with the value of the appearance lottery counter. It is a flow chart which shows pending icon shift processing of a 2nd embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the correspondence between the first interval and the value of the proximity lottery counter that wins in the proximity lottery process. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the hold effect counter in the hold information storage area and the hold icon in the hold display area. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the hold effect counter in the hold information storage area and the hold icon in the hold display area. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the hold effect counter in the hold information storage area and the hold icon in the hold display area. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the hold effect counter in the hold information storage area and the hold icon in the hold display area. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the hold effect counter in the hold information storage area and the hold icon in the hold display area. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a scenario effect in the hold display area of the second embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of the decorative pattern display apparatus (reservation display area) in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing replacement performance in a third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing replacement performance in a third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing combined production in a third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing interlocking production in a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing chaotic production in a third embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 etc., the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 11 as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. For convenience, FIG. 3 does not show the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) disposed on the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 serving as the front frame, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6 etc., the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d and protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable, instead of via the inner frame 12.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") protruding toward the front is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and a manipulation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the manipulation amount of the operating section of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60 as a firing means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. The handle 18 is also provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, firing of game balls by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or to temporarily stop shooting the game balls while gripping the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a firing device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper tray 19. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Furthermore, a ball extraction button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, a production button 125 and a cross button 126 are provided on the top surface of the upper plate 19 as operation means with a built-in LED, and by pressing the production button 125 or the cross button 126, a decorative pattern to be described later is displayed. A corresponding effect is performed on the display device 42 or the like, or the content of the effect is changed.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play the role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to changes in the game state and the like. For example, on the periphery of the window section 101, an annular illumination section 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Furthermore, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the annular illumination section 102, which are turned on when a predetermined error occurs. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination section 102 above each error display lamp 104 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39 in a state in which it is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a firing rail 61 for guiding a firing device 60 and a game ball immediately after being fired by the firing device 60 is attached to the lower front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. There is. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60. Further, above the firing device 60, there is a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the firing position of the firing device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15 is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

In this embodiment, three balls enter the starting winning device 33a, 33b, ten balls enter the general winning opening 31, and three balls enter the variable winning device 32. If there are, 14 game balls are paid out. Furthermore, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 34, where the game ball only passes through and does not enter (the ball is not ejected to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. . In addition, the first starting winning device 33a, the general winning opening 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that game balls moving in the gaming area can always enter or pass through them. The 2-start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change state between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the gaming area, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are placed through this out port 36. and is discharged outside the gaming area. In addition, the game board 30 has a large number of nails (game nails) planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various parts (accessories) such as a windmill are installed. ing.

A variable display unit 35 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area. A center frame 47 is disposed in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative pattern display device 42, which will be described later.

A ball entry port 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and the game ball that enters the ball entry port 151 passes through a warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47, and then passes through a decorative pattern. It is guided onto a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided onto the stage 153 may roll on the stage 153 and fall from the stage 153 to the gaming area in front of it, or may extend back and forth from the center of the stage 153 to prevent the game ball from rolling on the stage 153. They may fall into the lead-out groove 154 that guides them forward.

A first starting winning device 33a is disposed below the variable display device unit 35. As shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 50, and FIG. 51, the first starting winning device 33a of this embodiment includes a ball entry opening 331 that opens upward and allows game balls moving in the gaming area to enter at all times; A pair of left and right first winning ports 332 and a second winning port 333 into which the game ball that entered the ball entry opening 331 can enter, and a first winning port 332 or the second winning port 333 that allows the game ball that entered the ball entry opening 331 to enter. A first guide passage 334 and a second guide passage 335 guiding to the second winning opening 333 are provided at a branch point between the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335, and a game in which a ball enters the ball entry opening 331. A sorting device 336 that alternately guides the balls to a first guide path 334 and a second guide path 335 is provided.

The sorting device 336 has a cylindrical shape that extends back and forth, and has a shaft portion 337 that is rotatably provided with the front and back direction as the center axis direction, and a shaft portion 337 that extends radially from the shaft portion 337 and is arranged at equal positions around the shaft portion 337. The rotary plate 338 is provided with three rotary plates 338. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the sorting device 336 has a first position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry opening 331 is guided to the first winning opening 332, and a first position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry opening 331 is guided to the first winning opening 332, as shown in FIG. It is configured to be movable between a second position that guides the game ball that has entered the part 331 to the second winning hole 333. Further, the first starting winning device 33a comes into contact with a predetermined rotating plate 338 of the sorting device 336 that has been displaced from the second position to the first position, and restricts further displacement of the sorting device 336, and also controls the further displacement of the sorting device 336. A rotation amount regulating portion 339 is provided which abuts against a rotary plate 338 other than the predetermined rotary plate 338 of the sorting device 336 displaced from the first position to the second position and restricts further displacement of the sorting device 336. ing.

When the sorting device 336 is in the first position, the plurality of rotary plates 338 of the sorting device 336 are configured to block both the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335, but the first starting winning device When a game ball enters the ball entry opening 331 of 33a, the game ball is guided to the rotating plate 338 extending leftward from the shaft portion 337, and the game ball placed on the rotating plate 338 is Due to the weight, the sorting device 336 is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction toward the second position where rotation is allowed. As a result, the game ball is guided to the first guide path 334 and enters the first prize opening 332, and the distribution device 336 is maintained at the second position due to its own weight balance.

Furthermore, when the sorting device 336 is in the second position, the plurality of rotary plates 338 of the sorting device 336 are configured to block both the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335; When a game ball enters the ball entry opening 331 of the winning device 33a, the game ball is guided to the rotating plate 338 extending to the right from the shaft portion 337, and the game ball placed on the rotating plate 338 is Due to the weight of the balls, the sorting device 336 is rotated clockwise toward the first position where rotation is allowed. As a result, the game ball is guided to the second guide path 335 and enters the second prize opening 333, and the distribution device 336 is maintained at the first position by its own weight balance.

With the above configuration, by letting the game ball enter the first starting winning device 33a, the game ball will alternately win into the first winning hole 332 and the second winning hole 333. The game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. Further, the specific configuration of the distribution device 336 is not particularly limited, and may be configured so that game balls can be entered into the first winning hole 332 and the second winning hole 333 alternately. For example, the design can be changed as appropriate. In addition, a magnet is embedded in the rotation amount regulating section 339, and a (permanently) magnetic material such as metal is embedded in each of the two rotating plates 338 that can come into contact with the rotation amount regulating section 339. The configuration may be such that the distribution device 336 is allowed to operate due to the weight of the distribution device 336 while maintaining the posture of the distribution device 336 even with slight vibrations.

A through gate 34 is arranged in an area located to the right of the variable display unit 35 (right side area) in the game area. The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through one ball at a time. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through the through gate 34.

A second starting winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side area. The second starting winning device 33b includes a pair of left and right wing members 371. The blade member 371 is configured to be rotatably movable between a closed position in which it extends vertically and an open position in which it opens outward. In this embodiment, a game nail is disposed directly above the second starting winning device 33b, and when the blade member 371 is in the closed position, a game nail is placed between the game nail and the blade member 371. There is no room for the ball to pass through. Therefore, by setting the blade member 371 to the closed position, the second starting winning device 33b is placed in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter. On the other hand, by displacing the blade member 371 to the open position, a space is secured between the game nail and the blade member 371 through which a game ball can pass, and the blade member 371 moves to the side of the second starting winning device 33b. The game ball is guided by the blade member 371 to the winning opening of the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, by setting the blade member 371 to the open position, the second starting prize winning device 33b is placed in the open state in which a game ball can enter.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b, and the normal symbol display is performed. A variable display is performed on the device 41 to show the result of the entrance support lottery. If the player wins in the entry support lottery, the second starting winning device 33b is kept open for a specified time after the variable display ends.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the first starting winning device 33a includes a left starting winning switch 224a that detects the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 332, and a left starting winning switch 224a that detects the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 333. A right start winning switch 224b for detection is provided. Furthermore, the second starting winning device 33b is provided with a second starting winning switch 224c that detects the game ball that has entered the second starting winning device 33b. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, 224c, a lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state is performed, and special display devices 43a, 43b, which will be described later, Further, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to perform variable display. If a jackpot state is won in the winning/failure lottery, a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left start winning switch 224a of the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a constitutes the first condition establishment detection means, and the right starting winning switch 224a of the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a constitutes the first condition establishment detection means. The starting winning switch 224b and the second starting winning switch 224c of the second starting winning device 33b constitute a second condition fulfillment detection means.

A variable winning device 32 is provided downstream of the second starting winning device 33b. The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a jackpot occurs, it is in an open state in which game balls can win. The variable winning device 32 includes a grand prize opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a grand prize shutter for opening and closing the grand prize opening, a solenoid for the grand prize opening for operating the grand prize shutter, and a grand prize opening. It is equipped with a count switch 223 that detects the game balls that have entered the ball, and controls the drive of the solenoid for the grand prize opening to open and close the grand prize shutter, thereby changing the variable winning device 32 (grand prize opening) between the closed state and the open state. I am switching to .

The big winning shutter of the variable winning device 32 of this embodiment is rotatably supported along the lower edge of the big winning opening, so that the variable winning device 32 can be closed. In this state, the big winning shutter extends up and down to close the big winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the top surface is slightly downwardly inclined toward the rear), and the game ball that flows down in front of the big winning opening is received by the back (top) of the grand prize shutter and guided to the grand prize opening.

In addition, a plurality of general prize winning devices 31 are arranged at the bottom of the area located on the left side of the variable display unit 35 (left side area) along the peripheral edge of the gaming area (inner rail component 51). ing. Note that in this embodiment, the through gate 34 is not arranged in the left side region.

In this embodiment, there is a "low probability state" in which you win a jackpot with a predetermined probability in a win/fail lottery, and a "high probability state" in which you win a jackpot with a higher probability than in a low probability state in a win/fail lottery. Furthermore, the blade member 371 of the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and there is a “high ball entry state” in which the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning device 33b, and a state in which the feather member 371 is almost open. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting prize winning device 33b. Hereinafter, a state with a low probability and a low ball entry state will be referred to as a "normal mode", and a state with a high probability and a high ball entry state will be referred to as a "probability variable mode".

In addition, the high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, (2) a single opening time of the second starting winning device 33b ( (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second starting winning device 33b is greater than in the low ball entry state; (4) A state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning ball entry support lottery is greater than that in the low ball entry state; (5) a state in which the probability of winning the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. An example of this is to maintain a high level of energy. The high ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". . This makes it easier for game balls to win frequently in the second starting prize winning device 33b, increasing the number of times that the winning lottery is executed, and creating a state in which the player has a good number of balls, which suppresses a decrease in the number of balls held by the player. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode is continued until a jackpot state occurs, whereas in the variable probability mode, the variable display on the special display devices 43a, 43b is set in advance even if a jackpot state does not occur. The configuration is such that the process ends after a specified number of times (100 times in this example) and shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, in the variable probability mode, the blade member 371 of the second starting winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, making it easier for the ball to enter the ball, and the through gate 34 is also provided only in the right side area. When the player enters the variable probability mode, the player fires the game ball toward the right side area where the second starting prize winning device 33b is provided (so-called "hitting to the right"). Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is provided in the right side area, "right-handed hitting" is performed even during the jackpot state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is launched to the left side area, the game ball can reach the first starting winning device 33a and enter the ball, but if the game ball is launched to the right side area, In this case, the board structure is basically such that the game ball cannot enter the first starting winning device 33a. Furthermore, in the normal mode, since it is almost impossible to expect the second starting winning device 33b (wing member 371) to open, in the normal mode, the game ball is fired toward the left side area (so-called "left-handed hit"). ). In addition, when it is time to hit right or left, an announcement is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like to indicate the launch position (launch strength) of the game ball.

In addition, the types of jackpot states (jackpot types) include 15 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RS"), 8 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RS"), and 4 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "4RS"). ). Regarding "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS", the variable winning device 32 must be opened for 30 seconds, or 8 game balls must enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. For "15RS", it is repeated 15 times, for "8RS", it is repeated 8 times, and for "4RS", it is repeated 4 times, and then the jackpot state is reached. ends.

Further, after the jackpot states of "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS" end, "probability variable mode" (in this example, variable display 100 times) is given. That is, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved, the variable probability mode is always provided after the jackpot state ends.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, the prize will be "15RS" at a rate of 10%, and "8RS" at a rate of 40%. Therefore, the ratio of 50% is "4RS". On the other hand, if you win a jackpot in the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, 50% of the time you will get "15RS" and 50% of the time you will get "8RS". Become. Further, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the entry of balls into the second starting prize winning device 33b, the prize will be "15 RS" at a rate of 50%, and "8 RS" at a rate of 50%.

In other words, compared to a case where a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, winning or losing based on the ball entering the second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a If you win a jackpot in the lottery, or if you win a jackpot in a lottery based on the balls entering the second starting winning device 33b, you will be able to win a type of jackpot that allows you to win more game balls (number of jackpot rounds). This increases the possibility that a jackpot with a large number of players will be awarded.

Further, adjacent to the upper right side of the approximately elliptical gaming area, there is a variation for teaching the result of a winning lottery conducted based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a. Based on the first special display device 43a where the display is performed, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a, and the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning device 33b. If a game ball enters the starting prize winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display on the second special display device 43b, where a variable display is displayed for teaching the result of the winning/disapproving lottery to be held, and the special display devices 43a, 43b. In this case, the first suspension display device 46a and the second suspension display device 46b indicating that the variable display corresponding to the entered ball has been suspended and stored are based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34. If a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the normal symbol display device 41 where a fluctuating display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery is performed and the fluctuating display on the regular symbol display device 41, the passing A normal hold display device 44 indicating that a variable display corresponding to the above is held and stored is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first reservation display device 46a, the second reservation display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal reservation display device 44 are controlled by the main controller. The display is directly controlled by the device 261.

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps). And, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, a switching display (fluctuating display) of the first special symbol lamp is performed on the first special display device 43a. It has become.

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special lamps). Then, when a ball enters the second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a or a game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, a second special symbol lamp is displayed on the second special display device 43b. The configuration is such that a switching display (fluctuating display) is performed. In this embodiment, variable display means is constituted by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, or the decorative pattern display device 42 described later, and the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b constitute a variable display device. When the second special display device 43b is used as a variable display means, the function of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the main control device 261 to perform variable display corresponds to the display control means. When the symbol display device 42 is used as a variable display means, the function of the sub-control device 262 that causes the display control device 45 to perform variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on commands from the main control device 261 becomes the display control means. Equivalent to.

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b for a predetermined period of time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the fluctuating display stops (combination of lit special figure lamps) is associated with various results of the winning/failure lottery, and the lighting mode when the fluctuating display stops determines whether the winning/failure lottery is successful or not. The result of the lottery, that is, a "big win" or a "miss" is definitely displayed. Furthermore, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, which one is "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS" They will also be taught about. In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that respectively teach various types of jackpots and misses, and one of them is selected and the stop mode is displayed. be done.

Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed. Furthermore, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, if the next variable display is not performed even after a specified period of time has elapsed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b The special display device 43b is configured to be switched from a lighting mode indicating the result of the winning lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is performed. Incidentally, a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting mode indicating the result of the winning lottery is maintained as it is.

The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b each include two (first hold lamp, second hold lamp). In this embodiment, a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a can be held and stored up to four times. ing. Furthermore, a variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a, and a varying display based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning device 33b (hereinafter referred to as “first starting winning device 33a”) 2 variable display) can be held and stored up to four times in total.

As described above, the first starting winning device 33a of this embodiment has a sorting system that alternately guides the game balls that have entered the first starting winning device 33a to the first winning hole 332 or the second winning hole 333. A device 336 is provided. For this reason, if it is possible to make a game ball win a prize in the first starting winning device 33a at a faster pace than the fluctuating display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is consumed, the first fluctuating display and the second It is possible to hold and store up to 8 times of variable display in groups of 4 times.

Also, for example, when the first variable display is on hold for one time, the first hold lamp on the left side (inner peripheral side of the gaming area) lights up, and when the first variable display is on hold for two times, the first hold lamp is lit. , if the first hold lamps on the left and right are lit and the first fluctuation display is held for three times, the first hold lamp on the left flashes, the first hold lamp on the right lights up, and the first change display is held. When the display is held for four times, the first holding lamps on the left and right blink. Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also put on hold. In this embodiment, the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b constitute a first hold display means (in which the hold look-ahead effect described later is not performed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the suspended variable displays are consumed in the order in which they were suspended, regardless of whether they are the first variable display or the second variable display. In other words, for example, the second variable display that was held after the first variable display that is already on hold is consumed before the first variable display, so that the order of the held changes is changed. Therefore, the structure is not such that either one is preferentially digested.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (common symbol lamps). In the normal symbol display device 41, the normal symbol lamp on the right side (on the outer periphery of the gaming area) is displayed blinking (variably displayed) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example. There is. Further, after the variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the ball entry support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the fluctuating display stops (combination of lit standard lamps) is associated with various results of the entrance support lottery, and the lighting mode when the fluctuating display stops , the results of the entrance support lottery will be displayed definitively. For example, lighting up both the left and right regular map lamps indicates "winning", and lighting only the left regular map lamp indicates "losing".

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 can be held and stored up to four times. For example, if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inner peripheral side of the gaming area) lights up, and if two times are held, the normal hold lamp on the left and right lights up. If the hold lamp lights up and there are 3 times on hold, the normal hold lamp on the left will flash and the right side normal hold lamp will light up, and if 4 times have been held on hold, the left and right normal hold lamps will flash. flashes. Incidentally, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the display of the change will also be put on hold.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 42 which is constituted by a liquid crystal display device and is capable of displaying decorative patterns. The decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to display decorative patterns in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Further, the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, based on a command from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 makes the display correspond to the results displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and the display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three upper, middle, and lower symbol display regions (an upper symbol display region, a middle symbol display region, and a lower symbol display region), and each symbol display region can display a plurality of types of decorations. Symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9 attached) are displayed in sequence (variably displayed), and then sequentially in each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display). The decorative patterns (in the order of the areas) are stopped and displayed. For example, when the main controller 261 determines that a jackpot has occurred, the first or second special display device 43a, 43b displays a display corresponding to the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a jackpot. (For example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area so that they are lined up on a predetermined effective line), and a jackpot state occurs. is started. Furthermore, among the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the upper symbol display area where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed first is basically referred to as the "first symbol display area". '', the lower pattern display area where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed second is also called the ``second pattern display area'', and the middle pattern display area where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed last. This is also referred to as the "third symbol display area."

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be done. In this way, a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and a variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-reach state. Of course, even if a reach state occurs, it does not necessarily mean that it will be a jackpot, and there may be cases where the player misses.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) that was stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same active line. A jackpot condition is given when the number is stopped (the number zero is stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the odd numbered zeroth, "15RS" is generated, and in the case of the even numbered zeroth, one of "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS" is generated.

In this embodiment, a plurality of performance stages (with different background motifs, etc.) are prepared on the decorative symbol display device 42 as performances that teach or suggest the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, there is a "probable variable stage" indicating that the mode is staying in the variable probability mode, and a "normal stage" indicating that the mode is staying in the normal mode. In other words, when "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS" are won, the game moves to the "probability change stage" after the jackpot state ends. Further, in the "probable variation stage", when the variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b (variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42) is performed 100 times, the stage shifts to the "normal stage".

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b that is performed based on the entry of game balls into the starting prize winning devices 33a, 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is not obtained). This is also taught in the decorative pattern display device 42. Although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 52, a hold icon 471 indicating that a variable display is held and stored is displayed in a hold display area 461 which is a lower area of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 42. be done. Furthermore, regarding the hold icon 471 of this embodiment, it is possible to understand whether the hold icon 471 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display. In this embodiment, the hold display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 constitutes hold display means (second hold display means).

Furthermore, a rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 4). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the play area. It will be destroyed.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned space. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide game balls that have fallen from the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. be discharged.

Further, the reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like to substantially close the exit of the dispensing passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end of the lower plate communication path 71 on the entrance side. In addition, the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and when the front frame set 14 is in the closed state, the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflowing to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), It passes through the passage 71 and is delivered to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification is issued that teaches that the lower tray 15 is full using display on the decorative pattern display device 42, audio, etc. control is performed. Incidentally, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5, 6, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover is provided that covers the center frame 47 from behind. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative pattern display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. is attached to.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a that has an opening for exposing the display section (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 , and is placed on the back side of the frame cover 213 . Fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213. Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a, 262a are made of transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won in various winning holes. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches corresponding to various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, which detect game balls that have entered the various winning holes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. Furthermore, the first starting winning device 33a includes a left starting winning switch 224a that detects when a game ball enters the first winning opening 332, and a right starting winning switch 224a that detects when a gaming ball enters the second winning opening 333. A starting winning switch 224b is provided, and the second starting winning device 33b is provided with a second starting winning switch 224c. In addition, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first panel relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. There is. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the left starting winning switch 224a, the right starting winning switch 224b, and the second starting winning switch 224c are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225.)
In addition, on the back side of the game board 30, although not shown, there is provided a solenoid for a grand prize opening that opens a grand prize opening in the variable winning device 32. Further, the second starting winning device 33b is provided with a blade-side motor that drives the blade member 371 to open and close as described above. Furthermore, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second panel relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying the transmission of various information to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, probability change mode, etc.), front frame set 14 and inner frame detected by open detection switches 91 and 92, which will be described later. Terminal for outputting information regarding the release of 12, terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no tank ball error, and payout error, and prizes paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of pitches is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It happens.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further downstream of the tank rail 356, a vertical case rail 357 is connected. connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. is attached to.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it in one direction, the locking device 600 locks the cylinder. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control device 261 (main board) as a main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 includes a RAM erase switch circuit 543 to be described later, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and a first and second pending display. Devices 46a, 46b, normal hold display device 44, etc. are connected. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43a, 43b and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, starting winning switches 224a, 223b, 224c, a through gate switch 225, and various switches of the handle 18. Various electric components such as various detection switches such as various circuit boards, a solenoid for opening and closing the variable prize winning device 32, and a blade side motor for opening and closing the second starting prize device 33b (blade member 371) are connected. . That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It is equipped with a RAM 553, which is a memory that temporarily stores various data, etc. when executing the program, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. It is equipped with The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, a cross button 126, various illumination parts, lamps 102, 104, and the like.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display the display control. In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 constitute display control means. As described above, in this embodiment, the fact that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main controller 261, and the sub-control device 262 In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by the special display devices 43a and 43b, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner as an effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern on the special display devices 43a and 43b. In addition, the ROM 552 of this embodiment stores a gaming machine ID.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing prohibition button 18a (which stops firing) is activated. (see FIG. 1) is not operated, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative pattern display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, there is a win/fail random number counter C1 as a win/fail random number generation means used for a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used to determine the jackpot type (type lottery). a determination counter C2, a fluctuation selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not to generate a reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the win/fail random number counter C1, and a first And the first fluctuation type counter CS1, the second fluctuation type counter CS2, which are used for determining the fluctuation display time of the second special display devices 43a, 43b (decorative symbol display device 42), and the second start winning device 33b are in the open state. A normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the entry support lottery to determine whether or not to allow the player to enter the ball is used. Incidentally, the variation selection counter C3 is also used for lottery of reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is removed and varied. Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (performance pattern selection) of the decorative pattern display device 42. Specifically, based on the determined variation pattern, the variation time of the special display devices 43a, 43b is determined, and the variation mode and variation time, that is, the performance pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage means in which the values of the win/fail random number counter C1, type determination counter C2, and fluctuation selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored. A variable holding area is provided. The normal fluctuation holding area includes four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes eight holding areas (first holding area to eighth holding area) and one execution area. In each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area, according to the winning history of game balls to the first starting winning device 33a (first winning opening 332 and second winning opening 333) and the second starting winning device 33b, The values of the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in time series. In this embodiment, the first variable display performed on the first special display device 43a and the second variable display performed on the second special display device 43b can be suspended up to four times each. It should be noted that each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area and the execution area constitute a storage area of the holding storage means.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/fail random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 695, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 695), the lower limit value as the opening price is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the win/fail random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/fail random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 695) similar to the win/fail random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the win/fail random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a low probability state (normal mode, time saving mode), the number of values of the win/fail random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot is 2, and the value is "7, 307", and the probability is high. In the state (probability variable mode), the number of values of the win/fail random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In other words, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success/failure determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. , "7, 307" are stored as jackpot values, and there is a second jackpot determination table that stores "8-16, 308-316" as jackpot values.

The type determination counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (ie, 19). Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. In this example, the first type determination table that is referred to when a jackpot is achieved in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, and the second type determining table of the first starting winning device 33a. A winning opening 333 and a second type determination table that is referred to when a jackpot is achieved in response to the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b are provided. Then, when a jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of jackpot state to be awarded is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (a type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is awarded. The Rukoto.

Note that the type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the type determining counter C2 stored in the type determining counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

The variable selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In this embodiment, after the fluctuation selection counter C3 generates a reach state with respect to a decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before or after the reach symbol and stops, and the same reach state occurs. A lottery will be made between ``reach except before and after,'' where the rear final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' in which no reach state occurs. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter C3 and the reach type. If a winner is not selected in the lottery, whether or not to generate a reach state is determined based on the value of the variable selection counter C3, and furthermore, if a reach state is to be generated, the type of reach is determined. becomes.

Note that the variation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 37, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 37). It becomes. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough pattern variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach. (In this example, the medium symbol) is determined in more detailed manner, such as the elapsed time until it stops. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of variation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in the same manner by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stopped symbols.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described below is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative pattern display device 42 determines a variation pattern when the variation of the decorative pattern starts.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 232). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34.Low input. The number of random number values that can be won when the ball is in the ball state is only 1. On the other hand, the number of random number values that can be won when the ball is in a high ball state is 232, and the range is 1 to 232. In other words, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 contains a support determination table for low ball entry that is referenced in the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state, and a support determination table that is referenced in the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state. A support determination table for high ball input is prepared.When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that results in a winning is acquired, after a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time, the winning is determined. The corresponding lighting mode is displayed, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened in a pattern according to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly moves to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ). Furthermore, upon outputting this prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter C1, type determination counter C2, variation selection counter C3, and normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum values (in this embodiment, 695 and 19, respectively). , 238, 232), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, a starting prize winning process is executed when a winning is made to the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. Execute pass processing. After step S305, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the first variable display based on the entry of game balls into the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, and a first holding counter Na of the first starting winning device 33a. The second holding counter Nb counts the number of pending second variable displays based on the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 333 and the second starting winning device 33b, the total number of pending variable displays (the first A total number of reservation counters Nx are provided for counting the total number of reservations (the sum of the number of reservations in the variable display and the number of reservations in the second variable display).

In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the win/fail random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, and a win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

Further, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area are provided with a fluctuation storage area in which information indicating whether the display is the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display is stored. . Hereinafter, "information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and "information indicating that the variation storage area is the second variation display" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set to on". ``The fact that information indicating the second fluctuation flag is stored'' is also referred to as ``the second fluctuation flag is set on''.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the game ball has won in either the second starting winning device 33b or the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a using the second starting winning switch 224c and the right This is determined based on the detection information of the starting winning detection switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than an upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process moves to step S511. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, where the second hold counter Nb and the total hold count counter Nx are incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S504, the values of the win/fail random number counter C1, type determination counter C2, and fluctuation selection counter C3 (in the win/fail random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, and fluctuation selection counter buffer) updated in the random number update process of step S303 are updated. Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant reservation areas of the special fluctuation reservation area.

After step S504, in step S505, a second fluctuation flag is set to ON in the fluctuation storage area of the reservation area (hereinafter also referred to as "new reservation area") in which each counter value was stored in step S504. In the subsequent step S506, a validity determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area (stored in the new reservation area) is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Note that details of the validity determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area. A second type determination process is performed. Note that details of the second type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the new reservation area, the value at the time of a loss fluctuation is determined. Perform reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Note that details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, details of the validity determination process in step S506 will be explained with reference to FIG. 14. First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the new reservation area matches either "7" or "307", which is the value stored in the first win/fail determination table. do. Incidentally, "7" and "307" are values that result in a jackpot in both low probability and high probability states.

Note that in FIG. 14, the process of step S5101 is simplified for convenience, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 is "307" or not, and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first validity flag is turned on in step S5102, and then the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the random number counter C1 stored in the new reservation area is "8 to 16, 308 to 316", which is the value stored in the second validity determination table. It is determined whether either of the following is true. Incidentally, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are values that can be a jackpot only in variable probability mode (high probability state). In this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to a jackpot as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "missing" even in a high probability state, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second validity flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the win/fail random number counter C1, the first win/fail flag and the second win/fail flag are not separately provided, and the jackpot state is not stored in the win/fail random number storage area. It is configured to store (overwrite) information on whether or not it occurs. That is, for convenience of explanation, storing information indicating that a jackpot state occurs in the win/fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the first win/fail flag and the second win/fail flag to ON.

In addition to the win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the win/fail random number counter C1, a separate win/fail flag is provided to store the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 at this point, and the fluctuation display described later In the variable display setting process performed at the start, a corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the random number counter C1 to determine the validity.

Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be explained with reference to FIG. 16. First, in step S5301, the new reservation area is referred to and it is determined whether the first or second validity flag was set on in the validity determination process that was performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility of a jackpot situation occurring), the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the second type determination table is referred to in step S5302, and the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area is It is determined whether or not the value matches the value "0 to 9" corresponding to "15RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5204, and the process ends.

Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first validity flag of the new reservation area was set in the validity determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a jackpot occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a jackpot state does not occur (there is a possibility of losing) at least in a low probability state, in step S5402, the reach determination table is referred to, and a new pending state is determined. It is determined whether the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". If the determination in step S5402 is affirmative, in step S5403, the front/back flag indicating the occurrence of front/back off reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area that stores the value of the variation selection counter C3, there is no separate front/back flag, but information indicating that the reach is "out of front/back" in the reach random number storage area. It is configured to memorize (overwrite). In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, making the settings for the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the preceding and following flags.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the reach determination table is referred to in step S5404, and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front and rear outliers". It is determined whether the value matches any of the values "2 to 11". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step S5405, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variable display ends without passing through the ready-to-reach state (completely off), the process is directly ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a process for setting the first command is performed. In the first command of this embodiment, the result of the validity determination process (the first validity flag is set on, the second validity flag is set on, or both are not set on), The result of the type determination process (15RS, 8RS, 4RS), the result of the reach determination process (whether or not the reach of the fluctuating display has occurred, or the type of reach), the first fluctuating display or the second fluctuating display. It includes various game information such as which one it is. The set preceding command is then output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

In the subsequent step S510, an addition display process is performed on the second reservation display device 46b (second reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the second variable display increases by one. In other words, if both the left and right second holding lamps are off, the left second holding lamp is turned on, the left second holding lamp is on, and the right second holding lamp is off. If so, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left side second hold lamp is turned on while the right side second hold lamp is lit. If the second hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the second hold lamp on the right side is in a lit state, processing is performed to make both the left and right second hold lamps blink.

After the process of step S510, or if a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S511, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a. is determined based on the detection information of the left start winning switch 224a. If the determination in step S511 is negative, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S512, the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings in the first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a. It is determined whether the value of is less than an upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S512, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, where the first reservation counter Na and the total reservation counter Nx are incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S514, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1, type determination counter C2, and fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in an empty holding area of the special fluctuation hold area (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area ). After step S514, in step S515, a first fluctuation flag is set to ON in the fluctuation storage area of the reservation area (new reservation area) in which each counter value was stored in step S514.

In the subsequent step S516, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the new reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the validity determination process have already been described above. In other words, in this embodiment, the winning/failure judgment process based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the winning/failing judging process based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b are common, and in turn, the same game In the mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery is the same.

In the following step S517, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area. A first type determination process is performed. Details of the first type determination process have already been described above.

Here, the first type determination process in step S517 will be explained with reference to FIG. 15. First, in step S5201, the new reservation area is referred to and it is determined whether the first or second validity flag was set on in the validity determination process that was performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot situation occurring), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state will occur), in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to, and the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area is It is determined whether or not the value matches the value "0, 1" corresponding to "15RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5203, and the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area is set to the value "2" corresponding to "8RS". ~9''. If the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 4RS flag is turned on in step S5206, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the new reservation area is Based on the value of , reach determination processing is performed to determine the type of reach. Note that in this embodiment, processing similar to step S508 described above is performed.

After step S518, in step S519, a first command setting process is performed. In the subsequent step S520, an addition display process is performed on the first reservation display device 46a (first reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the first variable display increases by one. In other words, if both the left and right first holding lamps are off, the left first holding lamp is turned on, the left first holding lamp is on, and the right first holding lamp is off. If so, both the left and right first holding lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right first holding lamps are lit, the left first holding lamp is turned on while the right side first holding lamp is lit. If the first hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in a lit state, processing is performed to make both the left and right first hold lamps blink.

After step S520, this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 etc. are directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the win/fail determination process is performed. , type determination processing, and reach determination processing are executed, but the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when acquiring the values of the random number counter C1, etc., a temporary storage area (work area) is provided to temporarily store these counter values, and the information stored in the temporary storage area is subjected to the validity judgment process and the type. After the determination process and the reach determination process are executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the determination process and the reach determination process are stored in the reservation area of the corresponding special fluctuation reservation area.

The process of extracting the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S514 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S514 is also stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes a discriminant value storage process. Further, the process of determining whether the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S516 (steps S5101 and S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first validity determination process, and the determination result is The processing of steps S5102 and S5104 for storing (setting a correspondence flag) constitutes the result storage processing. Furthermore, the function of extracting the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S514 constitutes an information acquisition means,
Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18. In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process advances to step S603, and the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S605, an addition display process is performed on the normal holding display device 44 (normal holding lamp) corresponding to the increase in the holding number of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 by one. In other words, if a pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both off, the left normal hold lamp will be turned on, and if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right side normal hold lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, if both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp blinks while the right side normal hold lamp remains lit, and the left normal hold lamp is turned on. If the lamps are blinking and the right normal hold lamp is lit, processing is performed to make both the left and right normal hold lamps blink. After step S605, the through gate passing process ends.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. Its contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Execute wait processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process moves to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step S112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case as well, the process moves to step S112.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.). That is, in step S113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step S109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at power-off. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43a, 43b, etc. updated in the previous normal processing are sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each sub-side control device. Execute external output processing such as

For example, upon variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b, a variable pattern command and a symbol command are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. In other words, these commands are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform variable display of decorative patterns, which is an effect that matches the variable display performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b. It is a command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the variation mode (variation time, performance mode, etc.) of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the command, and changes the variation mode to the decorative pattern display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to display (variable display) at 42.

The variation pattern command includes information that specifies the variation type of the decorative pattern, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the performance pattern of the variable display based on the variable pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, audio, and the like.

Here, the variation types of decorative patterns will be explained. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than variations in decorative symbols. In addition, in the variable probability mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode even in the case of various reaches. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "10 seconds" in the variable probability mode and time reduction mode.

In "Super Reach", characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols (after the attainment of the reach state), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. It's a pattern. In this embodiment, three types of super reach, SR1, SR2, and SR3, are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

"Premium Reach" is a performance mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to decorative symbols, characters with patterns different from Super Reach, etc. This is a reach pattern that creates a sense of anticipation in the player. There are two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 in the present embodiment, and the variable display time differs depending on the type of premium reach.

In addition, the variable display time for "completely off" which does not result in any reach state is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the variable probability mode and time reduction mode.

Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after a variable time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine the stopping symbol, and includes a combination of "15RS" jackpot symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of symbols that are out of front and back, a combination of symbols other than out of front and back, and a combination of symbols that are out of front and back, and completely out. This designates five categories of symbol combinations. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

In other words, when a symbol command corresponding to the "15RS" jackpot symbol combination is received, one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is selected as the stop symbol. When the symbol command corresponding to the jackpot symbol combination is received, one of the symbol combinations consisting of 2, 4, 6, or 8 (normally jackpot symbols) is stopped. Determine as.

The combination of the front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops. The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which even reach does not occur. In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern display device 42 stops displaying a combination of front and back out-of-line symbols, a combination of symbols other than front-and-back out-of-line symbols, and a combination of completely out-of-line symbols, it becomes a "miss".

Although details will be described later, when the sub-control device 262 receives these out-of-symbol commands, it determines the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In this embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the stop pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 (probable variable jackpot symbol, normal jackpot symbol, front and back off symbols, front and back off symbols, completely missed symbols), and outputs a symbol command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control device 262 may determine the stop mode of the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the information on the jackpot type and the near-reach type output from the main control device 261. A configuration may also be adopted in which a combination of decorative patterns is determined.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, special display control processing is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b are controlled, and jackpot determination and variable display settings on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are also performed. Details of this special display control processing will be described later.

In step S206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable prize winning device 32 is performed. Further, details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step S208, a starting prize winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second starting winning device 33b (wing member 371) is performed. The details of this starting winning device control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step S211, step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59, 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the correct/false random number counter C1), and similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Furthermore, if the power outage occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S213 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S214, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step S215. to be memorized.

Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring before data is stored (step S213), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the special display control process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval period set after the variable display on the special display devices 43a, 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is the variable interval period, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then the process ends. That is, for example, if the variable interval period is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if the configuration is such that step S802 is performed before step S801)" In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not the variable interval period, then in step S803, a winning situation storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to and whether or not the current state is other than the jackpot state is determined. Determine.

In addition, "in the jackpot state" includes the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped on the specific display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is released, and the period when the variable winning device 32 is in the jackpot state. It includes a round period in which the variable winning device 32 is in an open state, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can start. .

In the winning situation storage area of this embodiment, "0" is stored in states other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, "1" is stored during the opening period and interval period, "2" is stored during the round period, The configuration is such that "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the winning situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if it is a jackpot state, this process is immediately terminated.On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, in step S804, a special figure is displayed, which will be described in detail later. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43a, 43b is displaying a variable display by looking at the setting status of the flag. Specifically, when the special figure displaying flag is on, it is considered that a variable display is in progress, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that a stationary display is in progress, which is a state in which the variable display is stopped. Although the details will be described later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting variable display on the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and when the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b It is turned off when the floating display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if the jackpot is not in progress, and if the variable display is not in progress, the process moves to step S805, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are displayed. In each step, a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which no variable display is performed (for example, a mode in which only the first special symbol lamp or the second special symbol lamp on the right of the bottom row is lit) is derived. Configure standby display settings for In other words, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of this embodiment, after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop mode is maintained during the fluctuation interval period (in a mode showing the result of the winning lottery). However, when the fluctuation interval period ends, the display mode is switched to a display mode that indicates the fluctuation standby state.

After step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and the value of the total pending number counter Nx that counts the total pending number of variable displays triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is greater than 0. is also large. If a negative determination is made in step S806, that is, if no variable display is pending, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S806, that is, if at least one variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the total number of hold counters Nx in step S807.

In the subsequent step S808, a process is executed to shift the data (variation information) stored in the special variation holding area. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first holding area to the eighth holding area of the special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area.

After step S808, in step S809, it is determined whether the first fluctuation flag of the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S809, that is, if the fluctuation information corresponds to the first fluctuation display based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, in step S810, the first Subtract 1 from the pending counter Na.

In the subsequent step S811, a subtraction display process is performed on the first reservation display device 46a (first reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the first variable display has decreased by one. In other words, if the left and right pair of first hold lamps are both blinking, the right first hold lamp is turned on while the left first hold lamp is blinking, and the left first hold lamp is blinking. When the first holding lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first holding lamps are lit, and when both the left and right first holding lamps are lit, the first holding lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the first holding lamp on the right side while leaving it on, and if the first holding lamp on the left side is on and the first holding lamp on the right side is off, turn off the first holding lamps on both the left and right sides. Perform the processing to make it happen.

After step S811, in step S812, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S809, that is, a second variable display based on the ball entering the second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a or the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is supported. If the change information is the change information, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S813. In the subsequent step S814, a subtraction display process is performed on the second reservation display device 46b (second reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the second variable display has decreased by one. In other words, if the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both blinking, the second hold lamp on the left is kept blinking, the second hold lamp on the right is lit, and the second hold lamp on the left is blinking. When the second holding lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second holding lamps are lit, and when both the left and right second holding lamps are lit, the second holding lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the second holding lamp on the right side while keeping it lit, and if the second holding lamp on the left side is lit and the second holding lamp on the right side is off, turn off the second holding lamps on both the left and right sides. Perform the processing to make it happen.

After step S814, in step S812, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S812 will be explained with reference to FIG. 20.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the mode is in a high probability state (variable probability mode) by referring to a mode storage area, which will be described in detail later. Note that the mode storage area stores discrimination information for discriminating the game mode. In this embodiment, a value of "11" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, where "11" corresponds to the normal mode and "21" corresponds to the variable probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability state by determining whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is high probability state (probability variable mode), in step S902, the first or second It is determined whether either of the validity flags (see the validity determination process in FIG. 14) is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/fail lottery in a high probability state, the process moves to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the success/failure random number storage area is referred to and whether the first success/failure flag is on or not is determined. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/fail lottery in a low probability state, the process moves to step S904.

In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of a jackpot state has been confirmed is set on. In this embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot state in the win/fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the jackpot confirmation flag to ON.

In the subsequent step S905, it is determined whether the 15RS flag (see type determination processing in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, in the case of "15RS", 15RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variable pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a fluctuation display to notify the occurrence of "15RS", and a special The fluctuation patterns of the display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 (fluctuating display time, stop mode, performance pattern, etc.) are determined, and based on the determination, various flags, etc., the fluctuation pattern commands and pattern commands are set, etc. I do. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation display time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process moves to step S916, which will be described later.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S905, in step S907, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, in the case of "8RS", 8RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variable pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process moves to step S916.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S907, 4RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variable pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process moves to step S916.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in a low probability state, the process moves to step S910, and it is determined whether or not the second win/fail flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, a front and rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S912, which will be described later, and then the process moves to step S916.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot was not won in a high probability state, or if a negative determination is made in step S910, the reach random number of the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area is determined in step S911. Referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the front and rear flags (see the reach determination process in FIG. 17) are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, if it is a "front/back off reach", a front/back reach pattern setting process is performed in step S912, and then the process moves to step S916.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S911, in step S913, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than the previous one is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S913, that is, if it is "reach other than front/back off", a reach pattern setting process other than front/back is performed at step S914, and then the process moves to step S916.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S913, that is, if it is "completely off", the off-setting variation pattern setting process is performed in step S915, and then the process moves to step S916.

In step S916, a special figure displaying flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to ON. This indicates that the conditions for performing switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b are satisfied. In the following step S917, a special figure display timer setting process is performed to measure the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b. The special figure display timer is referred to when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the settings of the special figure display timer, when a control signal to start switching display (fluctuating display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process of normal processing, , a switching display (fluctuating display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 that has received the fluctuation pattern command and the symbol command starts the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the fluctuation pattern command (basically) at the same time as the special display devices 43a and 43b start to fluctuate. At the same time as the special display devices 43a and 43b stop displaying, the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped and displayed using a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After step S917 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S514 and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the win/fail determination process of steps S506 and S513, and the fluctuation display setting In the processing, a winning/failure lottery is formed by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining the winning/failure based on the winning/failure flag and the situation at that time. Further, the processing of steps S901 to S903 constitutes a second validity determination process, and the processing of steps S906, S908, S909, S912, S914, and S915 constitutes a variable display setting process.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, if an affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S815, and a subtraction process of the special figure display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S816, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed by referring to the value of the special figure display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S816.

If a negative determination is made in step S816, a switching display setting is performed in step S822 to continuously perform switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process in normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S822, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S816, the special figure displaying flag is turned off in step S817, and in step S818, a stop display setting for performing a stop display is performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Based on the settings of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process in normal processing. That is, the display is stopped in a stopping manner corresponding to each type of jackpot, loss, etc.

Further, after step S818, in step S819, a stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to stop displaying the decorative pattern display device 42. This ensures synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42. However, since the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the pattern command and variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 is There is no need to add . Also, as I repeat, the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b is the main display, and the display of decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for presentation).

Subsequently, in step S820, a determination information setting process is performed to initialize the winning state and to set the switching of the game mode, and in step S821, the variable interval timer is set to a value corresponding to a variable interval period (for example, 1 second). After setting the value, this process ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S1001, the winning/failing random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the 15RS flag is set on in the execution area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is set to "15".

In the following step S1004, "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Furthermore, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set to a special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1006, the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls that have entered per round, which is 8. . In addition, the value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), and the value is transferred to the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that a ball has entered, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1007, an opening command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of the winning state. After step S1007, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in the execution area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the round number counter is set to "8" in step S1009, and then the process proceeds to step S1004. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1008, the round number counter is set to "4" in step S1009, and then the process proceeds to step S1004.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1011 whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the mode is variable probability mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1011, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1011 is affirmative, in step S1012, the value of the variation counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure the duration (time limit) of the variable probability mode. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the jackpot state ends, the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the deadline of the variable probability mode is set in the fluctuation number counter. Then, each time the special display devices 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) perform variable display once, the value of the change frequency counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1012.

In the following step S1013, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter is "0". On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1013, that is, if the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b has not yet been performed for the specified number of times set as the deadline for the probability variable mode after the winning state ends, This process ends immediately.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1013, "11" indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1014. That is, when variable display has been performed a prescribed number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the variable probability mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1014, in step S1015, a support end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the variable probability mode, and then this process is ended. The sub-control device 262 that has received the support end command executes processing such as shifting the production stage of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the normal stage.

Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the value set in the winning situation storage area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the state is other than the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if there is no jackpot state, the process is immediately terminated. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the winning status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot is in progress (if any of "1" to "3" is set in the winning status storage area), the process moves to step S1202. , the value of the special variable timer is subtracted by 1. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000" is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the winning situation storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "2" is set in the winning situation storage area in step S1205. In the following step S1206, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable prize winning device 32 is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1206, in step S1207, processing is performed to open the variable prize winning device 32, and in step S1208, a round command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start a round. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not "3" is set in the winning situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all the rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period starts, "3" will be set in the winning situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1210.

In the following step S1211, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process moves to step S1212, and "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1213, a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer.

After step S1213, in step S1214, the winning counter is set to "8". Further, in step S1215, a process is performed to close the variable prize winning device 32, and in step S1216, an interval command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start an interval. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is still time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the variable winning device 32, the process moves to step S1217, and the variable winning device 32 It is determined whether or not the value of a winning counter that measures the number of balls that have entered the winning device 32 is "0". Note that the winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round, at the start of the jackpot state and at the start of the interval. Then, each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, 1 is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1217, that is, if the opportunity to end the round comes before the set period of the round has elapsed, the process moves to step S1210. As a result, if 8 game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process moves to step S1218, and "3" is set in the winning situation storage area. After step S1218, in step S1219, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer.

After step S1219, in step S1220, the winning counter is set to "7". Incidentally, when the process of setting the ending after step S1218 is performed after the affirmative determination is made in step S1217, the value of the winning prize counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to "0" at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination will be made in step S1217 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, by entering a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) into the prize winning counter in step S1220, the ending period is made to complete. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1220, in step S1221, a process is performed to close the variable prize winning device 32, and in the following step S1222, an ending command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the ending. After that, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the ending period ends and the time has come to end the jackpot state, the process moves to step S1223 and an end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

Here, the termination setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 23. First, in step S1401, a value "21" corresponding to the variable probability mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the variable probability mode will be provided after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1402, "100" is set for the variation counter. After step S1402, in step S1403, a variable probability start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of variable variable mode. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22, after the end setting process in step S1223, in step S1224, "0" indicating that there is no jackpot state is set in the winning situation storage area. After that, in step S1225, a winning end command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to end the jackpot state, and then this process is ended. It should be noted that the winning end command includes information on the number of times of variation counter set in the above-mentioned end setting process, etc.

Next, the normal display control process in step S207 in the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the normal pattern interval period set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is the regular pattern interval period, the value of the regular pattern interval timer is subtracted in step S2102, and then the process ends. That is, for example, if the general pattern interval period is 1 second (1000 msec), the general pattern interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if the configuration is such that step S2102 is performed before step S2101)". In this case, in this process, the value of the regular pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is not the normal pattern interval period, in step S2103, the normal pattern display flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a variable pattern is set. Determine whether it is on. In addition, when the normal symbol display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2104, and it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is pending, this process is directly ended. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, a standby display setting is performed in the normal symbol display device 41 to derive a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which a variable display is not performed. You can also use it as In other words, after the normal pattern display device 41 stops changing, its stop mode is maintained during the normal pattern interval period (in a mode that shows the result of the entry support lottery), but the normal pattern display device 41 ends when the normal pattern interval period ends. Then, it may be configured such that the display mode is switched to a display mode that indicates the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In the following step S2106, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step S2107, a normal symbol fluctuation setting process is executed to set and start the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41. Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display is set on. In the following step S2302, the winning situation storage area is referred to and it is determined whether "0" is stored, that is, whether the current state is other than the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if there is no jackpot state, then in step S2303 it is determined whether or not a value of "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, a high ball hit state (probability variation). mode).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation of the normal symbol display device 41 is set to Set "100" to make the display time 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "0". In addition, in the high ball input state, the winning occurs when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232".

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if you have won the ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b, in step S2306, it is determined that you have won the ball entry support lottery. Turn on the incoming ball support flag. After step S2306, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2302, or if a negative determination is made in step S2303, that is, in a jackpot state or a low ball hit state, in step S2307, for the normal figure display timer, Set "2000" to make the variable display time of the normal symbol 8 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1". In addition, in the low ball entry state, if the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1", it is a win.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the ball entry support lottery has been won, then in step S2309, a ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery has been won is set on. After step S2309, or if a negative determination is made in step S2308, the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, a subtraction display process of the normal holding display device 44 (normal holding lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of holdings in the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is decreased by one. I do. In other words, if a pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both blinking, the left normal hold lamp will remain blinking and the right side normal hold lamp will turn on, and the left normal hold lamp will remain blinking while the right side normal hold lamp will remain blinking. If the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp remains lit and the right normal hold lamp is lit. The holding lamp is turned off, and when the left normal holding lamp is on and the right normal holding lamp is off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal holding lamps. After step S2108, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to step S2109, and a process of subtracting the normal symbol display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the regular figure display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S2110, and it is determined whether the count value of the general figure display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal symbol displaying flag is turned off in step S2111, and in step S2112, the normal symbol stop display setting is performed for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41. That is, if it is a win (when the entry support flag is set to on), both the left and right regular lamps are lit, and if it is a loss, only the left regular lamp is lit.

Next, the process advances to step S2113, and ordinary figure discrimination information setting processing is performed. Here, the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 26. First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the ball entering support flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, then in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the open time of the second start prize winning device 33b is set to 4 for the normal variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start prize winning device 33b. Set "1000" to make it seconds.

Furthermore, in step S2405, "3" is set to the opening number counter that counts the number of times the second starting winning device 33b is opened (remaining number of times) in order to open the second starting winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, the incoming ball support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, the second startup winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the normal variable timer is set to set the open time of the second start prize winning device 33b to 0.4 seconds. Set "100". Subsequently, in step S2407, the opening number counter is set to "1" in order to open the second starting prize winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the support period flag is turned on, and in step S2410, the second starting winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then This process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to the general pattern interval period (for example, 1 second) is set for the general pattern interval timer, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display in which a pair of left and right normal symbol lamps are alternately lit). I do. In addition, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 msec. After step S2115, this process ends.

Next, the startup winning device control process in step S208 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27. First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2202.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is the period during which the open/closed state of the second starting winning device 33b is maintained, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the second starting winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing to close it has arrived, the process moves to step S2205 and the normal variable flag is turned off. . In the following step S2206, the value of the opening number counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second starting winning device 33b is set to be in the closed state.

Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether the value of the open count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery was held in variable probability mode, and based on this, the remaining number of times the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times. If there is, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "100") is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period during which the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state), the timing to end the interval period is If the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, a value (in this example, "1000") corresponding to the open time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2212, and in step S2213, the second After setting the starting prize winning device 33b to the open state, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 28, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step S3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by an interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if an abnormality in backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step S3115 onward. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process moves to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step S3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step S3123 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step S3124. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and the contents of the registers are saved in the backup area 513a. RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step S3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is checked after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from the main controller 261. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process in step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and set the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step S3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step S3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 30. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, a lower tray full state or a lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the setting for the lower tray full state is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray 15 is set. Execute the setting for the plate full release state. Further, in step S3206, a tank ball absent state (bulb out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition, the no-tank-bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the dispensing motor is driven to execute the ball ejecting process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball ejecting is not disabled and the ball ejecting operation has not started. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed in which information on the preceding command output from the main controller 261 is stored in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262. In addition, as described above, the first command includes information indicating whether the variation information corresponds to the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating whether it corresponds to a jackpot, information indicating the jackpot type, Contains information indicating the type of reach. In particular, in this embodiment, it is a variable display that results in a jackpot not only in the variable probability mode as the second gaming mode, but also in the normal mode as the first gaming mode (corresponding to turning on the first win/fail flag), or in the variable probability mode. It also includes information that makes it possible to determine whether it is a variable display that only results in a jackpot (corresponding to turning on the second win/fail flag). In this embodiment, the reservation information storage area and the special variable reservation area of the main controller 261 constitute a reservation storage means.

The reservation information storage area of the sub-control device 262, like the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261, includes eight reservation areas (first reservation area to eighth reservation area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, according to the reception history of the first command, information on whether or not it is a jackpot included in the first command, the type of jackpot, the reach type, and whether it is the first variable display or the second variable display is stored. Information (variation information) related to variable display, such as information on whether or not the user is present, is stored in chronological order. As a result, it is possible for the sub-control device 262 to grasp not only the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the reservation area.

The pending information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102, a variable pending counter Nd that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1. Furthermore, in step S4103, information on whether or not it is a jackpot included in the first command, jackpot type, reach type, information on whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, etc. is stored in the pending information storage area. The data is stored in the first (the lowest number among the holding areas in which no variation information is stored) out of vacant holding areas.

In the following step S4104, it is determined whether the mode is variable probability mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4104, that is, if the mode is normal mode, the process moves to step S4105.

In step S4105, a hold icon setting process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is stored in a pending display area 461 set at the bottom of the decorative pattern display device 42. A hold icon 471 is displayed as a hold display (second hold display) indicating . As shown in FIG. 52(b) etc., the pending icon 471 ( Hereinafter, there is a default pending icon 471 that does not suggest the expectation level of jackpot (also referred to as "pre-read pending icon 472").

As shown in FIG. 53, the prefetch pending icon 472 is composed of a base object 473 that resembles a "treasure box" and a character object 474 that is basically displayed so as to fit inside the opened "treasure box." ing. A plurality of patterns are prepared for the appearance of the prefetch pending icon 472 by using different character objects 474, and the pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 is associated with the jackpot expectation level. More specifically, the appearance of the look-ahead pending icon 472 suggests the degree of jackpot expectation in five levels. Rank 1: "A monkfish in an open treasure chest," Rank 2: "A monkfish in an open treasure chest." The odds of winning a jackpot are highest in the following order: rank 3: "turtle in an open treasure chest", rank 4: "crab in an open treasure chest", rank 5 "dugong in an open treasure chest". It is set to be.

On the other hand, the default mode of the hold icon 471 is a "closed treasure chest", and the character object 474 is not displayed. Incidentally, the default pending icon 471 does not indicate that the expectation level of jackpot is low, but rather indicates that the expectation level of jackpot is not taken into account (does not suggest the contents of the fluctuation information).

In this embodiment, displaying the prefetch pending icon 472 (displaying the character object 474 in combination with the base object 473) corresponds to a pending prefetch effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for convenience, there is one pattern for each aspect rank of the prefetch pending icon 472, but it is also possible to set a plurality of patterns for each aspect rank.

Further, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display based on the ball entering the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a is a “white treasure box”, and the second winning opening of the first starting winning device 33a 333 and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is a "black treasure box". That is, by checking the mode of the hold icon 471 (the color of the treasure box), it is possible to specify which of the first variable display and the second variable display it corresponds to. In this embodiment, the fluctuation information based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a corresponds to the first win/fail related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information is the first hold display. Yes, the fluctuation information based on the ball entering the second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b corresponds to the second win/fail related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the changing information is the second pending display.

Although the default hold icon 471 does not indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is low, the player's impression is that it is a prefetch with a character object 474 rather than a simple "closed treasure chest" hold icon 471. If you look at the pending icon 472, you might expect a jackpot to occur. Furthermore, the prefetch pending icon 472 is also ranked, and if a low-rank prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, the player may think that the possibility that a jackpot will not occur has increased. There is a concern that it will be lost. Therefore, although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured such that the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 may change even after the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the pending display area 461. . Further, the default mode of the hold icon 471 is configured to change to a prefetch hold icon 472 in some cases. As a result, even after the default hold icon 471 or the low-rank prefetch hold icon 472 is displayed, the user can expect the hold icon 471 to increase in rank and eventually win a jackpot in the corresponding variable display. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the hold display area 461 of this embodiment includes an execution corresponding area 462 in which a hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area is displayed. (in this example, the left end of the hold display area 461) and the hold icon 471 that corresponds to the variable information stored in the hold area (the first hold area to the eighth hold area) of the hold information storage area is displayed. A corresponding area 463 (in this example, in order from the left side, the first holding area to the eighth holding area) are provided. Therefore, in the hold display area 461, a maximum of one hold icon 471 can be displayed in the execution compatible area 462, and a maximum of eight hold icons 471 can be displayed in the hold compatible area 463.

Here, the hold icon setting process in step S4105 will be explained with reference to FIG. 38. First, in step S6101, the values of various counters related to the hold performance are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the hold area (hereinafter referred to as "new storage hold area") where the change information is newly stored in step S4103 in the hold information storage area. (also referred to as).

To be more specific, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 stores a pending pre-reading effect lottery counter (0 to 99 loop counter) is provided. Furthermore, as an effect using the prefetch pending icon 472, "change pending prefetch target" changes the correspondence between the fluctuation information stored in the pending information storage area and the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. The RAM 553 is provided with a hold setting counter (a loop counter from 0 to 199) for determining whether or not to perform the "hold prefetch target change effect".

In addition, as a type of "holding pre-reading target change effect", a predetermined pre-reading holding icon 472 is moved so that the order of variation (order of digestion) becomes earlier in the arrangement of the holding icons 471 displayed in the holding display area 461. There is a "pre-hold movement effect", and the RAM 553 is provided with a reservation release lottery counter (loop counter from 0 to 49) for determining whether or not to execute the "pre-hold movement effect". Furthermore, as a type of "hold prefetch target change effect", a "post-hold move effect" that moves a predetermined prefetch hold icon 472 so that the change order becomes later in the order of the hold icons 471 displayed in the hold display area 461. ”, and the RAM 553 is provided with a change setting lottery counter (loop counter from 0 to 19) for determining whether or not to execute the “move effect after suspension”. In addition, as a type of "holding prefetch target change effect", there is a "holding exchange effect" that exchanges the prefetching hold icons 472 displayed in the hold display area 461, and the RAM 553 stores the "holding exchange effect". An exchange setting lottery counter (loop counter from 0 to 9) is provided for determining whether to execute or not.

Then, in step S4103, the value of the reservation look-ahead effect lottery counter, the value of the reservation setting counter, the value of the reservation cancellation lottery counter, the value of the change setting lottery counter, and the value of the exchange setting lottery counter are acquired and stored. Ru.

Further, each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a hold effect counter indicating the status regarding the hold icon 471, respectively. The pending performance counter is configured to take values from "0 to 7".

When the value of the hold effect counter is "0", it indicates that the hold look ahead effect (display of ``treasure box with character'') is not performed on the corresponding hold icon 471, and the default hold icon 471 is displayed.

When the value of the hold effect counter is “1”, it indicates that the corresponding hold icon 471 has become the prefetch hold icon 472. Hereinafter, the fact that "1" is set in the pending performance counter will also be referred to as "the execution flag is set on".

When the value of the pending performance counter is "2", it indicates that there is a possibility that the "pre-suspension movement performance" will be executed (the pre-suspension movement performance is reserved). Then, when the "pre-hold movement effect" is executed, among the hold display areas 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the area corresponding to the execution area or the hold area in which the hold effect counter is set to ``2'' is selected. The position is designated as the destination of the prefetch pending icon 472. Hereinafter, the fact that "2" is set in the reservation performance counter will also be referred to as "the reservation flag is set on".

When the value of the hold performance counter is "3", it indicates that the "pre-hold movement performance" is to be executed. That is, after deriving the pre-reading pending icon 472 in a predetermined form as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the holding area in which "3" is set in the holding effect counter, the pre-reading pending icon 472 in the predetermined form is put on hold. This indicates that a process of changing the display as a pending icon 471 corresponding to a pending area or execution area for which "2" is set in the production counter is performed. Hereinafter, the fact that "3" is set in the hold effect counter will also be referred to as "the release flag is set on".

When the value of the hold performance counter is "4", it indicates that there is a possibility that the ``post-hold movement performance'' will be executed. Then, when the "move effect after hold" is executed, the pre-read hold icon 472 displayed corresponding to the execution area or hold area where "4" is set in the hold effect counter is set to It will be changed to the hold icon 471. Hereinafter, the fact that "4" is set in the pending performance counter will also be referred to as "the pre-change flag is set on".

When the value of the hold performance counter is "5", it indicates that the "post-hold movement performance" is to be executed. That is, after deriving the default mode of the hold icon 471 corresponding to the hold area where the hold effect counter is set to ``5'', the hold icon 471 corresponding to the hold area where the hold effect counter is set to ``4'' is derived. Or, it indicates that the pre-read pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the execution area is to be changed to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area in which "5" is set in the pending effect counter. Hereinafter, the fact that "5" is set in the pending performance counter will also be referred to as "the change destination flag is set on".

When the value of the hold performance counter is "6", it indicates that there is a possibility that the "hold exchange performance" will be executed. Hereinafter, the fact that "6" is set in the hold performance counter will also be referred to as "the first exchange flag is set on".

When the value of the hold performance counter is "7", it indicates that the "hold exchange performance" is to be executed. That is, the pre-reading pending icon 472 displayed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area where the value of the pending effect counter is "7", and the pending area where the value of the pending effect counter is "6" or This indicates that the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the execution area is to be replaced (exchanged). Hereinafter, the fact that "7" is set in the hold effect counter will also be referred to as "the second exchange flag is set on".

It should be noted that the hold performance counters of each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area constitute derived information storage means, and various information indicated by the value of the hold performance counter corresponds to the derived information. Further, the function of performing the hold icon setting process described below constitutes the hold effect setting process. Furthermore, the above-described "execution flag" corresponds to the "reservation performance execution flag", the "reservation flag" corresponds to the "reservation performance reservation flag", and the "cancellation flag" corresponds to the "reservation release flag".

After step S6101, in step S6102, it is determined whether or not there is an execution area or a pending area in which the pending flag is set to ON (with pending effect counter = 2) in the pending information storage area. In this embodiment, a reservation reception flag is provided separately from the reservation flag (reservation effect counter) of the execution area and each reservation area, and the reservation reception flag is set to on when the reservation flag is set to on. The Rukoto. In step S6102, by checking the reservation acceptance flag, it is determined whether the reservation flag is set on. It is also possible to omit the reservation acceptance flag and refer to the execution area and each reservation area to check whether the reservation flag is turned on.

When a negative determination is made in step S6102, in step S6103, a pending pre-reading effect lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to perform a pending pre-reading effect using the pre-reading pending icon 472. As shown in FIG. 39, the pending pre-reading effect lottery table referred to in the pending pre-reading effect lottery process includes one that is referred to during the variable probability mode and one that is referred to in other game modes. The pending look-ahead effect lottery table that is referenced during the fixed change mode is "For the 4th time just before the end of the fixed change medium jackpot ST" when a jackpot occurs when there are less than 4 fluctuation displays remaining until the fixed change mode ends. and "For other times when there is a jackpot during the probability change mode" when the fluctuation display other than the last 4 times is a jackpot in the variable probability mode, and when the fluctuation display is the last 4 times in the probability variation mode and it is a miss. ``For when the reach is off 4 times just before the end of ST'' selected, ``For when the reach is off before or after in the variable variable mode'' when the reach is off before or after the end in the variable variable mode, and ``For other times during the fixed variable mode'' in other cases during the variable variable mode. ”.

In addition, the pending look-ahead effect lottery table that is referenced in the normal mode and time reduction mode is ``for when the jackpot is confirmed'' when the jackpot occurs in any game mode, and ``conditional when the jackpot is confirmed only in the variable probability mode.'' ``For jackpot hits'', ``For when the front and back are out of reach,'' ``For when the front and back are out of reach,'' and ``For when the reach is completely off.''

Then, in accordance with the fluctuation information of the new storage holding area, a holding pre-reading performance lottery table to be referred to is selected, and based on the value of the holding pre-reading performance lottery counter, a holding pre-reading performance lottery table is selected corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the new storage holding area. Determine whether or not to execute the pending look-ahead effect. Further, in step S6103, when it is decided to execute the pending look-ahead effect, the system is configured to set "1" to the pending effect counter of the new storage pending area (set the execution flag on). ing.

In particular, in this embodiment, whether or not it is a variable display that results in a jackpot in the last four times in the variable probability mode, whether or not it is a variable display that results in a jackpot other than that in the variable probability mode, and whether or not it is a variable display that results in a jackpot in the last four times in the variable probability mode. The determination is made in the order of whether or not it is a fluctuating display that is out of reach, and whether or not it is a fluctuating display that is out of reach in the fixed variable mode, and a hold look-ahead effect lottery table that corresponds to the determination result is referred to. The system is configured such that the execution flag is more likely to be set to ON when a hold look-ahead effect lottery table selected by a positive determination at a higher level among such determinations is referred to. ing. In other words, during the last four variable displays of the variable probability mode, the execution flag is more likely to be set on (in this example, 80% for a jackpot and 25% for a miss). Although the details will be described later, even if "1" is set for the hold effect counter at this point, the read ahead hold icon 472 as the hold look ahead effect may not be derived.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the sub-control device 262 is not only provided with a fluctuation number counter that counts the remaining number of fluctuation displays that can be performed in the variable variable mode, but also includes a variable display that can be performed in the variable variable mode. A suspension number counter is provided to count the remaining number of times information can be stored on hold. In other words, in the present embodiment, "suspension of fluctuation display" is performed, so that before the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches "0", the last fluctuation display performed in the fixed variable mode is suspended and stored, and the last fluctuation display performed in the normal mode is Fluctuation displays made in 2018 may be held and stored. Therefore, when a variable display is stored on hold, by referring to the hold count counter, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable display is a variable display performed in the probability variable mode.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the execution area of the pending information storage area and each pending area, the variable display corresponding to the stored variable information is the variable display performed in the fixed variable mode, and the variable display that is performed in the fixed variable mode is A last 4 flag is provided to indicate that there are four or less variable displays remaining until the end of the display. By checking the last four flags, it is possible to determine whether or not the corresponding variable display is a variable display that will be performed within four times immediately before the end of the probability variable mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation information that will be displayed in a variable manner in the variable probability mode as the second game mode corresponds to the second correspondence propriety related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information corresponds to the second correspondence. This is a hold display, and the fluctuation information that will be displayed in the normal mode as the first gaming mode corresponds to the first response propriety related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information is the first response hold display. It is.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the variable probability mode, a pending look-ahead effect is performed with a probability of 60% in the case of a jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a failure in fixed variable mode, there is an exceptional 25% chance that a hold look ahead effect will be performed for the four fluctuation displays immediately before the fixed variable mode ends, but excluding these four fluctuations, , there is a possibility that the pending look-ahead performance will be performed only when the reach is out of the front and back, and even in the case where the reach is out of the front and back, the probability that the hold ahead look performance will be performed is 5%. In other words, in the fixed variable mode, there is a low possibility that a pending look-ahead effect will be derived in the event of a loss, and even if a pending look-ahead effect is derived, the expectation level for the occurrence of a jackpot state will increase dramatically. ing. However, as an exception, the structure is such that a pending look-ahead effect is derived about once out of the four variable displays immediately before the end of the variable probability mode.

In addition, during the normal mode and time reduction mode, it is easiest to derive pending look-ahead effects when referring to "For when jackpot is confirmed", "For conditional jackpot", "For when reaching before or after" It becomes difficult to derive pending look-ahead effects in the following order: ``for times when the target is out of reach,'' ``for times when the reach is off before and after,'' and ``for times when the reach is completely off.'' In addition, compared to during the fixed variable mode, it is relatively easy to derive a hold look-ahead effect even in the case of a miss, and in the case of a miss before or after the reach, a hold look-ahead effect will be performed with a probability of 40%, and, Even in the case of a reach other than a front-back or a miss, or a complete miss, there is a possibility that a pending look-ahead effect will be derived.

After step S6103, in step S6104, it is determined whether the execution flag of the new storage reservation area is set on (whether the value of the reservation effect counter is "1" or not). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, it is determined whether the fluctuation display corresponds to a "completely missed" fluctuation display in which neither a jackpot nor a reach state occurs with reference to the fluctuation information in the new storage reservation area. .

If a negative determination is made in step S6105, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not there is an execution area or a reservation area in which the first exchange flag is set to on (holding effect counter=6). In addition, in this embodiment, an exchange acceptance flag is provided separately from the first exchange flag (hold effect counter) of the execution area and each holding area, and the first exchange flag is set to ON in the exchange acceptance flag. In this case, it will be set to on. In step S6106, by checking the exchange acceptance flag, it is determined whether the first exchange flag is set to on.

If a negative determination is made in step S6106, it is determined in step S6107 whether or not there is an execution area or a pending area in which the pre-change flag is set to on (with a pending effect counter=4). In addition, in this embodiment, a change acceptance flag is provided separately from the pre-change flag (pending effect counter) of the execution area and each pending area, and the change acceptance flag is set to ON when the pre-change flag is set to ON. , will be set to on. In step S6107, by checking the change acceptance flag, it is determined whether the pre-change flag is set on.

If a negative determination is made in step S6107, a hold setting process is performed in step S6108 to determine the type of hold lookahead effect. As shown in FIG. 40, the hold setting table that is referred to during the hold setting process shows that there are four or less fluctuation displays remaining until the fixed variable mode ends, and that the jackpot is reached (because the fixed variable mode is in progress). ``For the 4 jackpots immediately before the end of ST'' and ``for the 4 jackpots immediately before the end of ST'' when a jackpot is achieved regardless of whether it corresponds to the fluctuation information with the 1st win/fail flag turned on or the fluctuation information with the 2nd win/fail flag turned on. ``For other confirmed jackpots'', ``For other conditional jackpots'', and ``Just before the end of ST'' when there are less than 4 fluctuations remaining until the probability change mode ends and the result is a loss. There are two types: ``for 4 times of disconnection'' and ``for other failures''. Then, a hold setting table to be referred to is selected according to the fluctuation information in the new storage hold area, and a hold look-ahead effect is performed corresponding to the change information stored in the new storage hold area based on the value of the hold setting counter. Determine the type of

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the reservation setting table for "4 jackpots immediately before the end of ST" is referred to, the "reservation flag" is set to on at a rate of 70% (reservation effect counter → "2"). "), the "first exchange flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (pending performance counter → "6"), and the "execution flag" is set on at a rate of 10% (pending performance counter → "1") ). In addition, since "1" has already been set in the pending effect counter of the new memory pending area in step S6103, if "2" or "6" is set in the pending effect counter, overwriting will be performed. (If set to "1", leave it as is).

When referring to the hold setting table for ``4 failures immediately before the end of the ST'', the ``reserve flag'' is set on at a rate of 20% (hold effect counter → ``2''), and the ``hold flag'' is set on at a rate of 5%. 1 exchange flag" is set on (pending performance counter → "6"), and the "execution flag" is set on at a rate of 75% (pending performance counter → "1").

When referring to the hold setting table for ``for other jackpot confirmations'', the ``reserve flag'' is set on at a 50% rate (hold effect counter → ``2''), and the ``1st exchange'' is set at a 5% rate. The "flag" is set on (pending performance counter → "6"), and the "execution flag" is set on at a rate of 45% (pending performance counter → "1"). In this embodiment, the probability that the reservation flag is set to ON is higher in the fluctuating displays that result in four jackpots immediately before the end of the ST.

When referring to the reservation setting table for "other conditional jackpots", the "reservation flag" is set on at a rate of 35% (reservation effect counter → "2"), and at a rate of 15%, the "reservation flag" is set to "1st The "exchange flag" is set on (pending performance counter → "6"), and the "execution flag" is set on at a rate of 50% (pending performance counter → "1").

When referring to the reservation setting table for "other failures", the "reservation flag" is set on at a rate of 25% (reservation effect counter → "2"), and the "first exchange flag" is set at a rate of 25%. " is set on (Pending performance counter → "6"), "Execution flag" is set on at a rate of 15% (Pending performance counter → "1"), and "Before change flag" is turned on at a rate of 35%. It is set (pending performance counter → "4"). In addition, in this embodiment, the "pre-change flag" is configured not to be set on for fluctuating information that may lead to a jackpot, but it may be set on. may be configured.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, that is, if there is an execution area or a pending area in which the first exchange flag is set on (with a pending effect counter = 6), a new storage pending area is determined in step S6109. An exchange setting process is executed to determine whether or not to set the second exchange flag to ON (or not to set "7" to the pending performance counter).

As shown in FIG. 41, the exchange setting table referred to during the exchange setting process is ``for jackpot confirmation'' when a jackpot occurs in any game mode, and ``conditional jackpot'' when a jackpot occurs only in variable probability mode. ``For occasional use'' and ``Other use'' are provided. Then, the exchange setting table to be referred to is selected according to the change information of the new storage reservation area, and based on the value of the reservation exchange setting lottery counter, it is determined whether to turn on the second exchange flag of the new storage reservation area. decide.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when referring to the exchange setting table "for confirmation of jackpot", the "second exchange flag" is set to on at a rate of 80% (pending performance counter → "7"), The "execution flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (pending effect counter → "1").

When referring to the exchange setting table for "conditional jackpot", the "second exchange flag" is set on at a 50% rate (pending effect counter → "7"), and the "execution flag" is set at a 50% rate. is set on (pending performance counter → "1").

When referring to the exchange setting table for "others", the "second exchange flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (pending performance counter → "7"), and the "execution flag" is turned on at a rate of 60%. is set (pending performance counter → "1"), and the "reservation flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (pending performance counter → "2").

Furthermore, if the second exchange flag is set to on in step S6109, the exchange acceptance flag is turned off. By providing an exchange acceptance flag, for example, even though there is only one holding area with a holding effect counter = 6, after the holding area with a holding effect counter = 6, there is a holding area with a holding effect counter = 7. It is possible to avoid a situation where multiple occurrences occur. In addition, there is one exchange acceptance flag. Furthermore, when specifying the holding area or execution area to be canceled (holding effect counter = 6), the holding effect counter is set in the order of holding area 8 → holding area 7 → ... → execution area. Check. In other words, if two game balls enter the first starting winning device 33a in quick succession, and the first exchange flag is set to ON for both of the corresponding fluctuation information, the latter The second exchange flag is set according to the change information. By the way, even if the first exchange flag is set to ON, the pending display area 461 only displays the pre-read pending icon 472 of mode rank 2 or below, and the "pending exchange performance" does not occur and the corresponding Even if the fluctuation information is digested as is, no problems (such as an unnatural appearance of the pending display area 461) will occur.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6107, that is, if there is an execution area or a pending area in which the pre-change flag is set to ON (with a pending effect counter = 4), in step S6110, the new storage pending area is A change setting process is executed to determine whether or not to set the change destination flag on (or not to set "5" in the pending performance counter).

As shown in FIG. 42, the change setting table referred to during the change setting process is ``for jackpot confirmation'' when a jackpot occurs in any game mode, and ``conditional jackpot'' when a jackpot occurs only in the variable probability mode. ``For occasional use'' and ``Other use'' are provided. Then, a change setting table to be referred to is selected according to the change information of the new storage reservation area, and it is determined whether to turn on the change destination flag of the new storage reservation area based on the value of the change setting lottery counter. .

More specifically, in this embodiment, when referring to the change setting table "for jackpot confirmation", the "change destination flag" is set on in 80% of the cases (pending performance counter → "5"), and 20 The "execution flag" is set on at a rate of % (pending effect counter → "1").

When referring to the change setting table for "conditional jackpot", the "change destination flag" is set on at a 50% rate (pending effect counter → "5"), and the "execution flag" is set at a 50% rate. It is set on (pending performance counter → "1").

When referring to the change setting table for "Others", the "change destination flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (pending effect counter → "5"), and the "execution flag" is set on at a rate of 60%. (Pending performance counter → "1"), and the "reservation flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (Pending performance counter → "2").

Furthermore, if the change destination flag is set on in step S6110, the change acceptance flag is turned off. By providing a change acceptance flag, for example, even though there is only one hold area with a hold effect counter of 4, after the hold area with a hold effect counter of 4, there is a hold area with a hold effect counter of 5. It is possible to avoid a situation where multiple occurrences occur. In addition, there is one change acceptance flag. Furthermore, when specifying the holding area or execution area to be canceled (holding effect counter = 4), the holding effect counter is set in the order of holding area 8 → holding area 7 → ... → execution area. Check. In other words, if two game balls enter the first starting winning device 33a in quick succession, and the pre-change flags for both of them are set to on regarding the corresponding fluctuation information, the latter The change destination flag will be set according to the change information. By the way, even if the pre-change flag is set to on, in the hold display area 461, only the pre-read hold icon 472 of mode rank 2 or lower is displayed, and the "post-hold movement effect" does not occur, and the corresponding Even if the fluctuation information is digested as is, no problems (such as an unnatural appearance of the pending display area 461) will occur.

In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6102, that is, if there is an execution area or a pending area in which the reservation flag is set to on (with a reservation effect counter = 2), in step S6111, the release to the new storage reservation area is performed. A reservation cancellation lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set the flag on (or not to set "3" in the reservation performance counter).

As shown in FIG. 43, the reservation cancellation lottery table that is referred to during the reservation cancellation lottery process has two tables: ``For when the jackpot is confirmed'' when the jackpot occurs in any game mode, and ``Conditions for when the jackpot is confirmed only in the variable probability mode.'' ``For when there is a jackpot with a special hit'', ``For 4 times immediately before ST end'' when there are less than 4 fluctuating displays remaining until the end of the variable probability mode, and ``For other times''. Then, the reservation flag is set to ON, and the reservation to be referenced is set according to the change information of the reservation area or execution area (regardless of the change information of the new storage reservation area) that is to be canceled (retention effect counter = 2). The cancellation lottery table is selected, and based on the value of the reservation cancellation lottery counter, it is determined whether or not to set the cancellation flag of the new storage reservation area on.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when referring to the reservation cancellation lottery table "for jackpot confirmation", the "cancellation flag" is set on at a rate of 70% (retention performance counter → "3"). When referring to the reservation cancellation lottery table for "conditional jackpot", the "cancellation flag" is set on at a rate of 40% (retention performance counter → "3"). When referring to the reservation cancellation lottery table for "four times just before the end of ST", the "cancellation flag" is set on at a rate of 30% (retention performance counter → "3"). When the reservation cancellation lottery table for "others" is referred to, the "cancellation flag" is set on at a rate of 20% (retention effect counter → "3").

Furthermore, if the cancellation flag is set to on in step S6111, the reservation acceptance flag is turned off. By providing a reservation acceptance flag, for example, even though there is only one reservation area with a reservation performance counter = 2, after the reservation area with a reservation performance counter = 2, there is a reservation area with a reservation performance counter = 3. It is possible to avoid a situation where multiple occurrences occur. In addition, there is one reservation acceptance flag. Furthermore, when specifying the holding area or execution area (with holding effect counter = 2) that is to be canceled, the holding effect counter is set in the order of holding area 8 → holding area 7 → ... → execution area. Check. In other words, if two game balls enter the first starting prize winning device 33a in quick succession, and the reservation flag is set to ON for both of the corresponding fluctuation information, the latter fluctuation The release flag will be set according to the information. By the way, even if the reservation flag is set to on, the default reservation icon 471 is only displayed in the reservation display area 461, and the "pre-retention movement effect" does not occur, and the corresponding fluctuation information is digested as is. Even if this happens, no problem (such as an unnatural appearance of the pending display area 461) will occur.

After step S6111, in step S6112, it is determined whether or not the release flag has been set on in the new storage holding area (holding effect counter=3). If a negative determination is made in step S6112, the process moves to step S6103.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6105 (it is a fluctuating display of "completely missed"), if an affirmative determination is made in step S6112, or after step S6108, step S6109, or step S6110, that is, the new storage reservation area is reserved. If a value other than "0" is set for the production counter, the process moves to step S6113, and a mode rank setting process is performed to determine the mode of the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information of the new storage hold area. .

Here, the aspect rank setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 44. First, in step S6201, the value of the rank lottery counter (loop counter from 0 to 149) is acquired, and the counter value is stored in the new storage reservation area.

After step S6201, in step S6202, the mode of the pending icon 471, more specifically, the rank of the mode corresponding to the above-described jackpot expectation level is determined. In this embodiment, an execution rank indicating the mode rank of the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 and a mode rank that can be derived to the pending display area 461 correspond to the change information stored in the new storage pending area. is configured to determine an upper limit rank indicating an upper limit of . The execution area of the reservation information storage area and each reservation area are provided with an upper limit rank storage area for storing an upper limit rank and an execution rank storage area for storing an execution rank.

In addition, in the hold display area 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42, hold icons 471 (pre-read hold icons 472) are displayed in a manner corresponding to the execution area and the execution rank of each hold area. Moreover, after the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the pending display area 461, it may change to an upper mode rank, and its upper limit is determined by the upper limit rank. In this embodiment, the execution rank storage area of each pending area and execution area constitutes a mode information storage means.

As shown in FIG. 45, the rank determination table that is referred to when determining the mode of the pending icon 471 includes one that is referred to during the variable probability mode and one that is referred to in other game modes. The pending look-ahead effect lottery table that is referenced during the fixed-variable mode is ``for the jackpot during the fixed-variable mode'' when it is a jackpot during the fixed-variable mode, and ``for the case of a miss during the fixed-variable mode'' when it is a loss during the fixed-variable mode. There is.

In addition, the pending look-ahead effect lottery table that is referenced in the normal mode and time-saving mode is ``for when the jackpot is confirmed'' when the jackpot is achieved in any game mode, and ``for when the jackpot is confirmed'' when the jackpot is only achieved in the variable probability mode, ``For conditional jackpot / front/back off reach'' when a miss occurs but misses, ``for reach other than front/back off'' when a reach condition other than front/back miss occurs, and ``complete reach'' where no reach condition occurs. There is a "for removal".

Then, a rank determination table to be referred to is selected according to the change information of the new storage reservation area, and an upper limit rank and an execution rank are determined based on the value of the rank lottery counter. In addition, in this embodiment, when referring to "For when a jackpot is hit in a variable probability" or "For when a jackpot is confirmed", the upper limit rank or execution rank of a high rank is more likely to be selected. A high rank is difficult to be selected or a high rank is not selected in the following order: ``For conditional jackpot/for reach when the front and back are off'', ``for reach when other than the front and back are off'', and ``for when it is completely off''.

After step S6202, in step S6203, it is determined whether the pre-change flag or the first exchange flag is set on in the new storage reservation area (retention effect counter = "4" or "6"). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6203, it is determined in step S6204 whether or not the execution rank stored in the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area is "3" or less. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6204, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6204, that is, if one of "3, 4, or 5" is set as the execution rank, in step S6205, the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area is Then, the predetermined rank "2" is forcibly overwritten and stored, and then the process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S6203, it is determined in step S6206 whether or not the second exchange flag is set on in the new storage reservation area (retention effect counter="7"). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6206, in step S6207, the execution area where the first exchange flag is set on (with the pending effect counter = "6") for the execution rank storage area of the new storage pending area. Alternatively, the same value as the value stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the reservation area is forcibly overwritten and stored.

Furthermore, in step S6207, the execution area where the first exchange flag is set to ON (with the pending performance counter = "6") or the execution rank storage area of the pending area is set to the upper limit rank storage area of the new storage pending area. Forcibly overwrites and stores the same value as the stored value. Note that only when the second exchange flag is set to ON, a phenomenon may occur in which the value of the execution rank storage area becomes larger than the value of the upper limit rank storage area. After step S6207, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6206, it is determined in step S6208 whether or not the change destination flag is set on in the new storage reservation area (retention effect counter="5"). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6208, in step S6209, the execution area or After forcibly overwriting and storing the same value as the value stored in the execution rank storage area of the reservation area, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6208, it is determined in step S6210 whether or not the release flag is set on in the new storage reservation area (retention effect counter = "3"). If a negative determination is made in step S6210, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6210, in step S6211, the execution area where the reservation flag is set on (with the reservation effect counter = "2") for the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area. Alternatively, the process is ended after forcibly overwriting the same value as the value stored in the execution rank storage area of the reservation area.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 38, after step S6113 or if a negative determination is made in step S6104 (it is decided not to perform the pending look-ahead effect, and the pending effect counter = "0"), in step S6114, the decoration A pending icon display process is executed to display a pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information of the new storage pending area in the pending display area 461 of the symbol display device 42.

More specifically, when the value of the hold effect counter of the new memory hold area is "0", the hold icon 471 in the default mode is brought out to the position corresponding to the new memory hold area in the hold display area 461. Perform processing.

When the execution flag is set in the new memory retention area (retention effect counter = 1), the look-ahead retention icon 472 corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory retention area is displayed in the retention display area 461. Processing is performed to derive the position corresponding to the new storage reservation area.

When the reservation flag is set in the new memory retention area (retention effect counter = 2), the default mode of the retention icon 471 is brought out to the position corresponding to the new memory retention area in the retention display area 461. Perform processing.

When the release flag is set in the new memory hold area (hold effect counter = 3), the look-ahead hold icon 472 of the form corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory hold area is displayed in the hold display area 461. Processing is performed to derive the position corresponding to the new storage reservation area. Note that, as described above, the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the variation information in the new storage pending area for which the release flag has been set is used to store variation information that will be consumed before the variation information in the new storage pending area. In addition, the execution rank is the same as the execution rank stored in the execution rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area where the reservation flag is set.

When the pre-change flag is set in the new memory hold area (hold effect counter = 4), the pre-read hold icon 472 of the form corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory hold area is displayed in the hold display area 461. Among them, processing is performed to derive the location corresponding to the new storage reservation area. As described above, when the pre-change flag is set, the mode rank of the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the new storage pending area is "2" at the highest.

When the change destination flag is set in the new storage holding area (holding effect counter = 5), in order to derive the holding icon 471 in the default mode to a position corresponding to the new storage holding area in the holding display area 461. Process.

When the first exchange flag is set in the new storage reservation area (retention effect counter = 6), the pre-read reservation icon 472 of the mode corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new storage reservation area is displayed in the reservation display area 461. Among them, processing is performed to derive the location corresponding to the new storage reservation area. As described above, when the first exchange flag is set, the mode rank of the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the new storage pending area is "2" at the highest.

When the second exchange flag is set in the new storage reservation area (retention effect counter = 7), the pre-read reservation icon 472 of the mode corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new storage reservation area is displayed in the reservation display area 461. Among them, processing is performed to derive the location corresponding to the new storage reservation area. As mentioned above, the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the change information in the new storage hold area for which the second exchange flag is set indicates that the change information that will be consumed earlier than the change information in the new storage hold area is stored. and has the same rank as the upper limit rank stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area where the first exchange flag is set. After step S6114, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 35, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, that is, if the variable probability mode is selected, in step S4106, the remaining number of times the variation information can be held and stored as a variation display executed in the variable probability mode. It is determined whether the value of the pending number counter that stores ``1'' is "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S4106, that is, if the last variable display performed in the variable variable mode is held and stored, in step S4107, it is determined whether the variable display is performed in the variable variable mode or in the normal mode. A display process (ST line setting process) is performed to distinguish whether a variable display is being performed or not.

More specifically, the execution area of the hold information storage area and each hold area are provided with a last flag indicating that this is the last variable display to be performed in the fixed variable mode. , sets the last one flag of the new storage reservation area to on. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52(d), the execution area 462 or the hold area 463 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the execution area or hold area where the last 1 flag is set to ON, and the hold area to the right of the hold display area 461 Processing is performed to display an ST border line 465 as a boundary display extending vertically between the area 463 and the area 463.

In other words, the ST border line 465 is visible between the hold icon 471 corresponding to the last change display performed in the fixed variable mode and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the first change display performed in the normal mode. The line is now being drawn.

In the subsequent step S4108, a last 4 flag indicating that the variable display has been displayed within four times immediately before the end of the variable probability mode is set for the corresponding holding area (new storage holding area).

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined in step S4109 whether the value of the suspension number counter is one of "2 to 4". Even when an affirmative determination is made in step S4109, the process moves to step S4108, and the last 4 flag is set.

After step S4108, or if a negative determination is made in step S4109, in step S4109, the value of the suspension number counter is subtracted by 1, and then the process moves to step S4105.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process moves to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3914.

In step S3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops changing when a jackpot state occurs, and in this embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when receiving a symbol command from the main control device 261 indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is to be stopped, the counter value is determined to be 0, for example, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol). If so, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined as "1" (lower number), if it is 1, "2" (lower number), and so on. This jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives a symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You can also do this.

In addition, when receiving a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it will be "2" (lower number), and if it is 2 to 4, it will be "4". The combinations of jackpot symbols are determined, such as "6" (lower number) for 5 and 6, "8" (lower number) for 7 and 8, and so on.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used to determine the combination of each stopped symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since any of nine decorative patterns are displayed in each column, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each column. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbols in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbols in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbols in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combinations of these symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are stored in the RAM 553's front and back off reach symbol buffers, front and rear off reach symbol buffers, and complete reach symbol buffers other than front and back off. It is stored in one of the out-of-line symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. Further, if the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 and the upper symbol counter CL is updated. Moreover, if it is the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process advances to step S4004 and the medium symbol counter CM is updated. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process advances to step S4005 and the lower symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. There isn't. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is determined whether or not it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the process is ended without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and back off symbols. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear off-center symbols (front and back off reach) (S4008 is YES), the process advances to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear of the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach symbol buffer and this process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than the front and rear misses (reach other than the front and rear misses) (S4008 is NO), the process advances to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back, and this process ends.

In addition, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of missed symbols (completely missed symbols), so in step S4011, the The combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the present process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3906, suspension processing is performed. The reservation process will be described below with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the determination in step S4201 is affirmative, the value of the fluctuation pending counter Nd is subtracted by 1 in step S4202.

After step S4202, in step S4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the pending first area to the pending eighth area of the pending information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area.

In the subsequent step S4204, a holding display rank up lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the mode rank of the pre-read holding icon 472 displayed in the holding display area 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42. In other words, in the execution area and the holding area of the holding information storage area, if there is a holding area with the execution flag set to on (holding effect counter = 1), the value of the execution rank storage area of the holding area is the upper limit rank. Determine whether it is less than the value of the storage area. When the value of the execution rank storage area of the reservation area is smaller than the value of the upper limit rank storage area, a lottery is held, and when a winner is won in the lottery, 1 is added to the value of the execution rank storage area. Thereby, by redrawing the mode of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the mode of the prefetch pending icon 472 is increased by one rank.

In the subsequent step S4205, a pre-read effect progress setting process is performed to change the aspect of the hold icon 471 displayed in the hold display area 461. That is, in the present embodiment, a "holding prefetch target change effect" is performed to change the correspondence between the fluctuation information stored in the holding information storage area and the holding icon 471 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. In some cases, in step S4205, processing related to the pending prefetching target change effect is performed.

Here, the prefetch effect progress setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 46. In addition, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 includes a type counter (takes a value of 0 to 3) that stores a value specifying the type of "pending pre-reading target change effect", and a type counter (taking a value of 0 to 3) that specifies the type of "pending pre-reading target change effect", and a type counter (taking a value of 0 to 3) that specifies the type of "pending pre-reading target change effect", and The target first counter (the execution area and the first pending area of the pending information storage area) stores a value that specifies the execution area or pending area where the variable information that is to be digested first among the two variable information is stored. ~ Takes a value from 0 to 7 corresponding to the 7th pending area) and the second target counter that stores the variable information that will be digested later among the two variable information that is the target of the pending look-ahead effect. (takes values from 1 to 8 corresponding to the first to eighth areas of the pending information storage area) is provided with a pending prefetch performance request storage area.

First, in step S6301, processing is performed to reset the pending prefetch effect request storage area. Here, by setting the type counter of the pending prefetch performance request storage area to "0", it is indicated that the state is not in which the pending prefetch target change performance is to be performed. Note that there are three (three sets) pending prefetch performance request storage areas in this embodiment.

After step S6301, in step S6302, it is determined whether or not there is a hold area in which the release flag is set to on (hold effect counter=3) in the hold information storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6302, in step S6303, the prefetch pending icon 472 that was displayed corresponding to the variation information in the predetermined pending area is changed to A pre-hold movement effect process is performed to perform a ``pre-hold movement effect'' as a hold pre-fetch target change effect in which the display is changed as a hold icon 471 corresponding to the information.

More specifically, in the pre-hold movement performance process, first, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a storage process for displaying a performance (such as a "connection performance" to be described later) associated with the "pre-hold movement performance". In other words, "1" indicating "pre-hold movement effect" is set for the type counter in the pending pre-read effect request storage area, and the reserve flag is set on for the target first counter (hold effect counter = 2). A value indicating the execution area or the hold area (of) is set, and a value indicating the hold area where the release flag is set to on (hold effect counter = 3) is set for the target second counter.

Next, "0" is set to the hold effect counter of the hold area where the release flag is set to ON (hold effect counter=3). Furthermore, "1" is set for the execution area or the reservation effect counter of the reservation area where the reservation flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter=2). As a result, by redrawing the mode of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the pending icon 471 whose value of the pending effect counter has changed from "3 to 0" is , the pending icon 471 which has changed from the predetermined mode of the pre-reading pending icon 472 to the default mode and the value of the pending effect counter has changed from "2 to 1" changes from the default mode to the mode of the predetermined pre-reading pending icon 472. Things will change.

In addition, in this example, in the process, "1" is always set to the pending effect counter for which the pending flag was set to ON, but for example, in the lottery, any one of "1", "4", and "6" is set. It is also possible to configure so that the Furthermore, in this example, in the process, "0" is always set to the pending effect counter whose cancellation flag was set to ON, but for example, if either "0" or "2" is set in the lottery, It is also possible to configure it so that

After step S6303, or if a negative determination is made in step S6302, it is determined in step S6304 whether or not there is a pending area in which the change destination flag is set to on (with pending effect counter=5). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6304, in step S6305, the prefetch pending icon 472 that was displayed corresponding to the variable information in the predetermined pending area is changed to change information that will be digested later than the variable information in the predetermined pending area. A post-hold movement performance process is performed to perform a ``post-hold movement performance'' as a hold prefetch target change performance that changes the display as a hold icon 471 corresponding to the hold icon 471.

That is, in the post-hold movement performance process, first, the type counter in the pending pre-read performance request storage area is set to "2" indicating "post-suspension movement performance", and the pre-change flag is turned on for the first target counter. Set a value indicating the execution area or hold area that has been set (hold effect counter = 4), and set the change target flag to on for the target second counter (hold area = 5) Set a value that indicates

Next, "0" is set to the pending effect counter of the execution area or pending area in which the pre-change flag is set to ON (with held effect counter = 4). Furthermore, "1" is set to the pending effect counter of the pending area in which the change destination flag is set to ON (with held effect counter=5). As a result, by redrawing the mode of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the pending icon 471 whose value of the pending effect counter has changed from "4 to 0" is , the pending icon 471 which has changed from the predetermined mode of the prefetched pending icon 472 to the default mode and the value of the pending effect counter has changed from "5 to 1" changes from the default mode to the predetermined prefetched pending icon 472 mode. Things will change.

In addition, in this example, in the process, "0" is always set to the pending effect counter whose pre-change flag was set to on, but for example, in a lottery, either "0" or "2" is set. It is also possible to configure it so that Furthermore, in this example, in the process, "1" is always set to the pending effect counter whose change destination flag was set to ON, but for example, in a lottery, "1", "4", and "6" are selected. It is also possible to configure so that either one is set.

After step S6305, or if a negative determination is made in step S6304, it is determined in step S6306 whether or not there is a reservation area in which the second exchange flag is set to on (retention effect counter = 7). . If a negative determination is made in step S6306, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6306, in step S6307, the prefetch hold icon 472 that was displayed corresponding to the change information of a predetermined hold area and the prefetch hold icon 472 that corresponds to change information of another hold area A hold exchange performance process is performed to perform a ``hold exchange performance'' as a hold lookahead target change performance that replaces (exchanges) the hold lookahead target.

That is, in the hold exchange performance process, first, the type counter in the hold look-ahead performance request storage area is set to "3" indicating "hold exchange performance", and the first exchange flag is set to ON for the target first counter. Set a value indicating the execution area or hold area (with hold effect counter = 6) that is being held (with hold effect counter = 6), and the hold area (with hold effect counter = 7) where the second exchange flag is set on for the target second counter. Set a value that indicates

Next, set "1" to the hold effect counter of the hold area where the second exchange flag is set to on (hold effect counter = 7), and set the hold effect counter for which the second exchange flag is set to on. The same value (mode rank) stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the same reservation area is stored in the execution rank storage area of the area. Furthermore, "1" is set to the hold effect counter of the execution area or hold area where the first exchange flag is set to on (hold effect counter = 6), and the first exchange flag is set to on. The execution rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area is stored with the same value (aspect rank) as the value (aspect rank) stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the same execution area or reservation area. As a result, the value of the pending effect counter changes from "6 to 1" by redrawing the mode of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area. This changes as if the mode and the mode of the pending icon 471 in which the value of the pending effect counter changes from "7 to 1" have been swapped.

In addition, in this example, in the process, "1" is always set to the pending effect counter for which the first change flag was set to ON, but for example, in a lottery, either "1" or "2" is set. It is also possible to configure it so that it is set. Furthermore, in this example, in the process, "1" is always set to the pending effect counter for which the second change flag was set to ON, but for example, "1", "4", "6" are set in the lottery. It is also possible to configure such that either one of the following is set.

After step S6307, this processing ends. In addition, since there are three pending prefetch performance request storage areas in this embodiment, multiple "hold prefetch target change performances" among the "pre-hold movement performance", "post-hold movement performance", and "hold exchange performance" may be performed at the same time. However, the same type of pending prefetch target change performance is not performed at the same time.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, after step S4205, in step S4206, a pending icon shift process is performed to shift the pending icon 471 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. That is, in the data shift process of step S4203, since the fluctuation information in the reservation information storage area has been shifted, the reservation area in which such fluctuation information is stored and the reservation icon in the reservation display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 The hold icon 471 will be redrawn to match the display position of the hold icon 471. Here, the pending icon shift process will be explained with reference to FIG. 47.

First, in step S6401, it is determined whether the values of the type counters of all three pending prefetch performance request storage areas are "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6401, that is, if the "hold prefetch target change effect" is not performed, the process moves to step S6402.

In step S6402, the value of the pending effect counter stored in the execution area and the pending area of the pending information storage area, the value of the execution rank storage area, and which one of the first variable display and the second variable display corresponds to. The pending icon 471 is re-drawn (pending re-drawing process) based on the information on whether the pending icon 471 is to be held or the like. That is, by redrawing the hold icon 471 based on the information whose storage location has been shifted by the data shift process of the hold information storage area immediately before (in step S4203 of the hold process), the hold icon 471 is Every time one display is completed (executed), the hold icon 471 in the execution compatible area 462 located at the left end of the hold display area 461 is cleared, and the hold icon 471 in the hold compatible area 463 is moved one place to the left. (the display location moves one frame to the left). In particular, the hold icon 471 placed at the far left of the hold area 463 is shifted to the execution area 462.

After step S6402, in step S6403, the ST border line 465 (see FIG. 52(d)) is also shifted. In other words, if there is an execution area or hold area with the last 1 flag set to ON, a process is performed to redisplay the ST border line 465 on the right side of the execution compatible area 462 or hold compatible area 463 of the corresponding hold display area 461. . After step S6403, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6401, that is, if some kind of "holding prefetching target change effect" is performed, in steps S6404 to S6406, a "connection effect" is performed to make the "holding prefetching target changing effect" easier to understand. Perform processing to derive . That is, in step S6404, the connecting effect flag is set on, and in step S6405, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the connecting effect timer. Furthermore, in step S6406, the default hold flag of the execution area and the pending area indicated by the target first counter and target second counter of all pending prefetch effect request storage areas whose type counter values are "1 to 3" Set to on. Note that when the default hold flag is set on, the mode of the corresponding hold icon 471 is maintained in the default mode.

After step S6406, in step S6407, it is determined whether or not there is a pending prefetch performance request storage area in which the value of the type counter is "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6407, that is, if a "pre-hold movement effect" which is a type of "hold prefetch target change effect" is to be performed, a previous connection effect setting process is performed in step S6408. In addition, the generation and display of the "pre-hold movement effect" is started by the pre-connection effect setting process, and thereafter, on the condition that the connecting effect flag is set to on, the generation and display of the "pre-hold movement effect" are started. The display etc. will continue, and a 2 second video etc. will be performed as a "pre-hold movement effect".

In the "pre-hold movement effect", the character displayed in the look-ahead hold icon 472 corresponding to the hold area indicated by the value of the second target counter is moved This effect is such that it is displayed as a hold icon 472. Therefore, instead of instantaneously moving the character, by performing a "connection effect" that allows the character to be seen while moving, the character's target corresponds to the holding area indicated by the value of the second target counter. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the hold icon 471 has been changed to the hold icon 471 corresponding to the hold area indicated by the value of the target first counter.

More specifically, the mode rank corresponding to the value indicated in the execution rank storage area of the pending area indicated by the value of the target second counter of the pending prefetch performance request storage area where the value of the type counter is "1". A process is performed in which the "character" displayed by the pre-read pending icon 472 is made to pop out from the "treasure box" and displayed at the upper position of the pending display area 461. In particular, the "character" corresponds to the upper position of the part of the pending display area 461 that corresponds to the execution area or pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter, and to the pending area indicated by the value of the second target counter. At a position between the upper position of the part and the part corresponding to the execution area or hold area indicated by the value of the target first counter, the display is directed toward the upper position side (left side) of the part corresponding to the execution area or hold area indicated by the value of the target first counter.

After step S6408, or if a negative determination is made in step S6407, it is determined in step S6409 whether or not there is a pending prefetch performance request storage area in which the value of the type counter is "2". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6409, that is, if a ``post-hold movement effect'' which is a type of ``hold prefetch target change effect'' is to be performed, a succeeding effect setting process is performed in step S6410. In addition, the generation and display of the "movement effect after hold" is started by the subsequent connection effect setting process, and thereafter, on the condition that the connecting effect flag is set to on, the generation and display of the "movement effect after hold" is started. The display etc. will continue, and a 2 second video etc. will be performed as a "movement effect after suspension".

"Movement effect after holding" is such that the character displayed in the pre-reading holding icon 472 corresponding to the holding area indicated by the value of the target first counter moves to the pre-reading holding area corresponding to the holding area indicated by the value of the second target counter. This effect is such that it is displayed as a hold icon 472. Therefore, instead of instantaneously moving the character, by performing a "connection effect" that allows you to see how it is moving, the character's target corresponds to the holding area indicated by the value of the first target counter. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the hold icon 471 has been changed to the hold icon 471 corresponding to the hold area indicated by the value of the second target counter.

More specifically, it corresponds to the execution area indicated by the value of the target first counter of the pending prefetch performance request storage area where the value of the type counter is "2" or the value indicated by the execution rank storage area of the pending area. A process is performed in which the "character" displayed by the pre-read pending icon 472 of the mode rank is made to jump out of the "treasure box" and displayed at the upper position of the pending display area 461. In particular, the "character" is located above the part of the pending display area 461 that corresponds to the execution area or pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter, and above the pending area indicated by the value of the second target counter. In the position between the target second counter and the target second counter value, the display is directed toward the upper position side (to the right side) of the part corresponding to the execution area or the holding area indicated by the value of the second target counter.

After step S6410, or if a negative determination is made in step S6409, it is determined in step S6411 whether or not there is a pending prefetch performance request storage area in which the value of the type counter is "3". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6411, that is, if a "holding exchange effect" which is a type of "holding prefetch target change effect" is to be performed, an exchange connecting effect setting process is performed in step S6412.

In addition, through the exchange connecting effect setting process, the generation and display of the "pending exchange effect" are started, and thereafter, on the condition that the connecting effect flag is set to on, the generation and display of the "pending exchange effect", etc. will continue, and a 2-second video etc. will be performed as a "hold exchange effect". In addition, the three pending look-ahead performance request storage areas are respectively associated with different image layers of the decorative symbol display device 42, and are used for "pre-hold movement performance", "post-hold movement performance", and "hold exchange performance". When a plurality of them are performed at the same time, the characters may be moved and displayed so as to (partially) overlap one another.

The "hold exchange effect" includes the character displayed in the pre-read hold icon 472 corresponding to the hold area indicated by the value of the target first counter, and the pre-read hold corresponding to the hold area indicated by the value of the target second counter. This is an effect of replacing (exchanging) the character displayed with the icon 472. Therefore, instead of instantaneously moving the character, a "connection effect" is performed that allows the character to be seen in the process of movement, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the character has been replaced.

More specifically, it corresponds to the execution area indicated by the value of the target first counter of the pending prefetch performance request storage area where the type counter value is "3" or the value indicated by the execution rank storage area of the pending area. The "character" displayed by the look-ahead pending icon 472 of the mode rank is made to pop out from the "treasure box" and displayed "facing right" above the pending display area 461, and the pending figure indicated by the value of the second target counter is displayed. The "character" displayed by the look-ahead pending icon 472 of the mode rank corresponding to the value indicated in the execution rank storage area of the area is made to pop out of the "treasure box" and is displayed "facing left" in the upper position of the pending display area 461. let

Further, after step S6412, in step S6413, the values of the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area in which the fluctuation information targeted for the "holding exchange effect" is stored are changed. Perform processing. In other words, regarding the execution area or the hold area indicated by the target first counter and target second counter values whose type counter value is "3", the value stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area, respectively. Performs processing to replace the value stored in . For example, if the values stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the second reservation area indicated by the first target counter are "2" and "4", respectively, the second target counter The values stored in the execution rank storage area and upper limit rank storage area of the fourth holding area indicated by are respectively (contrary to the values of the execution rank storage area and upper limit rank storage area of the second holding area). ) "4" and "2", and in step S6410, the values are stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the second reservation area indicated by the target first counter. The values stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the fourth pending area indicated by the second target counter are respectively set as "2" and "2" respectively. ” and “4”.

After step S6413, or if a negative determination is made in step S6411, the process moves to step S6402 and redrawing of the pending icon 471 is performed. However, regarding the execution area and the hold area where the default hold flag is set to ON, the hold icon 471 in the default mode is displayed regardless of the storage information of the hold effect counter and the execution rank storage area. Thereafter, in step S6403, the ST border line 465 is shifted, and then the present process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3907, a process during a continuous display is performed to perform a “connection effect” mainly performed in the hold display area 461. Here, the process during continuous display will be explained with reference to FIG. 48.

First, in step S6501, it is determined whether or not the connecting effect flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S6501, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the determination in step S6501 is affirmative, one is subtracted from the connection effect timer in step S6502.

In the following step S6503, it is determined whether the value of the connection effect timer is 0 or not. It should be noted that the connection effect timer is set to a value equivalent to 2 seconds in the pending icon shift process. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the duration is 2 seconds for any of the connecting performances of the "pre-hold movement performance", the "post-hold movement performance", and the "hold exchange performance".

If a negative determination is made in step S6503, in step S6508, a continuous display continuation process is performed to continue displaying the continuous effect, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, a two-second moving image is generated as a connecting effect on the decorative pattern display device 42.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6503, then in step S6504, a connecting effect ending process is performed to end the connecting effect (display, audio, etc.). In the following step S6505, the default hold flag that is set on is turned off.

In the subsequent step S6506, the pending icon 471 is displayed based on the values of the pending effect counters in the execution area and the pending area, the storage information in the execution rank storage area, and the information regarding which of the first variable display and the second variable display corresponds. Performs redraw processing. As a result, although the hold effect counter was set to "1", the hold icon 471, which was displayed in the default manner because the default hold flag was set on, changes to the look-ahead hold icon 472. Become.

After that, in step S6507, the connecting effect flag is turned off, and then the process ends.

Next, the flow of each "holding prefetch target change effect" will be explained using a specific example with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. Incidentally, if the "holding prefetching target change effect" is not performed, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the hold icon 471 in the hold display area 461 is shifted to the next (left) hold compatible area 463 or execution compatible area 462. Incidentally, FIGS. 54 to 57 are explanatory diagrams showing the correspondence between the information of the pending performance counter stored in the pending information storage area and the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461. Further, in these figures, for convenience, the reservation areas of the reservation information storage area will be described up to the fourth reservation area.

First, the character displayed on the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the hold area shown by the value of the target second counter in the hold look-ahead production request storage area is changed to the character displayed by the value of the target first counter. The flow of the "pre-hold movement effect" for moving to the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the hold area will be explained.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55, when the reservation flag is set on in the second reservation area of the reservation information storage area (the reservation effect counter = "2"), the release flag is set on in the fourth reservation area. (Pending performance counter → "3", see step S6111 of the pending icon setting process), and if "2" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is stored in the execution rank storage area of the second pending area. , "2" is also forcibly set in the execution rank storage area of the fourth pending area (see step S6211 of the mode rank setting process), and "mode rank 2" is set in the fourth pending corresponding area of the pending display area 461. A pre-reading pending icon 472 of the corresponding "treasure box with shark" is displayed. By the way, when the reservation flag is set to on, the default reservation icon 471 is set to be displayed regardless of the value stored in the execution rank storage area. A default (closed treasure chest only) pending icon 471 is displayed in the second pending area corresponding to the second pending area in which the pending flag is set to ON.

Then, the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command and performs data shift processing of the reservation information storage area, so that the reservation area in which the reservation flag is set to on is moved from the second reservation area to the first reservation area. , the hold area whose release flag is set to on will be moved from the fourth hold area to the third hold area. Also, at this stage, a pre-read effect progress setting process is performed. As a result, the reservation flag in the first reservation area is changed to an execution flag (retention effect counter→“1”), and the release flag in the third reservation area is turned off (reservation effect counter→“0”). Furthermore, at this stage, storage processing is performed in the pending prefetch performance request storage area. As a result, "1" corresponding to the execution of the "pre-hold movement effect" is set to the type counter of the hold look-ahead effect request storage area, and "1" corresponding to the hold first area is set to the target first counter. is set, and "3" corresponding to the third pending area is set for the second target counter.

In the subsequent pending icon shift process, when it is confirmed that the type counter in the pending prefetch performance request storage area is not set to "0", the connecting performance flag is set on, and the connecting performance timer is set to 2 seconds. A value corresponding to is set, and the default hold flags of the first pending area and the third pending area indicated by the first target counter and the second target counter are set on (see step S6406).

Furthermore, since "1" is set in the type counter of the pending look-ahead production request storage area, the character for the mode rank 2 indicated in the execution rank storage area of the pending third area indicated by the target second counter is Processing is performed to display a certain "shark" above the third reservation corresponding area in the reservation display area 461 (see step S6408).

Subsequently, processing is performed to shift the hold icon 471 to the left. In other words, since the variation information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, the value of the pending effect counter in the execution area and each pending area, the stored information in the execution rank storage area, the first variation display and the second variation display If the hold icon 471 is redrawn based on the information regarding the correspondence, the hold icon 471 will be shifted to the left (see step S6402). However, regarding the first hold area and the third hold area where the default hold flag is set to on, the default mode will not be applied (while the character object 474 is moving), regardless of the storage information in the hold effect counter and execution rank storage area. A hold icon 471 is displayed. In other words, the execution flag is set on in the first hold area (hold effect counter = "1"), but the prefetch hold icon 472 is not displayed in the first hold corresponding area, and the default hold An icon 471 is displayed.

In particular, regarding the look-ahead pending icon 472 in the form of "a shark is looking at us from an open treasure chest" that was displayed in the fourth pending area of the pending display area 461 before the shift processing of the pending icon 471 was performed. With the shift processing of the hold icon 471, the icon changes to the default mode of “treasure box with a closed lid” and moves to the third hold corresponding area of the hold display area 461. However, as mentioned above, above the "treasure box with a closed lid", a "shark" that appears to have escaped from the "treasure box" and is swimming toward the left is displayed.

After that, the "shark" that escaped from the "treasure box" is displayed as swimming to the left above the hold display area 461 for 2 seconds (it may move at a constant speed in one direction, or it may move in a meandering direction). You can move up and down, go back and forth, change speed, stop and go back, or change your facial expressions and gestures). Then, two seconds later, the default hold flag is turned off and the hold icon 471 is redrawn. As a result, the "treasure box" displayed in the first pending area which is the pending icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the first pending area indicated by the value of the target first counter in the pending prefetch performance request storage area '', the ``shark'' that was swimming above dives in, and a ``treasure box with a shark'' is displayed in the first holding area. In this embodiment, a display effect in which a character object 474 such as a "shark" moves (swims) between "treasure boxes" that are base objects 473 constitutes a "connection effect."

The basic flow of the "pre-hold movement effect" has been described above, but in particular, as shown in FIG. If so, I would like the prefetch pending icon 472 to be derived, and when it is derived, I want the "pre-hold movement effect" to occur, and when it occurs, the character object 474 that jumped out of the "treasure box" It is possible to add a very exciting gameplay feature that requires players to cross the ST border line 465 to the fixed variable mode side. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is at least 2 seconds or more (for example, 6 seconds or more, and the look-ahead target change effect ends before the timing at which the ready-to-reach state occurs). ), and the shift process is not performed while the character object 474 such as a "shark" is being displayed swimming.

Next, the character displayed on the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the hold area indicated by the value of the target first counter in the hold look-ahead performance request storage area is indicated by the value of the target second counter. The flow of the "post-hold movement effect" to move the change information to the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information stored in the hold area will be explained.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56, when the pre-change flag is set on in the first pending area of the pending information storage area (the pending effect counter = "4"), the destination flag is set in the fourth pending area. When set to on (hold production counter → "5"), if "2" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is stored in the execution rank storage area of the first reservation area, then the execution of the fourth reservation area is "2" is also forcibly set in the rank storage area (see step S6209 of the aspect rank setting process). However, when the change destination flag is set to ON, the default pending icon 471 is set to be displayed regardless of the value stored in the execution rank storage area.

Therefore, from the state where the pre-read pending icon 472 of "treasure box with shark" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is displayed in the first pending area corresponding to the first pending area in the pending display area 461, A mode is derived in which a default (closed treasure chest only) hold icon 471 is additionally displayed at a position corresponding to the fourth area.

Then, the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command and performs data shift processing of the pending information storage area, so that the pending area whose pre-change flag is set to on is moved from the first pending area to the execution area. The holding area whose change destination flag is set to ON will be moved from the fourth holding area to the third holding area. Also, at this stage, by performing the pre-read effect progress setting process, the reservation flag in the execution area is turned off (reservation effect counter → "0"), and the change destination flag in the reservation third area is changed to the execution flag. (Pending production counter → “1”). Furthermore, at this stage, by performing storage processing in the pending pre-read performance request storage area, "2" corresponding to the execution of the "move performance after suspension" is set in the type counter of the pending pre-read performance request storage area. "0" corresponding to the execution area is set for the first target counter, and "3" corresponding to the pending third area is set for the second target counter.

In the subsequent pending icon shift process, when it is confirmed that the type counter in the pending prefetch performance request storage area is not set to "0", the connecting performance flag is set on, and the connecting performance timer is set to 2 seconds. A value corresponding to is set, and the default hold flags of the execution area and the pending third area indicated by the first target counter and the second target counter are set to on.

Furthermore, since "2" is set in the type counter of the pending look-ahead production request storage area, " "Shark" is displayed above the execution compatible area in the pending display area 461 (see step S6410).

Subsequently, processing is performed to shift the hold icon 471 to the left. In other words, since the variation information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, the value of the pending effect counter in the execution area and each pending area, the stored information in the execution rank storage area, the first variation display and the second variation display If the hold icon 471 is redrawn based on the information regarding the correspondence, the hold icon 471 will be shifted to the left (see step S6402). However, regarding the execution area and the third hold area where the default hold flag is set to on, the hold icon in the default mode is displayed (while the character object 474 is moving), regardless of the storage information of the hold effect counter and the execution rank storage area. Display 471. That is, although the execution flag is set on in the third holding area (holding effect counter = "1"), the prefetch holding icon 472 is not displayed, and the default holding icon 471 is displayed.

In particular, regarding the look-ahead pending icon 472 in the form of "a shark is looking at us from an open treasure chest" that was displayed in the execution compatible area of the pending display area 461 until the shift processing of the pending icon 471 was performed, As the hold icon 471 is shifted, it changes to a "treasure box with a closed lid" mode and moves to the execution compatible area of the hold display area 461. However, as described above, above the "treasure box with a closed lid", a "shark" that appears to have escaped from the "treasure box" and is swimming toward the right side is displayed.

Thereafter, a display is performed in which the "shark" that has escaped from the "treasure box" takes two seconds to swim above the hold display area 461 to the right. Then, two seconds later, the default hold flag is turned off and the hold icon 471 is redrawn. As a result, the "treasure box" displayed in the third pending area, which is the pending icon 471, corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the pending third area, which is indicated by the value of the target second counter in the pending look-ahead production request storage area. '', the ``shark'' that was swimming above dives in, and a ``treasure box with a shark'' is displayed at the position corresponding to the third holding area.

Next, the character displayed on the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the hold area shown by the value of the target first counter in the hold look-ahead performance request storage area and the value of the target second counter The flow of the "holding exchange effect" that causes the character to be exchanged with the character displayed on the holding icon 471 corresponding to the change information stored in the holding area to be displayed will be explained.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the first exchange flag is set on in the second pending area of the pending information storage area (the pending effect counter = "6"), the second exchange flag is set in the fourth pending area. When the flag is set on (pending performance counter → "7"), "2" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is stored in the execution rank storage area of the second pending area, and the upper limit rank memory of the second pending area is stored. Assuming that "4" corresponding to "mode rank 4" is stored in the area, "4" is forcibly set in the execution rank storage area of the fourth pending area, and "2" is forcibly set in the upper limit rank storage area of the 4 area (see step S6207 of the aspect rank setting process). Therefore, from the state where the pre-reading pending icon 472 of "treasure box with shark" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is displayed in the second pending area of the pending display area 461, to the fourth pending area. A mode is derived in which a prefetch pending icon 472 of "treasure box with crab" corresponding to "mode rank 4" is additionally displayed.

Then, the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command and performs data shift processing of the pending information storage area, so that the pending area in which the first exchange flag is set to ON changes from the pending second area to the pending first area. Then, the holding area in which the second exchange flag is set to ON is moved from the fourth holding area to the third holding area. Also, at this stage, by performing the pre-read effect progress setting process, the first exchange flag in the first hold area is changed to the execution flag (hold effect counter → "1"), and the second exchange flag in the third hold area is changed. The flag is changed to an execution flag (pending performance counter → "1"). Furthermore, at this stage, by performing storage processing in the pending pre-read performance request storage area, "3" corresponding to the execution of the "pending exchange performance" is set for the type counter of the pending pre-read performance request storage area. "1" corresponding to the first pending area is set to the first target counter, and "3" corresponding to the third pending area is set to the second target counter.

In the subsequent pending icon shift process, when it is confirmed that the type counter in the pending prefetch performance request storage area is not set to "0", the connecting performance flag is set on, and the connecting performance timer is set to 2 seconds. A value corresponding to is set, and the default hold flags of the first holding area and the third holding area indicated by the first target counter and the second target counter are set to ON.

Furthermore, since "3" is set in the type counter of the pending prefetch performance request storage area, the character for the mode rank 2 indicated in the execution rank storage area of the pending first area indicated by the target first counter is A certain "shark" is displayed above the first hold corresponding area in the hold display area 461, and the character for the mode rank 4 indicated in the execution rank storage area of the hold third area indicated by the target second counter is displayed. A process is performed to display "crab" which is above the third reservation corresponding area in the reservation display area 461 (see step S6412).

In addition, the value "2" stored in the execution rank storage area of the first holding area indicated by the target first counter and the value "4" stored in the upper limit rank storage area are exchanged, and the rank storage The values stored in the area and upper limit rank storage area are "4" and "2", respectively. Additionally, the value "4" stored in the execution rank storage area of the third holding area indicated by the second target counter and the value "2" stored in the upper limit rank storage area are exchanged, and the value "2" stored in the upper limit rank storage area is replaced. and the values stored in the upper limit rank storage area are "2" and "4", respectively.

Subsequently, processing is performed to shift the hold icon 471 to the left. In other words, since the variation information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, the value of the pending effect counter in the execution area and each pending area, the stored information in the execution rank storage area, the first variation display and the second variation display If the hold icon 471 is redrawn based on the information regarding the correspondence, the hold icon 471 will be shifted to the left (see step S6402). However, regarding the first hold area and the third hold area where the default hold flag is set to on, the default mode will not be applied (while the character object 474 is moving), regardless of the storage information in the hold effect counter and execution rank storage area. A hold icon 471 is displayed. In other words, the execution flag is set to ON in the first hold area and the third hold area (hold effect counter = "1"), but the prefetch hold icon 472 is not displayed, and the default hold icon 471 is displayed. be done.

Also, regarding the look-ahead pending icon 472 in the form of "a shark is looking at us from an open treasure chest" that was displayed in the second pending area of the pending display area 461 before the shift processing of the pending icon 471 was performed. As the hold icon 471 is shifted, the icon changes to a “treasure box with a closed lid” mode and moves to the first hold corresponding area of the hold display area 461. Furthermore, the pre-reading of the "crab peeking at us from the open treasure chest" aspect that was displayed in the position corresponding to the fourth pending area of the pending display area 461 before the shift processing of the pending icon 471 was performed. As for the hold icon 472, as the hold icon 471 is shifted, it changes to a "treasure box with a closed lid" mode and moves to a position corresponding to the hold third area of the hold display area 461.

However, as mentioned above, above the "treasure box with a closed lid" displayed in the first pending area of the pending display area 461, there is a symbol that appears to have escaped from the "treasure box" and is swimming towards the right side. A "shark" is displayed, and a "crab" that appears to have escaped the "treasure box" and is swimming towards the left is displayed above the "treasure box with a closed lid" displayed in the third holding area. has been done.

Thereafter, the "shark" and "crab" that escaped from the "treasure box" are displayed as if swimming above the hold display area 461 for two seconds. Then, two seconds later, the default hold flag is turned off and the hold icon 471 is redrawn. As a result, the "treasure box" in the third pending area corresponding to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information stored in the pending third area indicated by the value of the target second counter in the pending prefetch performance request storage area is displayed in the upper part. The "shark" that was swimming in the water dives in, and a "treasure box with a shark" is displayed in the third holding area, and is stored in the first holding area indicated by the value of the target first counter in the holding pre-reading performance request storage area. The "crab" that was swimming above dives into the "treasure box" in the first hold area, which is the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information that is displayed, and the "treasure box with crab" is displayed in the first hold area. becomes.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3908, display setting processing is performed. Here, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving a variation pattern command and a symbol command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table and determines the display pattern etc. based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, etc. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined matter to the display control device 45 as a display command.

The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of decorative patterns on the decorative pattern display device 42. Note that once a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the symbols are displayed in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. continues to be displayed. In addition, in the display setting process of step S3908, a process (win display process) for controlling the effect during the jackpot is also performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a display command is generated, an execution compatible area display process is also performed that changes the display mode of the pending icon 471 in the execution compatible area 462 of the pending display area 461. . That is, as shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 52(c), an effect display is performed in which a "treasure box" forming the hold icon 471 is opened and the contents are viewed, and there are multiple patterns for the contents. Provided. For example, there are cases where marine life, shells, treasures, tools for navigation and sea bathing, etc. are stored, and there are cases where nothing is stored, and each case is associated with a jackpot expectation level. Among them, if there is a large amount of "bubbles" generated from the opened treasure chest, or if the "bubbles" are large, or if a "school of fish" jumps out, the expectation of a jackpot will increase. There is. Furthermore, the "bubbles" and "schools of fish" may extend to the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42 where decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the holding-related display related to the holding display and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern may be affected. There are also productions with high expectations for jackpots, such as collaboration with fluctuation-related information related to the display.

In this embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured to have a higher probability of generating "bubbles" or "schools of fish" than the default pending icon 471. For example, when the prefetch pending icon 472 reaches the execution compatible area 462 of the pending display area 461, the character object 474 jumps out of the treasure box, and the character object 474 is followed by the character object 474, so that "bubbles", "fish school", etc. are always derived. It may also be a thing. Incidentally, "School of Fish" has a higher jackpot expectation than "Bubbles", and the higher the mode rank of the look-ahead pending icon 472, the easier it is for "School of Fish" to be selected.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the display setting process of step S3908, a display process (win display process) during a jackpot is performed. Here, the winning display process will be explained with reference to FIG. 37. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, a round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to "15RS" or "15RN" based on the information included in the opening command. If it is, set it to "15", and if it is "2RS", set it to "2".

After that, in step S4703, if it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, the opening performance for 8 seconds is set (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps are set), and then this process is performed. finish. In addition, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a table etc. that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various performance modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding performance can be executed by referring to the table. Choose and execute it.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not an interval command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, the performance during the round is set for a maximum of 30 seconds, and then this process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and in step S4708, if it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, the performance during the 4-second interval is set, and then this process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and in step S4711, if it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, a 10-second ending performance is set, and then this process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with no balls, each period such as the opening period (2 seconds), round period (0.4 seconds), interval period (1 second), and ending period (1 second) Rather than setting up performances in sections, we have decided to set up performances (announcements, etc.) that take place throughout the entire period.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a winning end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S4712 is affirmative, then in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and a setting is made to enter the normal gaming state in which a variable display is performed. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, after the display setting process in step S3908, in step S3909, a variation stop process regarding stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 49.

First, in step S6601, it is determined whether a stop command (see step S819 of special display control processing) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6601, a process is performed to stop the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 in step S6602. In the following step S6603, the value of the variation counter for determining the remaining period of the variable probability mode is subtracted by 1.

After step S6603, or if a negative determination is made in step S6601, it is determined in step S6604 whether a support termination command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S6604, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S6604 is affirmative, in step S6605, a process is performed to change the performance stage displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 from the "probable variable stage" to the normal stage. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3910, the lighting pattern of lamps and electric decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the decorative pattern display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3911.

In step S3912, control settings for customer waiting effects (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed with no variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42; energy saving mode), etc. Process.

In step S3913, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings set in steps S3905 to S3913. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3913, which are performed every 2 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process moves to step S3914, and it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3915, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step S3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3916. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As detailed above, in the first embodiment, when the first variable display or the second variable display is stored on hold based on the game ball entering the starting winning device 33a, 33b, the variable display is held on hold. In order to teach the player what has been memorized, the display mode of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b (lighting patterns of the first hold lamp and second hold lamp; in this example, the first hold display (equivalent), and a pending icon 471 is displayed in the pending display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42. In particular, the pending icon 471 may be derived as a look-ahead pending icon 472 that indicates the content of the corresponding variable display, that is, the expected level of occurrence of a jackpot state (jackpot expected level).

Furthermore, even if the pending icon 471 corresponding to a predetermined variable display is not set as the pre-read pending icon 472 at this stage, the pre-read pending icon 472 of this embodiment is configured to By changing the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 that was derived as the pending icon 461 corresponding to another variable display, there remains a possibility that the prefetch pending icon 472 will be derived in response to the predetermined variable display. It is configured as follows. More specifically, the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived by combining a character object 474 with a base object 473 imitating a "treasure box," and the default pending icon 471 is derived in a "treasure box only" mode. derived. Then, by moving the character object 474 from a predetermined treasure box to another treasure box (changing the base object 473 that is the target for displaying the character object 474), the character object 474 is made to be the target of the prefetch pending icon 472. The variable display is now changed. In other words, even at the timing after the hold icon 471 is derived in the default manner, there is a possibility that the hold icon 471 changes to the look-ahead hold icon 472 before the variable display corresponding to the hold icon 471 is consumed. is configured so that it remains. Thereby, it is possible to expect that the default pending icon 471 may change to the prefetch pending icon 472 until the default pending icon 471 is consumed.

Therefore, due to the existence of the prefetch pending icon 472 and the default pending icon 471, the player's emotions such as the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur with respect to the default pending icon 471 are relatively lowered. As a result, they lose interest in the pending icon 471, and furthermore, they have a negative impression of the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending icon 471. It is possible to avoid situations such as the following: In particular, in a state where the prefetch pending icon 472 and the default pending icon 471 are displayed in the pending display area 461, this effect is even more effective. As a result, the negative aspects of being able to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 can be eliminated, and by performing a performance using the prefetch pending icon 472, it is possible to more reliably improve interest.

Furthermore, rather than winning the jackpot with the first variable display based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, the second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second In the case of winning a jackpot in the second variable display based on the ball entering the starting winning device 33b, it is easier for the player to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (for the jackpot in the second variable display, "4RS" is (Not only is it not selected, but the selection rate of "15RS" is increasing.) For this reason, the player would like to win the jackpot state in the second variable display if possible. However, for example, when both the first variable display and the second variable display are on hold (in the normal mode of this example, they are basically held alternately), the first variable display is on hold. On the other hand, when the look-ahead hold icon 472, which greatly increases expectations for a jackpot state, is derived, I feel disappointed that it would have been better if the look-ahead hold icon 472 had been derived for the hold display of the second variable display. There is a concern that this may happen. Furthermore, depending on the player, as the jackpot expectation level of the first variable display in which the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived is increased, the jackpot expectation level in the second variable display in which the look-ahead pending icon 472 is not derived is relatively reduced. There is a concern that people may get the impression that they may have done so. In this case, the negative image of the prefetch pending icon 472 becomes stronger, which may result in a decrease in interest.

In this respect, as described above, even after the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in response to a predetermined variable display, the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed from the predetermined variable display to other By configuring the display to be changeable to the variable display, even if the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in response to the first variable display, the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed from the first variable display to the second variable display. You can have expectations for what will happen. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated.

Furthermore, for example, even if the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in response to the second variable display, there is a possibility that the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 will be changed to the first variable display, which may reduce the gameplay. It can make you feel. For example, if the desired hold icon 471 (for example, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display) is set to the prefetch hold icon 472, the corresponding variable display may be digested without changing the derivation target. You can enthusiastically check and enjoy the behavior of the hold display. Moreover, if a predetermined condition is cleared, it is possible to add gameplay features such as being exempted from changes that are undesirable for the player, and it is possible to increase the points for adding intonation to the game. In addition, if the derivation target of the prefetch pending icon 472 does not change during the predetermined number of variable displays, it may be configured so that it does not change thereafter, or a predetermined effect is derived as a result of a predetermined lottery. If the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, the configuration may be such that changing the derivation target of the predetermined prefetch pending icon 472 is prohibited.

Moreover, although multiple patterns are prepared for the aspect of the prefetch hold icon 472, when the variable display of the target of the prefetch hold icon 472 is changed, the prefetch hold icon 472 remains the same as before the change. The target of 472 is configured to be changed. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, when the character object 474 displayed in combination with a predetermined base object 473 (treasure box) is moved to another base object 473 (treasure box), the prefetch pending icon 472 This indicates that the target fluctuation display has been changed. For this reason, even if the variable display of the target of the prefetch hold icon 472 is changed, the aspect of the prefetch hold icon 472 before the change and the aspect of the change destination prefetch hold icon 472 are the same. The prefetch pending icon 472 that corresponded to the variable display has been changed to correspond to another variable display rather than the predetermined variable display, and furthermore, the prefetch pending icon 472 suggests that It is possible to make it easier to understand that the content displayed is not about the predetermined variable display but about the other variable display.

Further, even if the variable display of the target of the pre-reading hold icon 472 is changed, it can be recognized that the aspect of the pre-reading holding icon 472 and, by extension, the suggested contents are followed. In other words, when the target of the look-ahead pending icon 472, which increases the jackpot expectation, is changed from the first variable display to the second variable display, the expectation for the first variable display decreases. Therefore, if the content suggested by the look-ahead pending icon 472 (expectation level of jackpot) derived for the first variable display is not guaranteed, there is a concern that the player may feel uneasy or distrustful.

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed, the prefetch pending icon 472 (character object 474) in the same manner is derived. However, when looking at the entire pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461, the effect (jackpot expectation level, etc.) due to the derivation of the pre-read pending icon 472 has changed. The situation can be such that there is no such thing. Therefore, for example, not only the variable display targeted by the prefetch hold icon 472 is changed, but also the aspect of the prefetch hold icon 472 is changed, so that the content suggested by the prefetch hold icon 472 becomes unclear. The value of the content suggested by the look-ahead hold icon 472 has changed, and where has the effect (jackpot expectation level, etc.) of the look-ahead hold icon 472 on the variable display that was targeted before the change gone? It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels distrustful or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the variable display targeted by the pre-read pending icon 472 is changed, the aspect of the pre-read pending icon 472 is configured to be changeable. In other words, by once following the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 before the change, it helps understanding that the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed, suppresses distrust, etc., and furthermore, the prefetch pending icon 472 By giving the possibility of changing the aspect of 472, even after the variable display targeted by the pre-reading pending icon 472 is changed, it is possible to expect further improvement of the pre-reading pending icon 472.

Further, when the variation information included in the preceding command sent from the main controller 261 to the sub-control device 262 is stored in a predetermined reservation area of the reservation information storage area of the sub-control device 262, the fluctuation information That is, settings regarding the hold icon 471 corresponding to the newly placed variable display are also performed. In this embodiment, at this point, the flow from when the hold icon 471 is displayed in the hold compatible area 463 of the hold display area 461 until it is shifted to the execution compatible area 462 and is consumed is determined to some extent.

More specifically, each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a hold effect counter that indicates the status regarding the hold icon 471. Then, when the variation information included in the first command is stored in a predetermined holding area, and when "1" is set for the holding effect counter of the holding area, as shown in FIG. 54, A prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the corresponding pending area 463 of the pending display area 461, is shifted to the execution compatible area 462, and then is consumed. Although there may be cases where the appearance of the prefetch hold icon 472 changes (the form rank steps up), there is no case where the prefetch hold icon 472 becomes the default hold icon 471 midway through. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 55, when "2" is set for the hold effect counter, there is a possibility that a prefetch hold icon 472 is derived, but it is not possible to add a hold icon 471 corresponding to a newly held variable display. It is not derived at the relevant timing to display. However, the mode of the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured to be determined based on the variation information. After that, when "3" is set for the hold effect counter of the hold area where the change information is newly stored, the hold effect counter is set as the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information stored in the hold area. A prefetch pending icon 472 with the same aspect as that stored in the execution rank storage area of the pending area where "2" is set is derived, and "3" is set in the pending effect counter in the next shift process. The pre-read pending icon 472 (character object 474) that has been derived corresponding to the pending area that has been moved is moved so that it becomes the pending icon 471 that corresponds to the pending area where "2" is set in the pending effect counter. (The default hold icon 471 of the preceding hold compatible area 463 and the pre-read hold icon 472 of the subsequent hold compatible area 463 are exchanged).

As described above, when the pre-read pending icon 472 does not exist in the pending display area 461 and the pending icon 471 is newly derived for the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 is not the pre-read pending icon 472. Even if it does not exist, it is possible to derive an effect (pre-hold movement effect) in which the hold icon 471 becomes the pre-read hold icon 472 at a subsequent timing. As a result, the player's expectation that there may still be a chance for the prefetch pending icon 472 to be derived can be sustained until the variable display corresponding to the default pending icon 471 is executed, and the pending icon 471 By making it possible to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 that suggests the content of the corresponding variable display, the effect of improving interest will be further achieved.

Furthermore, as described above, even if it is possible to change the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472, the content of the variable display to be changed may not match the suggested content (mode rank) of the prefetch pending icon 472. It has to be worth it. That is, for example, instead of the default pending icon 471 that corresponds to variable information that is already stored in a predetermined pending area of the pending information storage area, a prefetch pending icon 472 is derived as an afterthought (instead of a base object 473 that displays only treasure chests). If the character object 474 is to be additionally displayed), the variation information is referred to (again) to determine whether the content is worthy of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472, and a negative determination is made. In this case, the derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472 is canceled, or some variation information stored in other pending areas of the pending information storage area that is worthy of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 is found. There is a concern that the amount of processing required when variable display is suspended (fluctuation information is stored) may become enormous, such as repeating the process of confirming the contents until the end of the change.

In this regard, by checking the "reservation flag" that can be set when fluctuation information is stored, it is possible to easily understand whether or not fluctuation information that can derive the prefetch reservation icon 472 is stored. . Therefore, there is no need to continue searching for variation information that is worth blindly deriving the prefetch pending icon 472, so in a configuration in which it is decided to perform the prefetch pending icon 472 later, the process when it is decided It is possible to prevent a situation where the process becomes complicated and, depending on the case, a processing failure occurs.

Furthermore, whether or not to turn on the cancellation flag is determined by lottery (reservation cancellation lottery process). The lottery will be held if there is a reservation area with the reservation flag turned on when the fluctuation information is stored in the reservation information storage area, and the lottery will be held with a higher probability than when the reservation flag etc. are set on. It is now set to on. Therefore, even if change information is newly stored in the hold information storage area after the hold flag is set, the hold icon 471 always corresponds to the change information for which the hold flag has been set, regardless of its contents. It is possible to avoid deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 for. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the reservation flag is set on, but the probability that the release flag is subsequently set on is low, and the "pre-reservation movement effect" is hardly derived. Thereby, it is possible to avoid having too many, too few, or too unambiguous derivation opportunities for the "pre-hold movement effect". As a result, it is possible to improve performance and gameplay.

Also, for example, before and after switching from the variable mode where the upper limit is until the variable display is performed 100 times to the normal mode, both the variable display performed in the variable mode and the variable display performed in the normal mode are suspended. In the hold display area 461 that is stored, hold icons 471 that are used in variable probability mode and hold icons 471 that are used in normal mode may coexist. In the present embodiment, in the hold display area 461, an ST border line 465 is displayed so that the boundary between the hold icon 471 that is consumed in the fixed variable mode and the hold icon 471 that is consumed in the normal mode is easily distinguishable. (See FIG. 52(d)).

However, the mode does not change between the pending icon 471 scheduled to be executed in the variable probability mode and the pending icon 471 scheduled to be executed in the normal mode. For this reason, for example, when the mode of the hold icon 471 is changed in order to teach the difference between the games to be executed, the pattern of the hold icon 471 becomes complicated (including the form of the look-ahead hold icon 472). , it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence with various effects, etc.) can be avoided. Furthermore, a jackpot state occurs in a state where both the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the fixed variable mode and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the normal game mode are displayed. In this case, after the jackpot state ends, the correspondence between the gaming mode and the gaming mode-related aspect of the pending icon 471 changes, so that the aspect of the pending icon 471 before the jackpot state is inconsistent as a result. This situation can be avoided. Therefore, the game can be played easily and smoothly.

Furthermore, although the jackpot expectation level increases by deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 in the pending display area 461, since the jackpot probability is different (10 times) between the normal mode and the fixed variable mode, the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in the normal mode, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when it is derived in the variable probability mode (as a result, the prefetch pending icon 472 derived in the variable probability mode has a higher value). Therefore, in a state where both the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the fixed variable mode and the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the normal mode are displayed, the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the normal mode is set as the pre-read pending icon 472. There is a concern that the player may feel that ``I wish the target of the look-ahead pending icon 472 had been targeted a little earlier.''

In this regard, in this embodiment, when the reservation flag is set on (reservation effect counter = 2) and the fluctuation information corresponds to the last four fluctuation displays of the fixed variable mode, and the fluctuation display If the cancellation flag (holding effect counter = 3) is set on for the fluctuation information of the fluctuation display performed in the normal mode before it is consumed, the pre-reading hold icon 472 changes from the place corresponding to the normal mode to the fixed variable mode. will be moved to the corresponding location. Therefore, even after the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived as the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the normal mode, instead of the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the fixed variable mode, when the fixed variable mode is about to end, the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is There remains the possibility that the display will be changed to a variable display that is digested in fixed variable mode. As a result, even if the pre-read pending icon 472 is not derived as the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the fixed variable mode when the fixed variable mode is about to end, the default pending icon 471 to be consumed in the fixed variable mode is still set to the pre-read pending icon 471. It is possible to hope that the icon 472 will be changed to the icon 472, and of course it will solve the above-mentioned problems such as the prefetch pending icon 472 being derived in correspondence with the normal mode and become depressed, and the prefetch pending icon The fact that 472 is derived in correspondence with the normal mode can be viewed favorably as an increase in the step up to the time when the pending icon 471 that is consumed in the variable probability mode is changed to the prefetch pending icon 472. For this reason, it is possible to simply give meaning that "the derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472" is "desirable for the player." As a result, the negative aspects of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 can be eliminated, and by configuring the prefetch pending icon 472 to be derivable, it is possible to more reliably improve interest.

In addition, in a state where both the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the variable variable mode and the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the normal mode are displayed, the pre-read pending icon 472 is derived from the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the variable variable mode. In order to avoid a situation where the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived for the pending icon 471 that is not executed in the normal mode, the pending icon 471 that is resolved in the fixed variable mode and the pending icon 471 that is resolved in the normal mode are generated. In a state where both the hold icon 471 and the hold icon 471 are displayed, there is no need to perform control (prohibition processing) such as not to derive the pre-read hold icon 472 with respect to the hold icon 471 to be consumed in the normal mode. Therefore, it contributes to the improvement of gameplay and performance, such as intentionally destroying the production opportunity such as deriving the pre-read pending icon 472 for the pending icon 471 that is consumed in the normal mode, and increasing the amount of processing for this purpose. You can avoid a vicious cycle if you don't.

Furthermore, just by setting the reservation flag on in response to the fluctuation information displayed in the variable variable mode, the reservation icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information will not be changed to the look-ahead reservation icon 472, and the reservation flag will not be changed to the look-ahead reservation icon 472. By suspending the fluctuation information for which the release flag is set to on before the fluctuation information for which the flag is set to on is digested, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information for which the reservation flag is set to on becomes pre-read pending. The icon will be changed to 472. Therefore, when the pre-read pending icon 472 is not derived as the pending icon 471 to be consumed in the variable variable mode even though the variable variable mode is about to end, it is possible to increase the desire to play the game to hold the variable display more. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 56, when "4" is set for the hold effect counter (the pre-change flag is set on) in response to predetermined change information stored in the hold information storage area, the change information Although the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in response to this, "5" is then set to the pending effect counter in response to the change information newly stored in the pending information storage area (the change destination flag is turned on). If set), at the timing of the next shift, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information of the hold performance counter "4" will be changed from the pre-read hold icon 472 to the default hold icon 471. On the other hand, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information of the hold effect counter "4" is initially derived in the default manner, but at the timing of the shift (via the connecting effect), the hold effect counter "5" The mode is changed to the prefetching hold icon 472 that was displayed as the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information of ).

As described above, even if the newly derived hold icon 471 for the hold display area 461 is not the prefetch hold icon 472, the default hold icon 471 already exists in the hold display area 461 at a later timing. It is possible to derive an effect (post-hold movement effect) in which the prefetch pending icon 472 is exchanged. As a result, it is possible to create more situations in which the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 may be changed (adding a gameplay feature where you do not know where the prefetch pending icon 472 will go), making the progress of the game tense. It is possible to give a sense of comfort and suppress fatigue. As a result, by making it possible to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 as an effect of suggesting the content of the corresponding variable display with the pending icon 471, the effect of improving interest is further achieved. Furthermore, since the plurality of hold icons 471 are linked together, it is possible to improve the effect, for example, compared to the case where the mode of each of the hold icons 471 is changed independently in the plurality of hold icons 471. .

In addition, in the "post-hold movement effect", among the hold icons 471 displayed in the hold display area 461, the pre-read hold icon 472 that was derived earlier is replaced with the default hold icon that was derived later. 471, so if the rank of the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 derived in advance (the prefetch pending icon 472 derived by the pre-change flag being set on) is too high, the rank will be changed to The destination flag cannot be set until appropriate variation information is stored on hold.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the mode rank of the pre-read pending icon 472 of the pre-change flag is set to "2" at most (the mode ranks range from "1" to "5", and the larger the number, the more the tank (high), it is possible to suppress such concerns and avoid a situation where opportunities for production are extremely reduced. Furthermore, since the derived aspect rank is not high and the setting conditions for the pre-change flag are limited to some extent, the change destination flag is not set on, and the change information for which the pre-change flag is set on is handled. Even if the variable display is exhausted (the variable display is performed while the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the execution compatible area 462), the game can be played without causing any discomfort.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a fluctuating display (fluctuation information) that may cause a jackpot state, the pre-change flag is not set to on (the pending effect counter is set to "4"). ) is configured so that there is no That is, for example, although the prefetch pending icon 472 that had been derived in response to a predetermined variable display was changed to correspond to a later variable display, the prefetch pending icon 472 was initially The credibility of the look-ahead hold icon 472 is determined, such as when a jackpot state occurs in the predetermined variable display that has been derived (furthermore, a jackpot state does not occur in the change display corresponding to the changed look-ahead hold icon 472). There is a risk that it will drop significantly. In this regard, when setting the before-change flag, make sure that the change information before the target of the look-ahead pending icon 472 is changed will not be won in the lottery ("lost"). Therefore, the above concerns can be dispelled.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the fluctuation display is "off", the pre-change flag is not set on in response to the last four fluctuation displays (fluctuation information) in the variable probability mode ( () is configured so that "4" is never set in the pending performance counter. In other words, although the player would like the prefetch pending icon 472 to be displayed in correspondence with the fixed variable mode, the prefetch pending icon 472 moves from within the variable variable mode range to outside the range (normal mode). It is possible to avoid a significant drop in interest due to the development of a regrettable performance in which the player ends up with a ``death'' effect.

As shown in FIG. 57, when "6" is set for the hold effect counter (the first exchange flag is set on) in response to the predetermined fluctuation information stored in the hold information storage area, After that, when "7" is set for the hold effect counter (the second exchange flag is set on) in response to the change information newly stored in the hold information storage area, at the timing of the next shift. , an effect (hold exchange effect) in which the pre-read pending icon 472 corresponding to the variation information of the pending effect counter "6" and the pre-read pending icon 472 corresponding to the variable information of the pending effect counter "7" are swapped. ing. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the presentation regarding the hold icon 471.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the prefetch pending icon 472 increases in the pending display area 461 is based on the fact that the variable display is suspended (the sub-control device 262 receives the preceding command). The only thing that matters is the timing. Therefore, by limiting the timing at which the prefetch pending icon 472 is newly derived, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived. Therefore, for example, in a state where only the default hold icon 471 is displayed, the predetermined hold icon 471 suddenly changes to the look-ahead hold icon 472 even though it is not the timing for the hold icon 471 to increase. Compared to a configuration where this occurs, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the performance using the hold icon 471 becomes confusing and difficult to understand (difficult for players to follow). Further, if the number of pending icons 471 does not increase, the number of pre-read pending icons 472 will not increase, so the player's motivation to increase the number of pending icons 471 (to start winning) can be further improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing a prefetch target change effect (pre-hold movement effect, post-hold movement effect, hold exchange effect) that changes the variable display targeted by the prefetch hold icon 472, in the hold display area 461, the prefetch It is configured to derive a "connection effect" that visualizes the process (in the middle) of changing the variable display targeted by the pending icon 472. In other words, the prefetch pending icon 472 is a combination of a character object 474 and a "treasure box" base object 473, and a display (animation) of the character object 474 moving to another "treasure box" is performed. , it is relatively easy to recognize that the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed.

For this reason, for example, the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 that had been derived in response to a predetermined variable display suddenly disappears, and the disappeared character object 474 is suddenly derived for another pending icon 471. In this case, there is a concern that the previous prefetch pending icon 472 and the subsequent prefetch pending icon 472 may be perceived as being independent (completely unrelated). In particular, there may be a slight time lag between when the character object 474 of the previous prefetch pending icon 472 is deleted and when the character object 474 is derived from the pending icon 471 that will later become the prefetch pending icon 472, or If the timing to delete the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 is later than the timing to derive the character object 474 to the pending icon 471 that will later become the prefetch pending icon 472 (there is a period in which the character object 474 is duplicated) ), such concerns are more pronounced.

On the other hand, by performing a connecting effect, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from the source pending icon 471 where the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed to the destination pending icon 471. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice that the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed.

In addition, the hold display area 461 where the hold icon 471 is displayed includes not only the hold corresponding area 463 where the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information for which the corresponding change display has not been performed is derived, but also the hold corresponding area 463 where the hold icon 471 is derived from the change information for which the corresponding change display has not been performed yet. An execution corresponding area 462 is provided from which a pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information that is currently being displayed is derived. Therefore, in the hold display area 461, for example, if the corresponding hold icon 471 is changed to the prefetch hold icon 472 (the character object 474 has moved) immediately before the corresponding variable display is executed, the player It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to confirm (actually cannot confirm). Furthermore, when displaying a variable (during a variable display), it is possible to check whether or not the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived in response to the variable display, and the mode (suggested content) of the prefetch pending icon 472. By combining the contents of the look-ahead pending icon 472 and the effect etc. during the fluctuating display, it is possible to make various guesses and enjoy the fluctuating display even more.

In addition, apart from the hold icon 471 displayed in the hold display area 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42, no production is performed, and the first variable display simply shows the first variable display and the first variable display that teaches the number of holds in the second variable display. A hold display device 46a and a second hold display device 46b are provided. Therefore, even if various effects are performed in the hold display area 461 and a situation occurs where the correspondence between the hold icon 471 and the held variable display becomes somewhat difficult to understand, the first hold display device 46a, Further, it is possible to reliably know whether or not the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is suspended by the second suspension display device 46b. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom and performance of presentation regarding the hold icon 471 in the hold display area 461.

(Second embodiment)
The second embodiment will be described below. In the second embodiment, in a state where the prefetch pending icon 472 with the character object 474 is already displayed in the pending display area 461, it is determined that the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in response to a newly suspended variable display. If so, it is configured to determine whether or not to derive the prefetch pending icon 472, depending on the interval with the previously displayed prefetch pending icon 472. In other words, even if it is decided to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 in response to a newly suspended variable display, the prefetch pending icon 472 cannot be immediately changed to (the pending icon corresponding to the newly suspended variable display). As for 471, there is a case where the data is not derived for the time being (it is put on standby). Below, we will mainly explain the characteristic parts.

Note that the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so the explanation thereof will be omitted and will be explained using the same member names and numbers. Further, in the second embodiment, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b constitute variable display means, and the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes effect display means.

Here, the hold icon setting process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In the second embodiment, steps S4104 and S4106 to S4109 of the pending information storage process (FIG. 35) are omitted.

First, in step S7101, the values of various counters related to the hold effect (hold icon 471), which will be described in detail later, are obtained, and the counter values are stored in the hold area where the fluctuation information is newly stored (new storage hold area) out of the hold information storage area. ). In addition, among the values of various counters related to the hold effect (hold icon 471) and information such as various flags described below, those stored in the hold information storage area together with the corresponding fluctuation information are subject to data shift in the hold information storage area. It is shifted along with the variation information in processing. Hereinafter, the information regarding the pending performance stored in the pending information storage area will be explained as information included in the variation information, that is, variation information.

In the following step S7102, it is determined whether the fluctuation information held in the new storage holding area corresponds to a "jackpot". If a negative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is set on.

The proxy request flag is set to ON when it has been decided to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 (the right has been granted) in response to predetermined variation information, but the icon has not yet been derived. Furthermore, if the predetermined fluctuation information corresponds to a "jackpot", the "winning proxy request flag" is set to ON, and if the predetermined fluctuation information corresponds to a "loss", the "losing proxy request flag" is set to on. " is set to on. Further, the proxy request flag is provided separately from the pending information storage area. In this embodiment, the proxy request flag constitutes a standby state storage means, and the process of setting the proxy request flag on corresponds to the standby state storage process.

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, it is determined in step S7104 whether or not a proxy flag is set on in any of the reservation areas in the reservation information storage area.

The proxy flag is provided in each pending area of the pending information storage area, and when the data in the pending information storage area is shifted, the setting state of the proxy flag is also shifted in the same way. Although it was decided (the right was granted) to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 in response to the predetermined variation information, the prefetch pending icon 472 was not derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined variation information; As the hold icon 471 for information (change information held after the predetermined change information), if the information is to be derived, the proxy flag of the hold area in which the other change information is stored is turned on. It is now set. This makes it possible to determine that the pending icon 471 corresponding to the other variation information is deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the predetermined variation information by proxy.

In addition, in step S7104, a proxy check flag is provided that is set to ON when the proxy flag is set to ON, so that it is not necessary to check the proxy flags of all the holding areas in which fluctuation information is stored. Good too.

When a negative determination is made in step S7104, in step S7105, a pending pre-reading effect lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to grant the right to derive the pre-reading pending icon 472. More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 stores a pending pre-reading effect lottery counter (in this example, numbers 0 to 18) for determining whether to derive the pre-read pending icon 472 (grant the right) or not. A loop counter) and a pending pre-reading effect lottery table that stores the value of the pending pre-reading effect lottery counter that gives the right to derive the pre-reading pending icon 472 (winning) are provided.

The value of the pending pre-read effect lottery counter is acquired in the above step S7101 and is stored in the new storage pending area. As for the hold look-ahead effect lottery table, the fluctuation information stored in the new memory hold area is ``for when responding to a jackpot'', ``for responding to a reach that is outside the front or back'', and ``for responding to a reach other than outside the front or back''. There are three types: 1. As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation information stored in the new storage reservation area corresponds to a reach other than the front and rear outliers, the probability of reaching the relevant reach is slightly less than half (9/19). The right to derive the look-ahead pending icon 472 is granted, and in the case of a jackpot or a reach that is out of order, the probability of deriving the look-ahead pending icon 472 is considerably higher (16/19) than in the case of a reach other than the end or end. Derivation rights are now granted.

After step S7105, in step S7106, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the pending pre-reading effect lottery process (whether or not the right to derive the pre-reading pending icon 472 has been granted).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7106, it is determined in step S7107 whether or not a character flag is set on in any of the reservation areas in the reservation information storage area.

Character flags are provided in each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, and when data in the pending information storage area is shifted, the setting state of the character flag is also shifted in the same way. . When the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in response to predetermined variation information, the character flag of the pending area in which the predetermined variation information is stored is set to on. This makes it possible to determine that the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived in response to the predetermined variation information.

In addition, in step S7107, the character check flag that is set to on when the character flag is set to on is stored in the pending information so that it is not necessary to check the character flags of all the pending areas in which variation information is stored. It may be provided separately from the area.

If a negative determination is made in step S7107, that is, the prefetch pending icon 472 is not derived in the pending display area 461 (and, as described above, the proxy request flag is not set on, and the pending information If there is no holding area in the storage area with the substitute flag turned on, the character flag of the new storage holding area is set to ON in step S7108.

In step S7109, character pattern setting processing is performed to set the type of prefetch pending icon 472 (pattern of character object 474). That is, based on the value of the character determination counter acquired in the above step S7101 and stored in the new storage reservation area, a character determination table (for example, a character determination table for storing the correspondence between the value and the character pattern) A character pattern is determined by referring to the following (one for a missed reach and another for other misses), and its contents are stored in the new storage reservation area. It should be noted that the character pattern information is also shifted together with other variable information by data shift processing of the pending information storage area.

In step S7110, the pending variation display is checked against the preceding position counter indicating where in the execution area or the pending area of the pending information storage area the variable information including the information for which the character flag is set to on exists. Set the value of the fluctuation pending counter Nd that indicates the number of changes. The preceding position counter is configured to take a value of "-1 to 8", with "0" indicating that it is in the execution area, and "1 to 8" indicating that it is in each pending area. "-1" indicates that it does not exist.

Furthermore, in step S7111, the variation information (the execution area or the holding area where the character flag is stored) including the information in which the character flag is set to ON, and the predetermined variation information that has been put on hold after that (the holding area where the is stored) "1" is set in a first interval counter serving as a first interval storage means for grasping the interval (first interval) between. The first interval counter is configured to take a value from 0 to 7, where 1 to 7 indicates that there is a corresponding interval, and 0 indicates that the character flag is set on. Indicates that the variation information containing the information no longer exists.

Thereafter, in the hold icon display process in step S7136, based on the fact that the character flag of the new storage hold area is set to ON, the hold corresponding area 463 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the new storage hold area is displayed in step S7109. After performing the process of displaying the prefetch pending icon 472 of the pattern determined in , this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7107, that is, if the pre-read pending icon 472 has already been derived in the pending display area 461, in step S7112, whether or not to exercise the right to derive the pre-read pending icon 472 is determined. The first appearance lottery process is performed. In other words, if the pre-read pending icon 472 has not been derived in the pending display area 461 or is not scheduled to be derived, the right to derive the pre-read pending icon 472 is exercised unconditionally as described in step S7108 and thereafter. On the other hand, if there are likely to be multiple prefetched pending icons 472 derived in the pending display area 461, the right to derive the prefetched pending icons 472 is not granted unless a winner is won in the first appearance lottery process. The structure is such that it cannot be exercised.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the value of the first interval counter, that is, the hold area or execution of the hold information storage area (in which variation information is stored) corresponding to the prefetch hold icon 472 already derived in the hold display area 461 The configuration is such that the probability of exercising the right to derive the pre-reading pending icon 472 differs depending on the interval between the area and the new storage pending area.

More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 contains the appearance lottery counter (in this example, a loop counter from 0 to 9) and the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 (winning). An appearance lottery table that stores the value of an appearance lottery counter is provided. The value of the appearance lottery counter is acquired in the above step S7101 and is stored in the new storage reservation area. As the appearance lottery table, there are provided "for when the value of the first interval counter is 2", "for when it is 3", "for when it is 4", "for when it is 5", and "for when it is 6 or more". ing. As shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, when the value of the first interval counter is "2", the right is exercised with a probability of 1/10, and when the value of the first interval counter is "3", the right is exercised with a probability of 1/10. If the value of the first interval counter is "4", the right is exercised with a probability of 2/10, and if the value of the first interval counter is "5", the right is exercised with a probability of 5/10. In this case, the right is exercised with a probability of 6/10, and when the value of the first interval counter is "6 or more", the right is exercised with a probability of 9/10. Further, if the value of the first interval counter is "1", the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is not exercised. In other words, the shorter the interval with the preceding prefetch pending icon 472, the more difficult it is to derive the subsequent prefetch pending icon 472. Furthermore, if the value of the first interval counter is "0", that is, if the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 has already been consumed, the right will be exercised with a 100% probability. There is.

After step S7112, in step S7113, it is determined whether or not a winner has been won in the first appearance lottery process (whether or not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7113, that is, if the change information is stored in the new storage reservation area and it is decided at that stage to exercise the right to derive the prefetch reservation icon 472, the above step The process moves to S7108, and the character flag of the new storage reservation area is set to ON.

In the following step S7109, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined and stored. In this embodiment, the character flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area regardless of whether the prefetch reservation icon 472 is already displayed in the reservation display area 461 or not. In some cases, a common character determination table is referred to, but the selection rate of the character to be selected may be determined by referring to a different table, or Based on the information on the prefetch pending icon 472, for example, a character pattern may be determined so as not to overlap with the prefetch pending icon 472.

Furthermore, in step S7110, the value of the fluctuation pending counter Nd is set in the preceding position counter. Here, since the value that was set corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 that was already displayed in advance is set in the preceding position counter, it is as if it is overwritten. Additionally, in step S7111, "1" is set (overwritten) in the first interval counter.

Thereafter, in the hold icon display process in step S7136, based on the fact that the character flag of the new storage hold area is set to ON, the hold corresponding area 463 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the new storage hold area is displayed in step S7109. After performing the process of displaying the prefetch pending icon 472 of the pattern determined in , this process ends. That is, if the determination in step S7113 is affirmative, the character flags of a plurality of areas in the hold information storage area are set to ON, and the prefetch hold icons 472 are displayed in a plurality of areas in the hold display area 461.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7113, the return flag of the new storage reservation area is set to ON in step S7114.

The return flag is provided in each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, and when the data in the pending information storage area is shifted, the setting state of the return flag is also shifted in the same way. . Then, when the change information is newly stored in the hold area (new storage hold area), it was decided to derive the prefetch hold icon 472 in response to the change information (although the right was granted). As for the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information, when it is decided not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch hold icon 472, the return flag of the new storage hold area is set to ON. .

In the subsequent step S7115, the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is set to ON. In other words, when the fluctuation information is stored in the new storage reservation area, although the right to derive the prefetch reservation icon 472 is obtained, the right to derive the prefetch reservation icon 471 corresponding to the fluctuation information is not allowed. (to exercise the right), the winning proxy request flag or The outgoing proxy request flag is set to on.

In the subsequent step S7116, a character pattern setting process is performed to set the type of prefetch pending icon 472 (pattern of character object 474). In other words, even if the prefetch pending icon 472 is not derived immediately, the character is stored based on the value of the character determination counter stored in the new storage pending area and the correspondence relationship between that value and the character pattern. A character pattern is determined by referring to a determination table (for example, one for a hit, one for a near-miss reach, and one for other misses), and its contents are stored in a new storage reservation area. Further, the character determination table referred to in step S7116 is different from the one referred to in step S7109, and the character object 474 does not overlap with the preceding prefetch pending icon 472, or It is difficult to cover. Furthermore, for example, by referring to the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472, the configuration may be such that the character never overlaps, or the configuration may be configured such that a character with a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to be selected. .

Furthermore, in step S7117, the fluctuation information including the information for which the return flag is set to ON (the execution area or the holding area in which is stored) and the predetermined fluctuation information held after that (in the holding area in which it is stored) ) is set to "1" in a second interval counter serving as a second interval storage means for grasping the interval (second interval). Note that the second interval counter is configured to take a value of "0 to 7", "1 to 7" indicates that there is a corresponding interval, and "0" causes the prefetch pending icon 472 to be derived. The variation information to which the right has been granted (the hold corresponding area 463 or the execution corresponding area 462 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the hold area or execution area in which it is stored) and the prefetch hold icon 472 derived based on the right. This indicates that the derived position (the hold corresponding area 463 or the execution corresponding area 462 of the hold display area 461) matches.

In the subsequent step S7118, the value of the variable pending counter Nd is set for the return position counter indicating which area of the pending area and the execution area of the pending information storage area is where the return flag is set to ON. The return position counter is configured to take a value of "-1 to 8", with "0" indicating that it is in the execution area, and "1 to 8" indicating that it is in each holding area. "-1" indicates that it does not exist.

After step S7118, in the hold icon display process of step S7136, based on the return flag of the new storage hold area being set on, the hold corresponding area 463 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the new storage hold area is , after performing processing to display the default hold icon 471, this processing ends.

In this embodiment, each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area takes a value of "0 to 3", and the hold as a derivation status storage means indicates the derivation status of the prefetch hold icon 472 depending on the value. A performance counter is provided. That is, in this embodiment, the character flag, the substitute flag, and the return flag are not provided individually, but by setting the value of the pending effect counter to "1", it is indicated that the character flag is on. Setting the value of the pending performance counter to "2" indicates that the return flag is on, and setting the value of the pending performance counter to "3" indicates that the substitute flag is on. Further, by setting the value of the pending performance counter to "0", it is shown that these flags are all turned off.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, that is, the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 has not been exercised, and the state waits for the appearance of variation information to instead derive the prefetch pending icon 472 based on the right. If the winning proxy request flag or losing proxy request flag indicating that the proxy is in a state of A second appearance lottery process is performed to determine the result.

The second appearance lottery process in step S7119 is basically the same as the first appearance lottery process in step S12, and the appearance lottery table to be referred to is determined based on the value of the first interval counter, and the appearance lottery table is determined based on the value of the first interval counter. Based on the value of the lottery counter, the reservation corresponding area 463 of the reservation display area 461 corresponding to the new storage reservation area is stored and exists in the reservation information storage area earlier than the relevant fluctuation information, and the pre-read reservation icon 472 The prefetch pending icon 472 for the variation information (variation information for which the return flag is set to ON) that is granted the right to be derived correspondingly is made to correspond to the variation information in the new storage reservation area ( This is a process of determining whether or not to derive by proxy (as if the pre-reading pending icon 472 had just been suspended).

After step S7119, in step S7120, it is determined whether or not the player has won in the second appearance lottery process. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7120, the proxy flag for the new storage reservation area is set on in step S7121.

In the subsequent step S7122, the position of the prefetch hold icon 472 (proxy hold icon) derived by the proxy (the hold area of the hold information storage area where the fluctuation information whose proxy is responsible for deriving the prefetch hold icon 472 is stored) is determined. The value of the variable pending counter Nd is set for the trailing position counter indicating the available information). Note that the trailing position counter is configured to take a value of "0 to 8", with "0" indicating that it is in the execution area, and "1 to 8" indicating that it is in each pending area.

In the subsequent step S7123, the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag that is set on in the reservation area where the return flag is set on is turned off.

In the subsequent step S7124, the information in the form of the prefetch pending icon 472 (character pattern information, already determined in step S7116) stored in the pending area where the return flag is set to ON is moved to the new storage pending area. (copy the character pattern information to the new storage reservation area and erase the character pattern information in the original reservation area).

Thereafter, in step S7125, a scenario lottery process (specific performance lottery process) is performed to determine whether or not to perform a scenario performance as a specific performance that causes the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 to behave in a complex manner. More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 stores a scenario lottery counter for determining whether or not to perform a scenario performance, and a scenario lottery counter value that indicates that the scenario performance will be performed (winning). A scenario lottery table is also provided. For example, if the fluctuation information stored in the hold area where the return flag is set to on corresponds to a jackpot, there is a 60% chance of winning, and if it corresponds to a hit that is out of reach, there is a 30% chance. It may be configured such that if the player wins with a win, and if it corresponds to the reach other than the front or back, the player does not win.

However, in the scenario performance of this embodiment, the character object 474 of the preceding pre-reading pending icon 472 and the character object 474 of the subsequent substitute pre-reading pending icon 472 are displayed in a linked manner. Therefore, when drawing a scenario, first confirm that the first interval counter is not "0" (the preceding position counter is not "-1"), and then draw the scenario (there must be a preceding character). In this case, scenario lottery will not be conducted).

After step S7125, in step S7126, it is determined whether the scenario lottery has been won. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7126, a scenario pattern setting process is performed in step S7127 as a specific performance lottery process in which a scenario pattern is determined and its contents are stored. More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 includes a scenario pattern determination counter for determining a scenario pattern, and a scenario pattern determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the scenario pattern determination counter and the scenario pattern. is provided.

In the scenario performance of this embodiment, a plurality of character objects 474 including the previous character object 474 and the subsequent character object 474 collaborate to perform the performance, and the scenario performance is stored in a holding area where the return flag has been set to on. The purpose is to increase the expectation of a jackpot for the pending icon 471 (pre-read pending icon 472) corresponding to the fluctuating information. For example, as shown in FIGS. 68(b) to 68(f), in this embodiment, five patterns are set as scenario effects for the behavior of the character object 474. Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 68(b) is a pattern in which one of the earlier character object 474 and the later character object 474 hands a present to the other (in the figure, the earlier character object 474 to the later character object). be. Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 68(c) is a pattern in which the earlier character object 474 and the later character object 474 fight, and the winner remains. Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 68(d) is a pattern in which one of the first character object 474 and the second character object 474 places the other on the shoulder. Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 68(e) is a pattern in which the number of character objects 474 increases by one, and three people hold hands with the previous character object 474 and the subsequent character object 474. Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 68(f) is a pattern in which the number of character objects 474 increases by one, and the previous character object 474 and the subsequent character object 474 place the character object 474 that has appeared on their shoulders.

Further, as will be described in detail later, triggers for starting a scenario include when the second interval counter becomes "0" and when the preceding position counter becomes "0". Accordingly, for the introduction part of the scenario, the pattern in Figure 68 (a-1) corresponding to the case where the second interval counter becomes "0" and the pattern corresponding to the case when the preceding position counter becomes "0" There is a pattern shown in FIG. 68(a-1).

Further, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with first to fifth scenario flags indicating scenario patterns to be executed. Then, in step S7128 following step S7127, the scenario flag corresponding to the scenario pattern determined based on the value of the scenario pattern determination counter is set on with reference to the scenario pattern determination table, as described above.

Incidentally, when the fourth scenario flag and the fifth scenario flag are set to ON, a special display setting may be made for the decorative pattern display device 42. For example, when the fourth scenario flag is set on, mutually related effect displays are intentionally derived in a plurality of consecutive variable displays on the decorative pattern display device 42 (so-called "continuous notice" is performed). Good too. In other words, a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice will be derived is provided for each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, and in the case shown in FIG. 68(e), It may be configured such that the display mode of continuous notices is derived when the continuous notice flags of the second to fourth holding areas are set on and the corresponding variable display is derived. When the pending look-ahead effect is performed, it becomes possible to understand that continuous notices will occur and from where to where the changes will be made in response to the display. In addition, each time the variable display of continuous previews is completed, the corresponding prefetch pending icon 472 (as well as the accompanying character object 474) is deleted.

For example, when the fifth scenario flag is set to on, a display effect in which a plurality of consecutive variable displays in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42 are combined into one (combined variable display effect) is created. will be held. For example, a fifth scenario flag is set on for each reservation area and execution area in the reservation information storage area, and a combination fluctuation flag is provided that is turned on when it is determined that a combination fluctuation display effect is to be derived. More specifically, in the case shown in FIG. 68(f), the combined fluctuation flags of the second to fourth holding areas are set to ON, and the holding display area 461 is arranged so as to straddle the three holding corresponding areas 463. A prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed.

In addition, in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42, a series of combined variable display performances are performed using the corresponding three variable display times (for example, 4 seconds + 4 seconds + 10 seconds, a total of 18 seconds). In the combined variable display effect, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size or is erased, and basically, effects other than the decorative pattern (such as a moving image) are not stopped and displayed in the middle. However, there may be cases where the video appears to be stopped at a scene for adjustment to lengthen or shorten the video of the combined fluctuation display performance in accordance with the total fluctuation time.

Further, the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed as usual. In other words, if the special display devices 43a, 43b are viewed by a player who understands the correspondence between the stop mode of the special display devices 43a, 43b and whether or not there will be a jackpot, etc., the combined fluctuation display performance will be supported. It is possible to grasp which of the plurality of fluctuating displays has hit the jackpot.

In addition, the look-ahead pending icon 472 that spans multiple pending areas 463 is such that when the fifth scenario flag is set to on, even if the variation information for which the combined variation flag is set to on is digested, The basic aspect does not change; for example, in FIG. 68(f), the three people continue to be displayed in the execution compatible area 462 without losing their physical shapes. However, the prefetch pending icon 472 may perform some kind of action, or the color, shape of details, etc. may be deformed to enliven the performance. Incidentally, when the pending prefetch effect is performed, the execution compatible area 462 expands to accommodate the large prefetch pending icon 472 that has been shifted to the execution compatible area 462. In addition, when the look-ahead pending icon 472 spanning multiple pending areas 463 is shifted to the execution compatible area 462, the appearance changes (for example, in the pending area 463, the robot (the jackpot expectation level is 90%, 70% , 50% of the robot) is derived, and in the execution corresponding area 462, an animation for completing the robot is derived).

Regarding "continuous notice," continuous notice is used not only when the fourth scenario flag is set to on, but also when storing pending information in the pending information storage area, to determine whether to perform continuous notice. A notice appropriateness determination table that obtains the value of a counter and a notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice, and is taken into consideration when deciding whether to give continuous notice according to the fluctuation information; It may also be configured to refer to a notice table that is taken into account when determining the form of continuous notices, and to perform this as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the pending pre-read effect performed in the pending display area 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the fourth scenario flag and the fifth scenario flag are set to on corresponds to the integrated pending pre-read effect.

After step S7128, or if a negative determination is made in step S7126, in the hold icon display process of step S7136, the new storage hold area is supported based on the fact that the proxy flag for the new storage hold area is set to on. After performing a process of displaying a prefetching pending icon 472 as a base corresponding pending prefetching effect of the pattern set in step S7124 in the pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7120, that is, if it is determined not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 in response to the newly stored variation information, the first The value of the interval counter is incremented by 1, and the value of the second interval counter is incremented by 1 in step S7130. In other words, since the proxy derivation of the look-ahead hold icon 472 was not performed even during this hold, the first interval between the hold area where the character flag is set to ON, and the hold area where the return flag is set to ON. The value of each interval counter is incremented by 1 in response to the second interval being widened by one hold.

After step S7130, in the hold icon display process of step S7136, the default hold icon 471 is displayed in the hold corresponding area 463 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the new storage hold area, and then this process is performed. finish.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7104, that is, if the proxy prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived, the process moves to the pending icon display process of step S7136, and the pending display area corresponding to the new storage pending area is After performing a process of displaying a default hold icon 471 in the hold compatible area 463 of 461, this process ends. In other words, in this embodiment, when the substitute pre-read pending icon 472 is displayed, the right to derive the pre-read pending icon 472 is not granted in response to the newly stored change information. There is.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S7106, that is, in the hold look-ahead effect lottery for granting the right to derive the look-ahead hold icon 472 in response to the newly held change information, the hold look-ahead effect lottery is unsuccessful. In this case, after incrementing the value of the first interval counter by 1 in step S7131, in the hold icon display process of step S7136, the default hold corresponding area 463 of the hold display area 461 corresponding to the new storage hold area is set. After performing the process of displaying the hold icon 471, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, if fluctuation information corresponding to a new jackpot is stored on hold, it is determined in step S7132 whether or not the losing proxy request flag is set on. If the determination in step S7132 is affirmative, the outgoing proxy request flag is turned off in step S7133. In the following step S7134, the return flag set to ON in any of the holding areas (first to eighth holding areas with numbers corresponding to the value of the return position counter) in the holding information storage area is turned off. After step S7134, the process proceeds to step S7105, and the pending look-ahead effect lottery is performed.

In other words, basically, in a state where the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is set to ON, an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, so this is performed when a negative determination is made in step S7103. The pending look-ahead effect lottery in step S7105, which is a possibility, is not performed. However, if fluctuation information corresponding to a new jackpot is stored and the losing proxy request flag is set on, the hold look-ahead effect will be given priority to the newly stored fluctuation display. In order to do this, steps S7133 and S7134 are performed to provide the possibility of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 in response to the newly stored change information. Note that this embodiment is configured so that the proxy request flag and the proxy flag are never set on at the same time.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7132, it is determined in step S7135 whether or not the winning proxy request flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if the fluctuating display corresponding to the jackpot has already been stored on hold and furthermore, the look-ahead pending icon 472 is also scheduled to be derived, the newly stored fluctuating display will be Even if it corresponds to a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S7119 without performing the pending look-ahead effect lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if both the winning proxy request flag and the losing proxy request flag are off, the process moves to step S7104. In this embodiment, even if the newly stored fluctuation information corresponds to a jackpot, if it is determined in step S7104 that there is a reservation area in which the proxy flag has already been set to ON, Although the configuration is such that the process proceeds to step S7136 without performing the hold look-ahead effect lottery, for example, it is configured so that the hold look-ahead effect lottery is performed (for example, a plurality of hold effect counters are provided in each hold area, etc.). You may.

Next, the pending icon shift process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. Note that in the second embodiment, steps S4204 and S4205 of the hold processing (FIG. 36) are omitted.

First, in step S7201, it is determined whether the value of the preceding position counter is "0" or not. That is, in the previous shift process, the variation information corresponding to the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 was shifted to the execution area of the pending information storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not such fluctuation information is to be deleted in the current shift process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, that is, if the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 has already been consumed and does not exist, the first interval counter is set to "0" in step S7202.

After step S7202, or if a negative determination is made in step S7201, in step S7203, the value of the preceding position counter, the value of the following position counter, and the value of the return position counter are each subtracted by 1.

In the subsequent step S7204, it is determined whether the return flag of the execution area is set to on (for example, after the return flag is turned off in step S7134 of the pending icon setting process, the value of the return position counter is set to "-1"). (If the configuration is such that the setting process is performed, it can be replaced by determining whether the value of the return position counter is "0" or not).

If a negative determination is made in step S7204, that is, if the return flag of the execution area is off, in step S7205, (if the trailing position counter has a value of 1 or more, check the holding area indicated by that value. and) determines whether there is a pending area in which the proxy flag is set to on in the pending information storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7205, it is determined in step S7206 whether or not the value of the preceding position counter is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7206, that is, if the change information corresponding to the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is shifted to the execution area of the pending information storage area in the current shift process, the scenario It is determined whether a flag (any of the first to fifth scenario flags) is set to on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7207, a scenario start flag indicating that the scenario is being produced is set on in step S7208.

In the following step S7209, scenario effect setting processing is performed. In the scenario production setting process, the preceding character object 474 of the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is set based on the character pattern information stored in the execution area or pending area indicated by the preceding position counter, and the pending area indicated by the subsequent position counter. The trailing character object 474 of the look-ahead suspension icon 472 based on the stored character pattern information is set to the scenario flag in the suspension corresponding area 463 of the suspension display area 461 corresponding to the suspension area indicated by the return position counter. Configure scenario display settings to take the form corresponding to the type.

Furthermore, in the scenario production setting process, after setting the scenario display, the character pattern flag of the execution area or holding area indicated by the preceding position counter is turned off, the substitute flag of the holding area indicated by the following position counter is turned off, and the character pattern flag of the holding area indicated by the following position counter is turned off. Turn off the return flag of the holding area indicated by the position counter, turn on the character flag of the holding area indicated by the return position counter, and transfer the character pattern information stored in the holding area indicated by the trailing position counter to the return position. Performs processing associated with the scenario performance, such as moving to the holding area indicated by the counter.

After step S7209, the scenario flag is turned off in step S7210, and then the process moves to step S7211.

In step S7211, the pending icon 471 is redrawn (pending redrawing process). However, if the scenario start flag is set to on, the scenario effect setting process is performed instead of displaying the prefetch pending icon 472 as is based on the character pattern information stored in the pending area indicated by the return position counter. The scenario effect set in is displayed with priority (display of the prefetch pending icon 472 is put on standby).

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7206, or if a negative determination is made in step S7207, in step S7212, the prefetch pending icon 472 (substitute character object 474 ) is approached to the reservation corresponding area 463 side corresponding to the reservation area in which the return flag is set to ON or not.

More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 includes an approach lottery counter (in this example, a loop counter from 0 to 39) for determining whether or not to move the substitute character object 474 closer to its original display position. , and an approach lottery table that stores the value of an approach lottery counter that results in an approach (winning). The value of the approach lottery counter is acquired in step S7101 above, and is stored in the new storage reservation area at that time. The approach lottery table is a "win/scenario" table that is referred to when a scenario is performed and when the change information of the holding area where the return flag is set to on corresponds to a jackpot (even if the scenario is not performed). There are two types: one for "time use" and another for "off time," and multiple tables are prepared for each.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), if the first to fifth scenario flags are set on, or if the return flag (indicated by the return position counter) is stored in the holding area where the return flag is set on, In the case where the fluctuation information corresponds to a "jackpot" and the first interval is "2 frames", the value of the approach lottery counter corresponding to the win is "0 to 7", and the probability is 20%. to be elected. Also, if the first interval is "3 frames", there is a 20% probability of winning, if the first interval is "4 frames", there is a 20% probability of winning, and if the first interval is "5 frames", there is a 20% probability of winning. If the first interval is "6 frames or more", there is a 50% probability of winning; if the first interval is "0 frames" (the preceding character object 474 has already been 80% chance of winning.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the fluctuation information stored in the holding area where the return flag (indicated by the return position counter) is set to ON is "out of place" where the scenario effect is not derived. In the corresponding case, if the first interval is "2 frames", there will be no winnings at all. Also, if the first interval is "3 frames", there is a 5% probability of winning, if the first interval is "4 frames", there is a 5% probability of winning, and if the first interval is "5 frames", there is a 5% probability of winning. If the first interval is "6 frames or more", there is a 20% probability of winning; if the first interval is "0 frames" (the preceding character object 474 has already been If there is no such item), there is a 50% chance of winning.

As described above, the shorter the interval between the preceding pre-read pending icon 472 and the substitute pre-read pending icon 472, the harder it is to win in the close lottery, and the harder it is to close the gap. In addition, if the value of the first interval counter is "0", that is, if the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 has already been consumed, there is a relatively high probability of winning in the close lottery. ing. Furthermore, when a scenario performance is performed or when a jackpot is to be won, it is relatively easier to win in a close lottery than when dealing with other losses.

After step S7212, in step S7213, it is determined whether or not the player has won in the proximity lottery. If a negative determination is made in step S7213, the process moves to step S7211, where the pending redrawing process is performed, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7213, that is, if it is determined to move the substitute character object 474 (pre-read pending icon 472) one block to the left in the pending display area 461, in step S7214, the following Shifts the setting state of the substitute flag stored in the holding area indicated by the position counter to the next (lower number) holding area (turns off the substitute flag of the holding area, and shifts the setting state of the substitute flag stored in the holding area indicated by the position counter ).

In subsequent step S7215, as the proxy flag is shifted, the character pattern information stored in the reservation area where the proxy flag was turned on is also shifted to the next reservation area.

In addition, in step S7216, the holding area or execution area where the character flag is turned on (preceding look-ahead hold icon 472, character object 474) and the hold area where the substitute flag is turned on (following look-ahead hold icon 472, The first interval counter and the second The value of each interval counter is subtracted by 1.

Furthermore, in step S7217, the value of the trailing position counter is subtracted by 1 as the proxy flag is shifted.

In step S7218, it is determined whether the value of the second interval counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S7218, the process moves to step S7211, where the pending redrawing process is performed, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7218 is affirmative, that is, the proxy flag set to ON is shifted to the holding area where the return flag is set to ON (both the return flag and the proxy flag are set to ON in the predetermined holding area). , a prefetched hold icon 472 to which a right derived based on predetermined change information is granted is displayed in a hold corresponding area 463 corresponding to the hold area in which the predetermined change information is stored in the hold display area 461. If so, in step S7219, the return flag of the reservation area indicated by the return position counter is turned off.

Furthermore, in step S7220, the proxy flag of the reservation area indicated by the proxy position counter is turned off.

Additionally, in step S7221, the character flag of the reservation area indicated by the return position counter is set to ON.

After step S7221, in step S7222, it is determined whether any of the first to fifth scenario flags is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7222, the process proceeds to step S7208, and processing for starting scenario production is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the scenario production is started is when the variable information including the information in which the character flag corresponding to the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is set to on is shifted to the execution area (the preceding character object 474 is shifted to the execution compatible area), and there are cases where variation information including information for which the feedback flag is set to on is shifted to the execution area.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7222, a character movement flag indicating that a character movement display for moving the substitute character object 474 is to be performed is set on in step S7223. Furthermore, in step S7224, character movement setting processing is performed. In other words, the character object 474 (surrogate character object 474) corresponding to the character pattern information stored in the reservation area indicated by the trailing position counter is displayed in the reservation area indicated by the trailing position counter in the reservation display area 461. The next pending area (at this time, the pending information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, but the display of the pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461 has not been shifted yet, so A setting is made to perform a display such as moving from the proxy pre-reading hold icon 472 (a proxy pre-read hold icon 472 is displayed at a position corresponding to the subsequent hold area) to the hold area indicated by the subsequent position counter.

Thereafter, the process moves to step S7211, where the pending redrawing process is performed, and then the process ends. However, if the character movement flag is turned on, the character movement display is performed, and then the pre-read pending icons 472 in the pending information storage area are redrawn (the pending icons 471 are shifted one frame to the left). , redrawing of the hold icons 471 other than deriving the prefetch hold icon 472 to a specified position is performed, such as reducing the number of hold icons 471 by one).

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7204, that is, if the variation information including the set return flag has been shifted to the execution area, in step S7225, the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is is set to on. Incidentally, a situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S7204 is that the right to derive a predetermined prefetch pending icon 472 is granted based on the predetermined variation information, but even if the predetermined variation display is shifted to the execution area. , the predetermined pre-read pending icon 472 has not yet been derived for the position corresponding to the predetermined variation information in the pending display area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7225, the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag that is set on is turned off in step S7226. Thereafter, the process moves to step S7211, where the pending redrawing process is performed, and then the process ends. In other words, this is a case where variable information including information for which the return flag is set to ON has been shifted to the execution area, and the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 has not yet been exercised (the proxy character object 474 has not been derived). In this case, the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is not exercised.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7225, that is, if any of the proxy flags in the hold area is set on, in step S7227, the proxy flag in the hold display area 461 is set on. A consequential display indicating that a "conclusive display" is to be performed in which the prefetch pending icon 472 (surrogate character object 474) derived at the position corresponding to the variable information is moved to the position corresponding to the variable information for which the return flag is turned on. Set flag on.

In step S7228, consistent display setting processing is performed. In other words, the character object 474 (substitute character object 474) corresponding to the character pattern information stored in the holding area indicated by the trailing position counter is moved from the holding area indicated by the trailing position counter in the holding display area 461. , settings are made to display the movement to the holding area (in this case, the execution area) indicated by the return position counter.

Thereafter, in step S7229, the substitute flag of the holding area indicated by the trailing position counter is turned off, and in step S7230, the return flag of the holding area (in this case, the execution area) indicated by the return position counter is turned off, and in step S7231, Turn on character flag.

Thereafter, the process moves to step S7211, where the pending redrawing process is performed, and then the process ends. However, if the consistent display flag is turned on, after the consistent display is performed, the pre-read pending icons 472 in the pending information storage area are redrawn (shift the pending icons 471 to the left one frame at a time, Redrawing of the hold icons 471 other than deriving the prefetch hold icon 472 to a specified position, such as reducing the number of hold icons 471 by one, is performed.

Note that in this embodiment, the return flag, return flag, and proxy flag are not provided individually, but take values from "0 to 3", and "1" indicates that the character flag is on. A pending performance counter is provided in which "2" indicates that the return flag is on, "3" indicates that the proxy flag is on, and "0" indicates that all of these flags are off. Therefore, in the hold icon shift process, for convenience, in step S7219, step S7220, and step S7230, in addition to the process of turning on the character flag, the process of turning off the return flag or substitute flag is performed for the same hold area or execution area. Although this process is supposed to be performed, it is not necessary if the character flag is turned on.

Next, the transition of the pending display area 461 accompanying the data shift process of the pending information storage area will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 67. In addition, FIGS. 63 to 67 show the correspondence between each execution area of the reservation information storage area and the reservation effect counter of the reservation area, and the reservation icon 471 of each execution corresponding area 462 and reservation corresponding area 463 of the reservation display area 461. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the values of the holding effect counters in the execution area of the holding information storage area, the first, second and fourth holding areas are "0", and the value of the holding effect counter in the third holding area is "0". The value is "1 (character flag on)". Then, as the change information was newly stored in a hold in the fifth hold area, a hold look-ahead effect lottery (see step S7105) was held, and the winner was won in the first appearance lottery process. If it is decided to wait for the derivation of the prefetch hold icon 472 (wait for the fluctuation information to be derived by proxy) without doing so, "2" is set in the hold effect counter of the fifth hold area (return flag is turned on). Ru. Further, if the fluctuation information newly stored in the fifth reservation area corresponds to a jackpot, a win proxy request flag provided separately from the reservation information storage area is set to ON.

In addition, the value of the preceding position counter indicating the position of the holding area and execution area in which the variation information for which the look-ahead holding icon 472 is already displayed is "3", and the return flag is set to on. The return position counter that indicates the position of the holding area and execution area in which you are is set to ``5'', which is the same as the number of held holding information (the number of the holding area that is the new storage holding area and the return flag is set to ON). Set.

It should be noted that a holding area or an execution area in which variation information corresponding to the preceding look-ahead hold icon 472 is stored, and a holding area or execution area in which change information corresponding to the subsequent look-ahead hold icon 472 is stored (the proxy flag is set on) ) As for the first interval counter indicating the interval from the holding area, counting starts at the stage when the fluctuation information corresponding to the preceding look-ahead holding icon 472 is stored (the character flag is set on). Regarding FIG. 63(a), "2" is set before the fluctuation information is stored in the fifth reservation area and at the stage of performing the storage reservation icon setting process, and at the stage of finishing the reservation icon setting process. ``1'' is added to make ``3''.

Furthermore, a second interval counter indicating the interval between the holding area where the return flag is set to on (holding effect counter = 2) and the holding area where the proxy flag is set to on (holding effect counter = 3); , the count starts when the feedback flag is turned on. Regarding FIG. 63(a), "1" is set at the stage of finishing the pending icon setting process for storing the fluctuation information in the fifth pending area.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63(b), a default hold icon 471 is displayed in the execution compatible area 462, first, second, fourth, and fifth hold compatible areas 463 of the hold display area 461, and A prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the corresponding area 463. In this embodiment, when the return flag is set to on, the pre-reading hold icon 472 is ultimately derived as much as possible in the position corresponding to the fluctuation information for which the return flag is set to on in the hold display area 461. However, as long as the return flag is set to on, the prefetch pending icon 472 is not displayed at the corresponding position.

Next, FIG. 64 shows that from the state of FIG. 63, one piece of variation information is digested (data shift processing is performed once), two pieces of variation information are newly stored and stored, and the newer one of them is handled. This shows a state in which the player has won in the second appearance lottery process (step S7119). In other words, "3" is set in the hold effect counter of the sixth hold area (the proxy flag is turned on), and in conjunction with this, the winning proxy request flag is turned off.

Further, by deriving the substitute look-ahead pending icon 472, the first interval and the second interval are determined, and the process of incrementing the first interval counter and the second interval counter is no longer performed. Incidentally, the value of the preceding position counter is "2", the value of the return position counter is "4", and the value of the following position counter is "6". The value of the first interval counter indicating the first interval is "4", and the value of the second interval counter indicating the second interval is "2".

In this embodiment, when the first interval is "4", the probability of winning in the appearance lottery is 50%, but when the first interval is less than "4", if the first interval is "3", the probability of winning is 50%. 20%, 10% when the first interval is "2", and 0% when the first interval is "1", and the probability of winning is set low (see FIG. 60).

FIG. 65 shows a state in which two pieces of variation information have been digested from the state shown in FIG. 64 (data shift processing has been performed twice). In this state, if any of the first to fifth scenario flags is set on because the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 is shifted to the execution compatible area 462 (affirmative determination is made in step S7206), The corresponding scenario presentation will begin. However, the example shown in FIG. 65 shows a case where the scenario flag is not set to on.

Incidentally, as a scenario effect that is started when the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is shifted to the execution compatible area 462, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a-2), the active movement of the preceding character object 474 is triggered, the scenario production is started, and the leading character object 474 and the trailing character object 474 (surrogate character object 474) are in the vicinity of the holding area 463 corresponding to the holding area where the return flag is set to ON. , a scenario performance of one of the patterns shown in FIGS. 68(b) to 68(f) is developed.

Furthermore, in the state of FIG. 65, the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 has been shifted to the execution compatible area 462, and the scenario flag is not set to on (a negative determination is made in step S7207), so that the first interval and An approach lottery (step S7212) is performed to determine whether or not to shorten the second interval. The example shown in FIG. 65 is a close lottery (as shown in FIG. 62(a), the return flag on fluctuation information corresponds to a jackpot, and if the first interval is 4 frames, there is a 20% probability of winning) This shows the case where the winner is not selected. That is, after the subsequent pre-reading pending icon 472 (surrogate character object 474) is derived in a state where the preceding pre-reading pending icon 472 (preceding character object 474) is derived, the preceding pre-reading pending icon 472 and the subsequent The preceding pre-read pending icon 472 is maintained while maintaining the interval of 4 frames (the number of frames in the pending display area 461 from which the default pending icon 471 between them is derived) This means that the pending icon 471 has been shifted until it reaches the execution compatible area 462.

FIG. 66 shows a state in which one piece of variation information (corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472) has been digested (data shift processing has been performed once) from the state in FIG. 65. In this state, since the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 has already been digested, the probability of winning in the close lottery (step S7212) of the close lottery process performed in conjunction with the data shift process increases dramatically (in this example In this case, the probability is 80% (see FIG. 62(a)), and as shown in FIG. 66, the player wins the proximity lottery and the subsequent look-ahead reservation icon 472 (surrogate character object 474) is placed in the previous reservation corresponding area 463. It shows how it moved.

FIG. 67 shows a state in which one piece of variation information (corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472) has been digested (data shift processing has been performed once) from the state in FIG. 66. In this state, "2" is set in the pending performance counter of the execution area (the return flag is turned on). In other words, the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is acquired in the pending prefetch effect lottery process performed when the predetermined variation information is pending stored in the pending information storage area, and the character pattern is created based on the predetermined variation information. However, in the pending display area 461, the prefetch pending icon 472 is not yet derived to the execution corresponding area 462 corresponding to the execution area in which the predetermined fluctuation information is stored, and is moved to another (later) position. If the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived by proxy (affirmative determination is made in step S7204 and negative determination is made in step S7225), a display is performed that forcibly moves the prefetch pending icon 472 to the execution compatible area 462 ( (See step S7227).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 67, the change information stored in the pending information storage area (execution area here) and the pending icon 471 (pre-read pending icon 472), and the correspondence between the content of the variable display and the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 collapses (for example, even though the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the jackpot has been derived) However, this avoids a situation where a jackpot does not occur in the corresponding fluctuating display, etc.).

As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when predetermined fluctuation information is stored in a predetermined reservation area (new storage reservation area) of the reservation information storage area, a pre-read suspension is performed as a reservation pre-read effect. When the right to derive the icon 472 is acquired, this right is not only exercised immediately for the pending icon 471 indicating that the predetermined variation information has been stored pending storage, but also when the right to derive the subsequent variation information is obtained. It is configured such that it may be exercised on the pending icon 471 corresponding to the . In particular, regarding whether or not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472, the difference between the prefetch pending icon 472 currently displayed in the pending display area 461 and the pending area in which the change information corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 is stored is determined. is determined based on the interval between

More specifically, even if the right is acquired (step S7106; YES), it is checked whether there is a pre-reading pending icon 472 (preceding pre-reading pending icon 472) already displayed in the pending display area 461. If , is displayed (step S7107; YES), the right will not be exercised immediately (it will be put on standby) unless the first appearance lottery process (step S7112) is performed and a prize is won. Moreover, in the first appearance lottery process and the second appearance lottery process for determining whether or not to exercise the right with respect to subsequent change information, the interval (first interval) with the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is The closer they are, the harder it is to exercise the right (the harder it is to win in the appearance lottery process), and the farther apart they are, the easier it is to exercise the right (see FIG. 60).

As described above, when the right to newly derive a prefetch pending icon 472 is obtained in a state where the prefetch pending icon 472 has already been derived, the interval with the previous prefetch pending icon 472 (which is executed as a variable display) is obtained. (difference in order), it is decided whether to newly derive the variable information in response to the newly stored variable information, or to postpone the derivation (wait with the right to derive it). It is composed of In other words, when a plurality of pre-read pending icons 472 are derived in the pending display area 461, the spacing between the pre-read pending icons 472 can be adjusted, and the relative arrangement can be made so that each pre-read pending icon 472 is utilized as much as possible. .

Therefore, in the hold display area 461, not only one but a plurality of hold icons 471 can be derived as a prefetch hold icon 472 (character object 474 can be derived for a plurality of hold icons 471). In addition, since the intervals between the plurality of look-ahead pending icons 472 in the pending display area 461 are too close, the contents and results of the corresponding variable display become obvious and lack interest. It is possible to reduce a situation in which the performance effect and significance of the existence of the pre-reading pending icon 472 are reduced. As a result, the negative aspects of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 can be suppressed, and the pending prefetch effect using the prefetch pending icon 472 can be more reliably linked to an improvement in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, basically, although the right has been acquired, it is not exercised and is on standby (waiting for the change information to have the right exercised by proxy to be stored). If the proxy request flag indicating that the proxy is currently in a state of 472 or the proxy flag indicating that the proxy is exercising the right and deriving the proxy prefetch pending icon 472 is set to on, the new The system is configured so that the character flag and proxy request flag are not set on in response to change information in the storage hold area, but if change table information corresponding to a jackpot is held and stored in the new storage area, If there is a situation in which the losing proxy request flag is set on, the losing proxy request flag is turned off and the pending look-ahead effect lottery process is performed. In addition, even if the proxy request flag is set on, the mode of the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined at that point, and when determining the mode of the prefetch pending icon 472, new A different character determination table is referenced from the character determination table that is referred to when the character flag is immediately set on for the storage reservation area.

Therefore, with respect to the arrangement of a plurality of pending displays from which a pending pre-read effect is derived in the pending display means, patterns that reduce the effect of the pending pre-read effect or patterns that cause a decline in player interest are reduced, etc. Various balance adjustments and the like can be performed when a pending look-ahead effect is derived for a plurality of pending displays in the display means. As a result, it is possible to more reliably improve interest through the pending look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, instead of having the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 obtained when predetermined fluctuation information is stored pending storage be exercised for the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation information, If the exercise is performed on the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information stored on hold, the correspondence relationship between the prefetch hold icon 472 and the predetermined change information will be shifted. In other words, the prefetch pending icon 472 for suggesting the contents of the fluctuation display is configured such that the derived probability changes or the pattern changes depending on the contents of the fluctuation information or the like. Therefore, if the correspondence between the fluctuation information and the prefetch pending icon 472 is out of alignment, the suggestion by the prefetch pending icon 472 may be off target, and the prefetch pending icon 472 may lose its meaning.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation information and the pre-reading hold icon 472 is shifted, the configuration is such that they will eventually match, so the aspect of the pre-reading hold icon 472 suggests It is possible to prevent a situation in which the contents of the prefetch pending icon 472 and the contents of the variable display of the variable information corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 do not match.

In this embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived only when the pending icon 471 is newly displayed in the pending display area 461. Further, even if the proxy request flag is set on, once the variation information for which the return flag is set on is executed, the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 for that amount is not exercised. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the number of prefetch pending icons 472 suddenly increases, and situations such as not noticing even if the number of prefetch pending icons 472 increases without realizing it, or the value of the prefetch pending icons 472 decreasing, etc. can be suppressed.

Further, for example, in a state where the first variation information is stored in the pending information storage area and the first prefetched pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the first variation information, a new item is added to the pending information storage area. Although the second variation information is stored and the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is granted regarding the second variation information, the second prefetch pending icon is derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information. If not, and the first pre-read pending icon 472 is deleted from the pending display area before the right to derive the second pre-read pending icon is exercised, then the first pre-read pending icon 472 is held and stored in the pending information storage area. Regarding the third variation information, the second pre-reading pending icon 472 is always derived as a proxy for the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the first pre-reading pending icon 472 and the second pre-reading pending icon 472 from coming too close to each other, and to avoid wasting the right to derive the second pre-reading pending icon 472 as much as possible. Note that if the first pre-read pending icon 472 is erased from the pending display area in a state where the user has the right to derive the second pre-read pending icon 472, the second pre-read pending icon 472 that was subsequently stored in the pending information storage area Regarding the third variation information, the second look-ahead pending icon 472 may not always be derived as a substitute, but may be configured such that the winning probability of the second appearance lottery process is increased.

Further, for example, in a state where the first variation information is stored in the pending information storage area and the first prefetched pending icon 472 is derived in correspondence with the first variation information, a new item is added to the pending information storage area. Although the second variation information is stored and the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is granted regarding the second variation information, the second prefetch pending icon is derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information. If the right to derive the second look-ahead pending icon 472 is exercised for the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variable information that was stored in the pending information storage area after the second variable information. When the hold icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information is shifted to the execution compatible area 462, the target of the second prefetch hold icon 472 derived as the hold icon 471 corresponding to the third change information is The icon is changed to a hold icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information. Thereby, it is possible to ensure that the second prefetch pending icon 472 and the second fluctuation information (the corresponding pending icon 471) match.

In the pending information storage area, in a state where the first variation information is stored and the first prefetched pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the first variation information, the second variation information is newly added to the pending information storage area. is stored, and the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is granted regarding the second variation information, but the second prefetch pending icon is not derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information, and the second prefetch pending icon is not derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information. If the second appearance lottery process is won for the third variation information that is held and stored in the pending information storage area after the second variation information, the second pre-reading is performed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information. The configuration is such that the right to derive the hold icon 472 is exercised, and the order in which the change display of the first change information is executed and the change information corresponding to the hold icon 471 targeted by the second look-ahead hold icon 472 are determined. a first interval counter that stores a difference (first interval) from the order in which the variable display is executed; an order in which the variable display of the second variable information is executed; and an order in which the variable display of the third variable information is executed. A second interval counter is provided for storing the difference between the two intervals.

By providing the first interval counter, in the first and second appearance lottery processes for determining whether to exercise the right to derive the second pre-read pending icon 472, the interval between the second pre-read pending icon 472 and the first pre-read pending icon can be quickly reduced. It becomes possible to understand the By providing the second interval counter, whether the second look-ahead pending icon 472 as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information matches the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information through an approach lottery process or the like. It becomes possible to more quickly grasp the judgment as to whether or not.

In addition, a hold icon 471 corresponding to the second change information (change information for which the return flag is turned on), a hold icon 471 corresponding to the third change information (change information for which the proxy flag is turned on), If there are two or more spaces apart, the second look-ahead pending icon does not fly all at once, but instead moves to the (adjacent) pending icon 471 between them, and then moves further to reach the final goal. It will be derived to the hold icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display. Therefore, changing the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 can be made relatively easy to understand. Furthermore, in a situation where the player cannot gain an advantage by just moving one position, it is possible to use a performance that can be more enthusiastic, such as "Move more!" Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the pending look-ahead effect more spectacularly and more easily.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to further diversify the hold look-ahead effect, when the proxy flag is set on, the mode of the preceding first look-ahead hold icon 472 and the subsequent second look-ahead hold icon 472 are changed. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to derive a scenario effect using the mode of (proxy look-ahead pending icon 472), and if the winner is selected, a scenario effect based on one of the five patterns will be derived. It is configured to obtain. In particular, when the pattern shown in FIG. 68(f) is selected as the scenario production pattern, the aspect of the preceding first pre-reading hold icon 472 and the aspect of the following second pre-reading holding icon 472 are combined. The aspect is derived in the display range including the hold corresponding area 463 corresponding to the second variation information for which the return flag is turned on.

Normally, the look-ahead pending icon 472 only suggests the contents of one corresponding variable display (such as the degree of winning expectation) depending on the respective mode, but the pre-reading pending icon 472 only suggests the content of one corresponding variable display (such as the degree of expectation of winning). By performing an effect that derives the look-ahead pending icon 472 that straddles the , the content of multiple variable displays (e.g., the degree of expectation of winning) is suggested with multiple pending look-ahead effects (before the results appear in the corresponding variable display). can do. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suspension look-ahead performance and improve the performance.

Further, by combining (integrating) the aspect of the first pre-reading hold icon 472 and the aspect of the second pre-reading holding icon 472, the order of the first pre-reading holding icon 472 and the second pre-reading holding icon 472 can no longer be changed. Regardless of the interval or the like, it is possible to make the player feel as if the desired state (such as a jackpot state) will occur in response to (any of) the targeted pending display. Therefore, by deriving the pending look-ahead effect, it is possible to more reliably establish an association that improves the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, when a prefetching pending icon 472 having a combination of the first prefetching pending icon 472 and the second prefetching pending icon 472 is derived, a plurality of variations corresponding to the prefetching pending icon 472 are derived. Regarding the display, a display effect (combined variable display effect) in which a plurality of consecutive variable displays on the decorative pattern display device 42 are combined into one is performed. For example, if the pre-read pending icon 472 of the combination is derived across three pending areas 463, when the corresponding variable display is derived, the variable time that is the sum of the times of the three variable displays is A variable display is now performed. As a result, it becomes difficult to grasp which variable information has been won just by visually checking the decorative pattern display device 42. Therefore, the effect of being able to proceed with the game without being restricted by the order, interval, etc. of the pending look-ahead effects can be achieved more reliably.

Further, the pending display devices 46a and 46b definitively display the pending number of the variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b. For this reason, various pending pre-read effects are performed in the pending display area 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42, so that the correspondence between the pending display (the pending icon 471) and the pending variable display is made somewhat difficult to understand. Even if such a situation occurs, the suspension display devices 46a and 46b make it possible to reliably grasp whether or not the variable display is suspended. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom and performance of the reservation look-ahead performance.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below. In the third embodiment, a performance that changes the mode of the hold icon 471 is performed in response to the player's operation of the performance button 125 or the like. Below, we will mainly explain the characteristic parts. Note that the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so the explanation thereof will be omitted and will be explained using the same member names and numbers.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the reserved display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, "stones" with colors of "red", "blue", "green", "yellow", "black", and "white" are displayed. A hold icon 471 with a motif of A production in which a soul dwells in a ``stone'' occurs, and a predetermined suggestion is made. In addition, there are five production stages in the decorative pattern display device 42: "red", "blue", "green", "yellow", and "black", and the derivation ratio of "stones" is determined according to the production stage. It's about to change.

In addition, when three or more "stones" of the same color (excluding white) are lined up in the hold display area 461, or four or more "stones" are lined up in a prescribed color combination, the hold icon is displayed. A prefetching change effect occurs in which the prefetching pending icon 471 may change to a prefetching pending icon 472. In the process of normally storing and memorizing the variable display, there may be cases where a specific arrangement of "stones" as described above occurs, but the chances of this happening are rare. For this reason, in this embodiment, an effect is also performed to increase the number of opportunities.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70, there is an exchange effect in which the positions of the hold icons 471 displayed in the hold display area 461 are swapped by the player operating the effect button 125. For example, when a shift process is performed and a new variable display is started, a display prompting the user to operate the effect button 125 is derived in the main display area 468 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the user is prompted to operate the effect button 125. Then, the hold icon 471 determined by lottery is swapped with the hold icon 471 on the right, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 71(a). In FIG. 71(a), "stones" of the same color are displayed in the 6th reservation corresponding area and the 7th reservation corresponding area, and correspondingly, a display indicating that the same color stones are arranged side by side (same color A hold line 490 extending to connect the stones is displayed.

A period is set (in the resetting valid state) in which the above-mentioned replacement effect can be performed, and if it is not within the period, the pending icon 471 will not be replaced, and if it is within the period, the pending icon 471 471 may be replaced multiple times. FIG. 71(b) shows a state when the effect button 125 is further operated during the replacement effect from the state of FIG. 71(a). Regarding the pending icons 471 in which "stones" of the same color are arranged side by side, the pending icons 471 are excluded from being replaced, and the horizontally arranged state is maintained. Furthermore, if a "stone" of the same color as "stones" of the same color that are arranged side by side exists in another holding area, the "stone" is actively moved.

However, the configuration is not such that the replacement effect will always occur if the effect button 125 is operated during the period in which the replacement effect is possible, but there is a lottery (re-run) to determine which pending icon 471 is targeted and whether or not to execute the replacement effect. Setting mode lottery processing) is performed. For example, depending on the content of the fluctuation information stored in the pending information storage area, the probability of "moving in the direction of approaching" will differ (for example, if fluctuation information corresponding to a jackpot is included, it is easier to win) , if you are completely wrong, you almost never win).

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(c), when three "stones" of the same color are lined up side by side in the fifth to seventh reservation corresponding areas, in the main display area 468 of the decorative pattern display device 42, A display prompting the user to operate the production button 125 (a display similar to that in FIG. 70, although omitted in FIG. 71(c)) is derived. When the effect button 125 is operated within this display period, a display is derived in which three stones of the same color arranged side by side explode, as shown in FIG. 71(d).

After that, the hold icon 471 becomes visible again, but information other than the color may be added to the hold icon 471. In this embodiment, the pending icon 471 that may be displayed as a mode after an explosion includes a pre-read pending icon 472 indicating that a super reach will occur, a pre-read pending icon 472 indicating that a jackpot will occur, and a pre-read pending icon 472 that indicates that a jackpot will occur. There are a pre-reading pending icon 472 indicating that a preview performance will occur, a pending icon 471 indicating that there is a change in the production stage, and a default pending icon 471 in the form of a "white stone".

FIG. 71(e) shows a state in which a pre-reading hold icon 472 indicating that a super reach will occur in the sixth hold corresponding area as a result of an explosion is displayed. However, the fluctuation display in which super reach occurs does not correspond to the fluctuation information corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon 472 displayed in the 6th hold compatible area, but the hold icon 471 displayed in the 3rd hold compatible area. If the information corresponds to the fluctuation information corresponding to Not yet.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 71(f), 71(g), and 71(h), when the next shift process is performed, the correspondence between the prefetch pending icon 472 and the fluctuation information is changed. There may be performances. In other words, an effect is performed in which the pre-read pending icon 472 indicating super reach is exchanged with the pending icon 471 drawn at the position corresponding to the fluctuation information of the variable display where super reach occurs. This resolves the mismatch in correspondence. Note that the replacement effect may be completed in one time, or may be completed in multiple times. Furthermore, a variable display other than the variable display targeted for the replacement effect may be deleted while the correspondence relationship is inconsistent, or if the replacement effect is performed multiple times, one change may be deleted. The display may be performed multiple times, or may be performed over multiple variable displays. In addition, if the variable display that is the target of the replacement effect is about to be consumed (if the corresponding pending icon 471 is shifted to the execution compatible area 462), the mismatch in the correspondence relationship will be resolved at that point. , a replacement performance will always be performed.

In addition, in order to perform the above-described replacement effect of the hold icon 471, a hold effect counter and a connection counter are provided in the execution area of the hold information storage area of the sub-control device 262 and in each hold area. . The pending performance counter indicates the type of the pending icon 471, and "0" indicates "white stone", "1" indicates "red stone", "2" indicates "green stone", "3" indicates "yellow stone", and " 4" corresponds to "Aoishi" and "5" corresponds to "Kuroishi". Further, the hold effect counter also indicates the type of the hold icon 471 that has information other than color, such as when the hold icon 472 is prefetched. That is, "11" is set in the hold effect counter corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon 472 indicating that a super reach will occur, and "12" is set in the hold effect counter corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon 472 indicating that a jackpot will occur. “13” and “13” correspond to the look-ahead pending icon 472 that has been set and indicates that a specific first preview performance and second preview performance (which will suggest the level of jackpot expectation by being derived) will occur. 14" is set. In addition, "17" is set corresponding to the hold icon 471 that indicates that there is a change in the production stage.

When the above replacement effect is performed, at the end of the process of executing the replacement effect, the hold effect counters of the execution area and each hold area are checked in order to see if they are the same as the previous value, and as described below. , a process is performed to check whether the value has a specific relationship with the previous value. In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which a probability mode with a high probability state and a low ball entry state is provided, and the production stage is also changed as the game mode changes between the probability mode and the normal mode. , it can be said that the hold icon 471 that teaches that there is a change in the production stage is also a prefetch hold icon 472.

The connection counter shows the relationship with stones of the same color. For example, if there are two stones of the same color and it is on the left side, number 11. If there are two stones of the same color and it is on the right side, number 12. If there are three stones in a row and it is on the left side, it is ``21'', if there are three stones in a row with the same color and it is in the middle, it is ``22'', and if there are three stones in a row with the same color, it is ``22''. "23" if the stone is on the right side of the stone, "00" if the stone is not lined up with stones of the same color and there are no stones of the same color lined up in a distant position. If there are multiple stones of the same color lined up horizontally but not side by side with stones of the same color but separated from each other on the right side, the code is ``01''. If a plurality of stones of the same color are arranged side by side at the same position, "02" is set for each stone.

In addition, the hold performance counter and the connection counter are set to the following values: ( If the row of stones of the same color is resolved (by fluctuation digestion or the above explosion), it will be reset based on a correlation check, etc.

In addition to the pending information storage area, there are also red counters and blue counters that indicate how many "red stones," "blue stones," "green stones," "yellow stones," and "black stones," respectively, are displayed in the pending display area 461. , a green counter, a yellow counter, and a black counter. The above replacement effect is not executed unless one of the values of these color counters is "3" or more. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the above-mentioned replacement effect is performed if any of the values of the color counter is "2" or more.

In addition, even during a period in which a replacement performance can be derived, if the performance button 125 is not operated, the replacement performance will not be derived. Furthermore, during the period in which a replacement effect can be derived, the replacement effect is not derived from the time the effect button 125 is operated until the replacement effect in the pending display area 461 is completed (the resetting of the pending icon 471 is completed). It is now considered to be in an impossible state (resetting disabled state). This avoids a situation where the resetting of the mode of the pending icon 471 is not completed forever. Therefore, effects such as resetting the mode of the hold icon 471 can be established, and control can be simplified.

Note that the period in which the replacement effect can be derived may be configured to end earlier when the effect button 125 is not operated than when the effect button 125 is operated. Furthermore, when the performance button 125 is operated twice and the replacement performance is performed twice during the period in which the replacement performance is possible, the guidance display prompting the operation of the performance button 125 on the decorative pattern display device 42 is erased. (It may also be configured such that if the performance button 125 is not operated for a specified time during the period in which the replacement performance is possible, a guidance display prompting the operation of the performance button 125 is derived.) .

Further, as a hold effect different from the replacement effect, a combined effect in which the hold icons 471 are combined may be performed. As shown in FIG. 72(a), when four or more stones, which are the pending icons 471, are in a specific arrangement (for example, in any of the pending information storage areas, the value of the pending effect counter is "1", " 2", "3", and "4"), a display indicating the range of the target hold icon 471 in the hold display area 461 and prompting to operate the production button 125 above the range and are derived.

By operating the effect button 125, the target pending icon 471 is displayed to move in a small size, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform an effect that combines the target pending icons 471, and if the target pending icon 471 is won, As shown in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c), a combined effect is performed. As a result, although the number of hold icons 471 is reduced, the combined hold icon 471 is displayed in a large size so as to straddle the plurality of hold corresponding areas 463 in which the target hold icon 471 was displayed.

In addition, the lottery to determine whether or not to perform the effect of combining the target pending icons 471 is easier to win if the fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the pending information storage area. It becomes more difficult to win in the order of being off except in the front and back, and then completely off. In addition, if the variation information that was used as the basis for determining the probability of winning the lottery (corresponding to a jackpot, etc.) is not included in the variation information corresponding to the pending icon 471 that is the target of the combined effect, the correspondence relationship The combined hold icon 471 is moved so that they match. Furthermore, unless the performance button 125 is operated as a trigger for the combined performance, the combined performance will not be derived.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 72(d), when the combined hold icon 471 is shifted to (a position including) the execution compatible area 462, the hold compatible area is expanded by the amount that the execution compatible area 462 expands horizontally. It looks like 463 has been reduced. In addition, until the fluctuation display of the loss targeted by the combined hold icon 471 (4 times) ends, or until the fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot included in the fluctuation display of the target ends, the target's Even if the variable display is sequentially consumed, the combined pending icon 471 will be displayed in the execution corresponding area 462 in the same manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the combined hold icons 471 for four variable displays exist in the execution compatible area 462 (position including), the hold compatible area 463 can display five hold icons 471. Only the area is displayed, and the display of any additional pending icons 471 is suppressed until the combined pending icon 471 is deleted, even if the corresponding fluctuation information is stored in a pending memory. ing.

As described above, the large hold icon 471, which is a combination of multiple hold icons 471, is displayed across the multiple hold compatible areas 463, and the combined hold icon 471 indicates that a plurality of variable displays are stored on hold. ing. Furthermore, even if the combined hold icon 471 is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462, it actually indicates not only the execution area of the hold information storage area but also the content of the variable information stored in the hold area. Particularly, in this embodiment, in response to the combined pending icon 471, an integrated variable display in which a plurality of variable displays are combined is derived on the decorative pattern display device 42. In this way, the combined pending icon 471 suggests that an integrated fluctuation display will be derived, and as a result, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high. Therefore, the combined hold icon 471 is also the prefetch hold icon 472.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a display indicating that a variation display larger than the display frame of the holding area 463 is put on hold is derived, or a display indicating that a change display that exceeds the display frame of the hold corresponding area 463 is put on hold may be derived, or change information other than the change information corresponding to the combined hold icon 471 may be displayed. It may be configured to display all the pending icons 471 corresponding to (eg, display the pending icons 471 that will be consumed later in a smaller size). Incidentally, the stand-alone pending icon 471 displayed in the execution compatible area 462 has an expression, motion, etc. added to it, and the facial expression etc. suggests the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern currently being performed and the behavior in the pending display area 461. However, this is not a suggestion of a variable display that has not yet been performed, and therefore it is not the prefetch pending icon 472.

Furthermore, as a hold effect that is different from the replacement effect and the combination effect, a linked effect is performed in which the display including the hold icon 471 in the hold display area 461 is linked with the display in the main display area 468 to make the variable display expire. There are cases. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the execution compatible area 462 is deleted from the pending display area 461, and the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending area 463 is spread evenly over the entire pending display area 461. It is arranged like this. Immediately above the hold display area 461, a performance hold display area 492 appears, in which a pseudo hold icon 491 dedicated to linked effects is displayed. In the production hold display area 492, the pseudo hold icons 491 in two upper and lower columns are arranged in the same number as the hold icons 471 in the horizontal direction so that a vertical column including each hold icon 471 in the hold display area 461 is formed. Displayed in rows. The pseudo-holding icons 491 are similar to the colored holding icons 471 (normal ones that do not have any information other than that there is a hold, such as a suggestion of a change), ``white stone'', ``red stone'', ``green stone'', and ``yellow stone''. , "Aoishi", or "Kuroishi".

In the main display area 468 above the performance pending display area 492, a monster is displayed along with a decorative pattern, and in the linked performance, if a specific monster is defeated, a jackpot state will occur. In order to attack a monster, it is necessary to align three hold icons 471 and pseudo hold icons 491 vertically or diagonally in the hold display area 461 and the performance hold display area 492. On the other hand, in the performance hold display area 492, a cursor 493 is displayed that targets each pseudo hold icon 491 one by one, and when the effect button 125 is operated, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 471 within the cursor 493 changes randomly. do. However, if the mode of the pseudo hold icon 471 within the cursor 493 is the same as the hold icon 471 located directly below, it will not change any further.

Further, the cursor 493 can be moved using the cross button 126. Furthermore, if the presentation button 125 is operated while the pseudo hold icon 471 within the cursor 493 is in the same form as the hold icon 471 located directly below, the cursor 493 will move to another pseudo hold icon 491. It will be moved (randomly or randomly from among the pseudo-hold icons 471 whose appearance is not uniform). Therefore, even if you simply press the production button 125 repeatedly without using the cursor 493, you can change the appearance of the pseudo-holding icon 491 and align three holding icons 471 and three pseudo-holding icons 491 vertically ( (Sometimes they align diagonally unintentionally.)

In addition, the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of left and right proximity detection sensors 495 corresponding to the upper and lower sides, and a pair of upper and lower proximity detection sensors 495 corresponding to the left and right sides. A proximity detection sensor 495 is provided. When the hand held in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 is moved from right to left, the cursor 493 moves to the right; when moved from left to right, the cursor 493 moves to the left; When moved downward, the cursor 493 moves upward, and when moved upward from the bottom, the cursor 493 moves downward. Note that at the beginning of the linked performance, displays explaining various operating methods are derived.

In addition, when three pending icons 471 and pseudo pending icons 491 are arranged vertically or diagonally, the appearance of the pending icon 471 changes into a fairy with a soul dwelling in the "stone", and then the fairy Furthermore, a series of effects occur in which it transforms into an attack tool and attacks the monster.

Furthermore, in the linked performance, the number of pending icons 471 and the number of variable displays actually on hold match at the start of the linked performance, but do not necessarily match after that. Furthermore, when all the variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b that were suspended at the beginning of the linked production are completed, or when the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b that was suspended at the beginning of the linked production When the variable display of the included jackpot is completed, the interlocking performance is also completed (escape or subjugation).

Note that this linked performance is performed when the fluctuation information is stored in all the hold areas of the hold information storage area (the hold icons 471 in colors other than white are displayed for all hold compatible areas 463). This is likely to occur when variable information corresponding to a jackpot or variable display corresponding to a reach that is out of reach is included. Furthermore, if the production button 125 is not operated during the interlocking production, the pseudo suspension icon 491 does not change and the display mode of the battle may not be derived at all. may be configured so that the aspect changes randomly.

Further, as a pending performance different from the replacement performance, combination performance, and linked performance, a chaotic performance may be performed in which the appearance of all the pending icons 471 in the pending display area 461 may change. As a chaotic effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a display is derived in which "colored stones" are piled up in the hold display area 461 in the same manner as the hold icon 471 in response to the player's operation of the play button 125. Thereafter, in response to the player's operation of the performance button 125, a performance is performed in which unnecessary "colored stones" are erased. Then, when unnecessary "colored stones" are deleted and the pending icon 471 corresponding to the suspended variable display is revealed, three or more stones of the same color are lined up or in a specific combination. There may be cases where

In addition, the chaotic performance is a case where fluctuating information with a long fluctuation time is shifted to the execution area (we don't want the pending fluctuating display to decrease too much during the chaotic performance), and when the big hit is in the pending information storage area. This is more likely to occur when the corresponding fluctuation information or the fluctuation display corresponding to the out-of-reach reach is stored. Note that if the production button 125 is not operated, the chaos production will not start, and if the production button 125 is not operated during the chaos production, all pending icons 471 will be changed to "white stones" when the production period has elapsed. be done.

As described in detail above, according to the third embodiment, in the decorative pattern display device 42, basically the mode of each pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 and the pending information storage area (special Although the fluctuation information (fluctuating display) stored in each hold area (fluctuating hold area) and the execution area are in a one-to-one correspondence, the various hold effects mentioned above are performed. Accordingly, a non-matching state is derived in which each pending icon 471 and each variation information in the pending information storage area do not correspond. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the holding effect is only performed so as not to disturb the matching state, the holding effect using the holding icon 471 can be performed more diversely, more freely, and more dynamically.

Furthermore, if an attempt is made to perform a performance within a range that does not break the matching state, the performance may feel forced, the conditions for executing the performance may be strict, and there may be fewer opportunities to perform the performance, or players may not be able to operate the performance themselves. There is a concern that the user may lose the sense of randomness (there is no randomness), or that not only the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 but also the contents of the preceding and following variable displays may become transparent.

On the other hand, as in the replacement effect of this embodiment, by intervening a non-matching state as necessary, each effect until the final form is made easier to understand (by reducing the number of jumps in the effect). It is possible to make it look concise, and it is also possible to reduce the amount of control to be performed at one time (dividing the control until the final form is achieved). Specifically, for example, if a button effect is performed that involves operating the exit button 125 to randomly change the positions of adjacent hold icons 471, and three hold icons 471 of the same type are lined up, It is determined whether fluctuation information corresponding to a jackpot is stored somewhere in the reservation information storage area, and if a positive determination is made, one of the reservation icons 471 out of the three reservation icons 471 lined up is selected. If the display position of the pre-reading pending icon 472 does not match the fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot, the pre-reading pending icon 472 is converted into a pre-reading pending icon 472 that increases the jackpot expectation level, and if the display position of the corresponding pre-reading pending icon 472 does not match the fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot, the pre-reading pending icon 472 is changed to match later. For example, the position of the icon 472 may be moved. In this case, there will be no final contradiction, and the flow of changes in appearance will be relatively smooth, allowing you to fully experience the feeling that you are operating the initial button presentation.

Furthermore, even though the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived and the content of the variable display is suggested, it may still be in a non-conforming state, so it is possible to maintain a sense of tension and to make it more consistent with the surrounding variable displays. It can also make you lose track of relevance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay and performance, suppress the sense of monotony, and simplify control.

In addition, in the combined effect, a plurality of pending icons 471 are combined into one, and the number of pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 is displayed to be less than the number of variable information stored in pending memory. . Furthermore, in the linked effect, the display mode of the hold icon 471 is linked to the display mode of the main display area 468, so even if the hold icon 471 is visually recognized, the number of variable information stored on hold cannot be grasped. It is now possible. In addition, in the chaotic presentation, a pending icon 471 (displayed in the same manner as the variable information) that is greater than or equal to the pending variation information is displayed. In this way, by making it possible to derive a hold effect that freely changes the number of hold icons 471 without being limited by the number of variable information stored on hold, it is possible to improve the effect of hold effects that use hold icons 471. It is possible to perform effective effects such as dramatically increasing the expectation level of the corresponding fluctuating display.

In addition, when a combined effect is derived, the variable displays of decorative symbols that are performed in response to a plurality of pending icons 471 that are grouped into one are also grouped together. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the manner in which the plurality of pending icons 471 are grouped (combined) in the pending display area 461 corresponds to the variable display of decorative patterns in the main display area 468 of the decorative pattern display device 42, It is possible to improve the expectation level of the variable display.

In addition, in recent years, there are some machines in which the variable display time (variable time) is set to be relatively long, but this reduces efficiency in progressing the game, and, for example, when the start winning device 33a exceeds the hold limit of the variable display, In a configuration in which the player would be disadvantaged if the ball enters the ball into 33b, there is a concern that such a situation would be more likely to occur if the fluctuation time becomes longer. In this regard, in this embodiment, rather than one variable display, the variable time of a plurality of variable displays is used to perform a relatively long effect, so the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first reservation display device 46a and the second reservation display device 46b that display the number of reservations in the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b are provided, the decorative pattern display device 42 is Even if the number of hold icons 471 in the hold display area 461 does not match the number of hold icons 471 in the variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b, or even the number of variable information stored in the hold information storage area, the first hold display By checking the device 46a and the second pending display device 46b, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of pending variable displays.

Further, in this embodiment, the player's operations on the performance button 125 etc. are used as various triggers for the suspension performance, and the reservation icon 471 is reset. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunities for effects in which the player's intentions can be reflected in the game (during relatively boring times other than the timing when the result of the variable display is determined), improving the gameplay and effects. , it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony.

Furthermore, with regard to resetting the mode of the hold display, it is possible for the player to perform the operation himself, giving him more satisfaction. The player can be selectively involved. Therefore, in addition to alleviating the differences between players who feel that there are too many or too few pending effects, it also reduces the reliability of the pending effects, etc. due to the fact that too many pending effects are actually derived. , it is possible to avoid a situation where the number of players who can enjoy the reserved performance becomes too rare and fewer players can enjoy it. As a result, both players who want to be actively involved in the game and players who prefer simple effects can be satisfied with the amount of pending effects, and the control for deriving the pending effects is easy. Despite the increase, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance effect by deriving the suspended performance becomes low.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when three or more hold icons 471 of the same type are lined up, or when four or more hold icons 471 are lined up in a specific combination, a change to the look-ahead hold icon 472 occurs. (The pending look-ahead effect is derived). Furthermore, if it is a period in which the replacement effect can be executed, the pending icon 471 can be replaced as many times as desired by operating the effect button 125, and if it is in a period in which the linked effect can be executed, the effect button 125 can be operated. The mode of the pseudo-hold icon 491 can be changed as many times as desired by operating the above. Therefore, it is possible to provide new gameplay using the hold icon 471, and the above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the feeling of monotony can be further achieved. In particular, it is possible to enjoy how the mode of the combination of a plurality of pending icons 471 gradually changes toward a specific mode, which makes it possible to attract more interest in such a presentation, and also makes it monotonous. The above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the sensation are further achieved. In addition, in the pending performance, the performance that is derived when the performance button 125 is operated is not determined in advance, but the performance that is derived when the performance button 125 is operated is based on other variable information (suspension information). It is designed to be determined by Therefore, it is possible to add gameplay to the fact that the player operates the effect button 125 to reset the mode of the hold icon 471. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the feeling of monotony are further achieved.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a; Game mode, jackpot type) In the first embodiment, there are two game modes in which the winning/failure lottery can be executed: the normal mode and the variable probability mode. It is also possible to set a time reduction mode, which is a state, or a probability mode, which is a high probability state and a low ball entry state. Also, if you set the time saving mode, you may omit the variable probability mode, and the jackpot probability does not change (is constant), and the period of high ball entry state (number of fluctuations) that is given after the jackpot state ends is multiple. It may be configured so that a pattern is set. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the variable probability mode is set, but it may be configured to continue until the next jackpot.

In addition, the jackpot probability, the contents of the jackpot type pattern (the number of rounds in the jackpot state, the round end conditions), the number of patterns, etc. are also set as appropriate for each model. For example, a 2-round guaranteed variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RS") is set as the jackpot type, and for "2RS", one round is when the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds, and this is repeated twice. The jackpot state may be configured to end after the jackpot is reached. In this case, "2RS" is a jackpot (so-called "jackpot without balls") in which a significant increase in game balls is not expected. Further, after the end of the jackpot state of "2RS", a "probability mode" (for example, 100 variable displays) may be provided. In addition, in the "potential mode", the decorative pattern display device 42 displays a production stage (precursor stage) that suggests that there is a possibility that the mode has been set to the probability mode (either the normal mode or the probability mode). It may be configured to move to

Further, when a configuration is adopted in which either a high probability state game mode or a low probability state game mode is selected after the end of the jackpot state, the first validity determination as in the first embodiment is performed. When using the table and the second win/fail judgment table, the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 include values (8 to 16, 308 to 316) that will hit the jackpot only in high probability states, and values that will hit the jackpot only in high probability states and low probability states. There is a value (7, 307) that results in a jackpot.

That is, in the probability variable mode, the winning/losing random number counter C1 value (8 to 16, 308 to 316) that hits the jackpot only in a high probability state is acquired and stored as fluctuation information, and also stored before the fluctuation information. In the variation display corresponding to the variation information, when a normal jackpot state in which a time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends, the winning/failure random number counter C1 value (8 to 16, 308 to 316) that hits the jackpot only in the high probability state ) in the fluctuation display corresponding to the acquired fluctuation information, a jackpot state does not occur.

By the way, in the first embodiment, the rate at which the execution flag, reservation flag, release flag, pre-change flag, destination flag, first exchange flag, and second exchange flag are set to on changes depending on the situation. It has become. In particular, the above ratio is configured to change depending on whether or not the variable display is such that a jackpot state occurs. When setting the flag, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether the jackpot occurs only in the high-probability state and the case where the jackpot occurs in both the high-probability state and the low-probability state, and the ratio of each is determined. Let's set the flag. As a result, for example, even though the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information obtained by winning the winning random number counter C1 value (8 to 16, 308 to 316) that hits the jackpot only in the high probability state is performed in the low probability state, Avoiding a situation where the highly anticipated prefetch pending icon 472 continues to be derived (this cannot occur in the first embodiment, but the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in a manner that assumes that the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed). can do.

In this way, even if the content of the variable display suggested by the look-ahead hold icon 472 changes, the change can be made by setting the aspect of the look-ahead hold icon 472 from the beginning so that it can be handled (no problem occurs). This method avoids the situation of having to check the pre-read pending icon 472 from scratch again when a change is likely to occur, and also prevents troubles caused by inconsistencies in the appearance of the pre-read pending icon 472. can do. In addition, regarding the variable display where the content (value) of the variable display may change before and after the jackpot state, the opportunity for "pre-read target change effect" is increased compared to a configuration in which "pre-read target change effect" is not executed. be able to.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when winning the jackpot state, the probability variable mode is always given after the jackpot state ends, and the pending number of times counter determines whether or not the pending variation information will be played in the probability variable mode. It is possible to reliably grasp the situation (it is impossible to be in a situation where the process is suddenly performed in a low probability state). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the table is referred to when setting the pending production counter (setting the execution flag, the reserved flag, the release flag, the pre-change flag, the destination flag, the first exchange flag, and the second exchange flag). As such, there are two types: one for confirmed jackpot (big hit even in normal mode) and one for conditional jackpot (big hit only in probability variable mode), but they may be combined into one for jackpot.

In addition, while the time reduction mode is set, the duration of the fixed variable mode and the time reduced mode is different (for example, the time reduction mode is the period until the end of 100 fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot, and the fixed variable mode is the period until the next jackpot is displayed. (period up to), it may be configured such that the teaching about the type of jackpot won is always performed at the latest before the corresponding jackpot state ends, or even after the corresponding jackpot state ends. (Even if it is internally in the fixed variable mode, the decorative pattern display device 42 moves to the pullback stage, which is a production stage that suggests that it is either the time shortening mode or the fixed variable mode, and displays a special display in the time shortening mode. When the variable display of the devices 43a, 43b exceeds the upper limit number of times (100 times) of the time reduction mode, it may be configured to move to a probability change stage that continues until the next jackpot.

(b; Small win) Furthermore, in the lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first start winning device 33a, it may be configured such that a "small win" may be won. For example, in a lottery based on the ball entering the first winning slot 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, if a small win is won, one round is defined as the variable winning device 32 being opened for 0.4 seconds. After this is repeated twice, the small win state ends. That is, regarding the variable prize winning device 32, its appearance is the same as the above-mentioned "2RS". However, the game mode does not change between before and after the small winning state occurs. That is, for example, if "2RS" is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the probability mode, but even if a small win is won in the normal mode, the normal mode is continued. As a result, in the lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, there is no need to perform a sorting process that would result in winning a 2nd round jackpot (2nd round normal jackpot) in which a high probability state is not given. However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes clear that the variable winning device 32 has been opened twice briefly and the state has necessarily shifted to the high probability state.

In addition, by setting "small hit" and "probable variable jackpot with no balls coming out", you can increase the chances of deriving the pending look-ahead effect and make the mode pattern different (preparing a different mode from the one for the jackpot with balls coming out). ), etc., etc.). In addition, when setting a 2nd round regular jackpot, since the 2nd round regular jackpot is also a jackpot, the total jackpot probability will be increased accordingly, but the 2nd round regular jackpot will not actually come out. Since there is no change in the game mode and there is no change in the game mode, the player generally has to know the total jackpot probability that is displayed in a visible position on the pachinko machine 10, and the jackpot with balls that the player can feel as a jackpot (and " There is a risk that the difference between the probability and the probability of ``2RS'') may create a feeling of discomfort or distrust, and there are concerns that it will become an unpopular platform. For this reason, by setting "small hit" and "probable strange jackpot with no balls coming out" and not setting the normal jackpot with no balls coming out, it is difficult to distinguish whether the mode has shifted to the probability mode or the normal mode, which improves the performance. It is possible to eliminate the above concerns while ensuring that

In addition, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that a "small hit" may occur, but in the fixed variable mode, the configuration is such that a "small win" does not occur, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display where a "small win" occurs is displayed. Even if there is, the prefetch pending icon 472 may be derived when a "big hit" occurs. In this case, the value (credibility of jackpot expectation level, etc.) of the prefetch pending icon 472 derived in accordance with the variable probability mode will be further enhanced. In addition, for example, a plurality of variable ball entry means may be provided that change the state between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult (for example, in the right side area of the game area and one each in the left side area), and an opening instruction that teaches which variable ball entry means among the plurality of variable ball entry means is to be opened, or at what timing to be set to the open state. It is also possible to provide a means. Furthermore, the release teaching means is configured to be able to change its state between a functional state in which it teaches about the release of the variable ball entry means and a rest state in which it does not teach, and the pre-read pending icon 472 is set in a specific display mode. , the open teaching means may be configured to have the right to be put into a functional state.

(c; starting winning device)
(c-1; Priority digestion) In the first embodiment, the suspended variable displays are digested in the order in which they were reserved. For example, both the first variable display and the second variable display is on hold, the second variable display may be configured to be consumed with priority over the first variable display. In this case, the first variable display is not performed (it is postponed) unless the second variable display is completely consumed. In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261 includes four first holding areas that store fluctuation information corresponding to the first fluctuation display, and four first holding areas that store fluctuation information corresponding to the second fluctuation display. There are four second holding areas that store the following information and one execution area, and if the second holding area stores fluctuation information, the fluctuation information in the second holding area is shifted to the execution area. When the process is executed and no variation information is stored in the second holding area, but variation information is stored in the first holding area, the variation information in the first holding area is shifted to the execution area and executed. It may be configured as follows.

(c-2) In the first embodiment, the first winning opening 332 and the second winning opening 333 are provided in the first starting winning device 33a, but the second winning opening 333 may be omitted. . In addition, in the first embodiment described above, there is a case where a jackpot is won in a winning/failure lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, and a case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a. The percentage of the type of winning that is awarded is different depending on the case where a jackpot is won in the winning/fail drawing that is performed when a game ball enters the second winning hole 333, and the second winning hole of the first starting winning device 33a 333, and when a game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. Although the configuration is such that the proportions of the types of winnings awarded are the same, the configuration is not particularly limited to this, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, a case where a jackpot is won in a lottery drawn based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, and a second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a, and The same jackpot type table is referenced and the distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be awarded is the same in the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery conducted based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in the first embodiment, there is a case where a ball enters the first starting winning device 33a (the first winning opening 332 and a second winning opening 333), and a case where a ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. The number of prize balls awarded to the player is the same depending on the case, but it may be configured to be different. Further, the arrangement of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b can also be changed as appropriate for each model.

(c-3; Over-winning) In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the second variable display is prioritized, the first starting winning device 33a, or the second start winning device 33b, (in the third embodiment, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display in the hold display area 461) The character object 474 is derived from the hold icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display (changes to the look-ahead hold icon 472), or The right to derive the character object 474 (change it to the prefetch pending icon 472) may be granted to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display.

That is, conventionally, for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize winning device 33a, 33b in a state in which no more fluctuation information can be stored in the special fluctuation holding area (there is no empty holding area). Even if the player wins a prize (so-called "over winning"), the fluctuation information for that amount will not be stored in the special fluctuation holding area (the fluctuation display will not be held), so as a player, if such an event occurs, I felt like I had lost out. On the other hand, it is conceivable to increase the number of holding areas in the special fluctuation holding area, but in that case, it may be difficult to make it easier for game balls to enter the starting winning devices 33a, 33b due to individual differences among pachinko machines 10. Based on the difference, the difference in the ratio of the number of fluctuation displays to the number of game balls fired becomes large, or the fluctuation display becomes easier to suspend, and the game balance (number of game balls fired and , the ratio with the number of game balls paid out, etc.), the probability of a winning/failure lottery is lowered, the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. is reduced, etc. As a result, there is a concern that the difference will become larger and the degree of freedom in design will decrease.

In this regard, by adopting the above configuration, when a game ball over-wins in the second winning hole 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display is converted into the prefetch pending icon 472, or the right to convert into the prefetch pending icon 472 is granted. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball over-wins into the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, which is a complete waste, It is possible to reduce the negative impression caused by over-winning in the second winning opening 333 of the starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b.

Further, for example, if both the first fluctuation information and the second fluctuation information are stored in the special fluctuation holding area, if the state in which the second fluctuation information is stored in the special fluctuation holding area is not interrupted, the first fluctuation information It is possible to postpone extinguishment of the variable display, and this is possible in a high-input ball state (in this example, a probability variable mode in which the ball is hit to the right). In other words, if you win a jackpot in the first variable display, the ratio of being allocated to the variable probability mode is lower than if you win a jackpot in the second variable display, so in the variable variable mode, the second variable information is Although you are hoping to win in the lottery, if the first variation information is stored in the special variation holding area, you may not be able to leave your seat even if you want to, as you do not want the first variation information to be digested. There is a concern that a situation may arise in which the game balls are not allowed to enter the second starting winning device 33b.

In this regard, according to the above embodiment, by causing the second starting winning device 33b to over-win the game ball, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the first fluctuation information is converted to the pre-read pending icon 472 with priority. It is becoming more and more popular. Therefore, depending on the aspect of the look-ahead pending icon 472, it may be possible to grasp the content (appropriateness) of the first variation information in advance. This can be determined at a preliminary stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of situations where the user has to refrain from leaving their seat. In particular, in the case where the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived in a manner that teaches the result of the lottery of first variation information itself, such effects are more reliably achieved.

However, in a state where a variable display such as a jackpot state is not performed, even if you win an excessive amount, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display stored in the pending memory may be converted to the pre-read pending icon 472, or the pre-read pending The configuration is such that the right to convert the icon 472 is not granted. In addition, when the second variable display is over-winning, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display stored in the special variable pending area is converted to the pre-read pending icon 472, or the pre-read pending icon 472 If it is determined that the right to convert into a jackpot is granted, the predetermined first variable display may be derived in a manner that indicates whether or not the jackpot will be won. Further, for example, it may be configured such that one of the pending icons 471 corresponding to the first variable display is changed to the prefetch pending icon 472 when one over-winning occurs, or the target number may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, all of the pending icons 471 corresponding to the first variable display may be changed to the pre-read pending icons 472, or if one over-win, the suggestions of the pre-read pending icons 472 of one first variable display may be changed. The accuracy may be increased in stages (in which case, the accuracy may be understood by the player).

In addition, in the low ball entry state (normal mode), it is virtually impossible to keep the memory of the second fluctuation information uninterrupted. "The conversion to the prefetch pending icon 472 is performed." In addition, ``In a pachinko machine 10 that can exchange gaming information with a server via a communication mobile terminal owned by a player, if a mobile-linked game is being played with information input from the server. Only, the conversion to the look-ahead pending icon 472 may be performed due to an over-win to the starting winning device 33a, 33b. In this case, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the mobile-linked game.

(d; Variable winning device) In the first embodiment, one variable winning device 32 that can be opened in the jackpot state is provided, but a plurality of variable winning devices 32 may be provided. Further, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, a first variable winning device into which a game ball that has passed through the left side area of the gaming area can enter, and a second variable winning device into which a game ball can enter which has passed through the right side area of the gaming area, The first variable winning device is opened and closed in a jackpot state based on winning to the first starting winning device 33a, and the second variable winning device is opened and closing in a jackpot state based on winning to the second starting winning device 33b. may be configured.

(e; V-ST) Furthermore, for example, a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device into which a game ball that has passed through the right side area of the gaming area can enter are provided, and the second variable winning device A V-winning switch that can detect the entered game ball is provided, and when the detection by the V-winning switch is performed in a jackpot state, a variable probability mode with an upper limit (for example, 100 variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b) is provided. may be configured so that it is given.

In addition, as a jackpot type, the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device is opened and then the first variable winning device is opened. One round is defined as eight game balls entering the winning device or the second variable winning device, and this is repeated 15 times to create a 15-round guaranteed variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RS") and the first variable winning device. The device is opened for 30 seconds, or the second variable winning device is opened for 0.2 seconds, or the first variable winning device is opened and the first variable winning device is opened. One round is defined as eight game balls entering the device or the second variable winning device, and a 15-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RN") is set in which this is repeated 15 times.

For both "15RS" and "15RN", the first variable winning device will be opened in the 1st to 7th rounds and the 9th to 15th rounds, and the second variable winning device will be opened in the 8th round. However, in the 8th round of "15RN", the second variable winning device is only open for 0.2 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the second variable winning device. For this reason, it is no longer expected that the number of game balls will increase in such rounds (in terms of the jackpot state of "15RN" as a whole, there are actually 14 rounds in which an increase in the number of game balls can be expected). Since the ball cannot enter the game, that is, the game ball cannot be detected by the V winning switch, it is impossible to obtain the variable probability mode.

With the above configuration, after the jackpot state of "15RS" ends, "probable variable mode" (for example, 100 variable displays) is given, and after the jackpot state of "15RN" ends, "normal mode" is given. It has become.

Furthermore, as for the distribution of the jackpot type, for example, if a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, the proportion of 50% will be "15RS"; The ratio is "15RN". On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning slot 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, the percentage is 100%. It becomes "15RS". In other words, when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the first winning slot 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, the percentage of high probability states being awarded after the jackpot state is 50%, whereas Regarding the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning slot 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, and the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. , a high probability state will always be given after the jackpot state ends.

In the pachinko machine (so-called V-ST machine) configured as described above, it is preferable to win the jackpot in the lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a. It is overwhelmingly advantageous to win the jackpot in the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 333 of the starting winning device 33a and the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. In the configuration, by performing a "pre-reading target change effect" in which the variable display targeted by the pre-reading pending icon 472 of the first embodiment is changed, it is possible to further improve interest.

In addition, it may be configured such that the game ball that enters the second variable winning device is always detected by the V winning switch, or (a sorting device is provided inside the second variable winning device) and at least a jackpot of "15 RN" is generated. In this state, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 3, a game ball is not detected by the V winning switch. It may also be configured such that the prize ball is awarded and the prize ball is awarded.

(f; Hold icon, hold display area) In the first embodiment, the shape (motif) and change in aspect (for example, operation mode) of the hold icon 471 are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. be done. For example, in the first embodiment, it is possible to know whether the hold icon 471 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, but it is not possible to know whether the hold icon 471 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display. Alternatively, it may be in a manner that is difficult to grasp. Furthermore, although it is usually impossible to determine whether the hold icon 471 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, only when a predetermined condition is met, It may be configured in such a manner that it is possible to teach which one it corresponds to.

Furthermore, the hold display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 includes an execution compatible area 462 that can display a maximum of one hold icon 471, and a hold compatible area 463 that can display a maximum of eight hold icons 471. However, for example, the execution compatible area 462 may be omitted. However, when the execution corresponding area 462 is omitted, it is necessary to complete various effects using the pending icon 471 (prefetch target change effect, pending effect) before the variable display of the target starts.

Further, for example, even if a total of five or more variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b are on hold, the hold display area 461 is configured so that only up to four hold icons 471 are displayed. You can. Furthermore, for example, the mode of the hold icons 471 may be configured to change depending on the position of the displayed hold corresponding area 463. For example, the four hold icons 471 that are to be consumed first are the ones that are to be consumed later. The hold icon 471 may be displayed larger than the hold icon 471, or the hold icon 471 to be consumed later may be displayed in a simplified manner that allows the number of hold icons to be grasped. may be configured.

Further, the position of the hold display area 461 is not particularly limited. For example, in the first embodiment, the hold display area 461 is set horizontally at the bottom of the decorative pattern display device 42, but the decorative pattern It may be set at the top of the display device 42, or it may be set vertically with respect to the left or right portion of the decorative pattern display device 42. Furthermore, for example, the position of the reserved display area 461 on the display section of the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined according to the player's operation (operation using the production button 125, the cross button 126, or a touch sensor or touch panel provided as a modified example). may be configured to be configurable. Further, the size of the hold display area 461 may be increased or decreased, or it may be configured to be able to be divided into a plurality of areas. In addition, the hold display area 461 and the main display area are exchanged, and the hold icon 471 is set in a range that includes the center of the decorative pattern display device 42, and decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner (a simple version is also possible). may be configured to be performed around it (it may be configured to be automatically replaced if a notable event such as a reach occurs in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols).

Furthermore, the hold display area 461 may be provided in a display section of a display device provided separately from the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, such a display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and examples thereof include an EL display device, a dot display device, a three-color LED, and a device in which a plurality of panels whose appearance can be changed are arranged in correspondence with each other.

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the hold display area 461, the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the normal mode and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the fixed variable mode can be distinguished. Although the ST border line 465 is configured to be displayed in this way, it may be configured to be distinguished by another method. For example, the background of the hold display area 461 may be made different, or the form of the hold icon 471 may be made different. However, the pattern of the hold icon 471 becomes more complicated (the correspondence relationship is difficult to understand), and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the normal mode and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the fixed variable mode. If a jackpot state occurs while both icons 471 are displayed, the correspondence between the gaming mode and the hold icon 471 may change after the jackpot ends. It is preferable that a boundary be displayed in the background part or the like.

(g; Proximity Detection Means) In the first embodiment, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations on the decorative pattern display device 42, and it is connected to the input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. Proximity detection means (for example, a proximity detection sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, a touch panel, etc.) may be provided. For example, when a player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 471 displayed in the hold display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the detection of the finger or the like, the object whose proximity was detected is , if the hold icon 471 corresponds to the variation information for which the hold flag is set to ON, and the change information for which the release flag is set to ON is held, then the hold icon 471 for the target whose proximity is detected is may be configured to change to a prefetch pending icon 472. In this case, interest in the pending icon 471 can be increased by having the player take an action in response to the look-ahead target change effect.

(h; Prefetch pending icon)
(h-1) In the first embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is composed of a base object 473 and a character object 474, and the character object 474 is moved from a predetermined base object 473 to another base object 473. Although this represents that the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed, the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, the hold icon 471 may have no distinction between the base object 473 and the character object 474, and when the target of the prefetch hold icon 472 is changed, the entire hold icon 471 may be moved. Further, for example, before and after the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed, the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 whose target has been changed is configured to change (for example, change to one with higher jackpot expectation). You can.

Further, in the first embodiment, the base object 473 is a common motif for the default hold icon 471 and the prefetch hold icon 472, but they may be different. In addition, in order for the player to recognize that the prefetch pending icon 472 has simply moved, the content suggested by the prefetch pending icon 472 (the value of the pending prefetch performance) is maintained immediately before and after the change, The entire aspect of the pre-reading hold icon 472 does not change (it is desirable to configure so that at least a part of the aspect of the pre-reading holding icon 472 before the change is carried over. Also, the effect of changing the pending target and the rank of the pending rank) It may also be configured to include a set of up effect (either a configuration that always uploads or a configuration that does not always upload).For example, after the pending target change effect is performed, the pre-read pending icon of the target 472 operates while maintaining its mode (shape), or ramps up after deriving a dynamic display effect that overlaps the prefetch pending icon 472, the prefetch pending icon 472 The configuration may be such that the aspect of the information changes.

(h-2) Furthermore, the mode and behavior of the “connection effect” can be set as appropriate depending on the mode of the hold icon 471 and the like. For example, when the character object of the pre-read pending icon 472 is an "egg" and a "pre-read target change effect" occurs, a predetermined character may carry or throw the "egg".

Also, during the "connection effect", the aspect of the character object 474 changes (for example, the character object 474 is replaced with another character object 474, and the other character object 474 is displayed on the post-move prefetch pending icon 472). (or the costume change is displayed on the look-ahead hold icon 472 after movement), the mode of the look-ahead hold icon 472 before the change and the form of the look-ahead hold icon 472 after the change. Even if they are different from each other, it is possible to easily recognize that the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed.

Furthermore, in the middle of the connecting performance, a performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot regarding the character object 474 etc. (for example, the character object 474 brings a friend, performs a predetermined gesture, etc.) may be performed, or the character object 474 may An effect that suggests the destination of the object 474 (since the player wants to move to the hold icon 471 in the second variable display or the hold icon 471 in the fixed variable mode, the effect indicates whether the object 474 will reach the hold icon 471) It may be configured to perform the following.

(h-3) In the first embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured to be suddenly derived from the pending display area 461, but there is no indication as to whether or not the prefetch pending icon 472 will be derived. It may be configured to perform a performance. For example, a precursor object that may be changed to a prefetch pending icon 472 for the default pending icon 471 is displayed, and then a character object 474 is displayed in place of the precursor object, or the precursor object is deleted. It is also possible to use only the base object 473. Further, the configuration may be such that by operating the effect button 125 while the omen object is displayed, the result is displayed. Furthermore, effects are created to increase the possibility that the portent object will be changed to the character object 474, or to suggest that a character object 474 with relatively high expectations will be displayed (for example, a group of characters passes, a pending The background color of the display area 461 may change, various monuments may appear, etc.). In addition, the configuration may be such that the maximum number of hold icons 471 to be displayed in the hold display area 461 can be set (if the size, shape, etc. of the hold display area 461 changes, the settings may be adjusted accordingly). (The maximum number of displayable hold icons 471 may be automatically changed.)

Note that there may be a pattern of simply erasing the derived character object 474, but since this may reduce expectations and interest, it may not be displayed in the hold display area 461 as in the first embodiment. It is desirable to perform an effect such as moving within the range of the pending display area 461 so that the jackpot expectation level of the entire pending icon 471 does not change. In addition, it is not necessary to perform the connecting effect, but in that case, the timing of changing the predetermined prefetch hold icon 472 to the default hold icon 471 and the timing to change the predetermined default hold icon 471 to the prefetch hold icon 472 are determined. It is desirable to match the timing. In this case, the relationship between the earlier change and the later change becomes weaker, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the user cannot recognize that the effects are linked.

(h-4) In the first embodiment, regarding the reservation flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag, two or more of the same flags cannot be set on in the reservation information storage area, but different flags cannot be set to on. If so, they are configured so that they can coexist and be turned on. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, even if multiple of the reservation flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag are set to on, if the "pre-retention movement effect" is not performed, Check whether the "hold exchange performance" is performed, and if the "hold exchange performance" is not performed, check whether the "post-hold movement performance" is performed. The "backward movement performance" and the "holding exchange performance" are executed one by one.

On the other hand, in each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area, multiple hold effect counters are provided, or after the release flag, change destination flag, and second exchange flag are set, at the time of the next shift process. Instead of always starting the "pre-hold movement effect," "post-hold movement effect," and "hold exchange effect," set multiple start timings (for example, one shift process after another, or a subsequent shift process). The timing of the shift processing can also be selected), and multiple of the "pre-hold movement effect", "post-hold movement effect", and "hold exchange effect" can be configured at once (the timing of the shift process can also be selected). (continuation) may be performed. In this case, it is possible to diversify the "prefetch target change effect" and the like.

In addition, if the "pre-hold movement effect", "post-hold movement effect", and "hold exchange effect" are performed all at once, there is also a concern that the peripheral area of the hold display area 461 will become complicated and difficult to understand. Therefore, the configuration may be such that each "pre-reading target change performance" is started in a deliberately staggered manner (in order), or it may be determined that multiple "pre-reading target change performances" are executed at the same time. However, the configuration may be such that the execution of any one of these "prefetch target change effects" is canceled.

Also, for example, regarding the reservation flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag, multiple identical flags are set to ON in the reservation information storage area (for example, "" is set on the reservation effect counter of the reservation first area and the reservation third area 2). In this case, for example, if the reservation flag is set to on corresponding to two pieces of change information, and the release flag is set to on, the change display that was put on hold first (to be consumed first) It may be configured so that a pre-hold movement effect is performed, or by looking at the content of the fluctuation information, it is possible to select the one with a high expectation of a jackpot (the fluctuation display that will hit the jackpot is high, the fluctuation display that will lead to an out-of-order reach, the fluctuation display that will lead to an out-of-order reach, It may be configured such that the variable display (lowering in the order of the variable display in which the reach occurs) and the pre-hold movement effect are performed, or all the variable displays for which the reservation flag is set to on and the pre-hold movement effect are performed at once. It may be configured so that this is performed.

Furthermore, regarding the reservation flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag, if any one of them is set on in the reservation information storage area, these flags cannot be set on anymore. may be configured.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the "pre-reading target change effect" is performed once for a predetermined variable display (holding icon 471), the second "pre-reading target change effect" is not performed for the same variable display. However, it may be configured so that it can be performed multiple times. For example, in the "look-ahead target change performance", when the pending performance counter is set to "3", "5", and "7", the character object 474 moves to the final destination (the pending performance counter is set to "2", "4"). '', the number of movements until reaching the holding area that is ``6'') is determined, and the number of movements is set in the remaining movement counter to be stored, and the number of movements remaining is until the remaining movement counter reaches ``0'', or The character object 474 repeats movement until the fluctuation information related to the "pre-fetch target change effect" is shifted to the execution area (the pending area where "3", "5", and "7" are set in the pending effect counter is (changed), and the value of the remaining movement counter becomes "0", or when the fluctuation information related to the "pre-fetch target change effect" is shifted to the execution area, if it is a pre-suspension movement effect. , the value of the suspended performance counter is changed from "2" to "1" and from "3" to "0", and if it is a movement performance after suspension, the value of the suspended performance counter is changed from "4" to "0", And, if it is changed from "5" to "1" and it is a pending exchange performance, the value of the pending performance counter is changed from "6" to "1" and from "7" to "1". You may. When such a configuration is adopted, it becomes possible to maintain the expectation that the "look-ahead target change effect" will be performed without interruption.

Note that when repeating the movement of the character object 474, it does not stop midway in the hold corresponding area 463 corresponding to the set hold areas in which "2", "4", and "6" are set in the hold effect counter. Alternatively, the character object 474 may be configured so that it can be understood that the character object 474 just happens to stop at the final destination while repeating the movement of the character object 474 (for example, the movement of the character object 474 In the middle of repeating, if the character object 474 moves to the hold corresponding area 463 corresponding to the hold area where the value of the hold effect counter is "2", the value of the hold effect counter of the hold area is set to ``32''. In other words, the character object 474 may be configured so that "2" indicating the final destination and "3" indicating the existence of the release flag corresponding to the character object 474 can be recognized.

(h-5) In the first embodiment described above, when a "pre-reading target change effect" such as a "pre-hold movement effect" is performed, in the connecting effect, the hold icon corresponding to the variation information for which the release flag is set to ON is used. 471, the character object 474 is configured to move straight toward the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information for which the hold flag is set to on (does not involve other hold icons 471). , the character object 474 may be configured to be rendered in such a way that it also interacts with another pending icon 471. In this case, it is possible to provide a richer effect regarding where the character object 474 ends up and which variable display is targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472. Furthermore, in the connecting effects, effects are performed to determine whether or not the aspect of the character object 474 changes, or although the aspect of the character object 474 does not change, another display effect is derived in conjunction with the character object 474, etc. It is also possible to configure the system so that the expectation level of a jackpot is indicated by the pattern of the connecting effects.

(h-6) In the first embodiment, for example, among the pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 that is desirable for the player to be derived as the prefetched pending icon 472 is the prefetched pending icon. 472, a hold effect indicating that no further prefetch target change effect (movement of the character object 474) will be performed regarding the prefetch pending icon 472 may be derived. In this case, it is possible to increase performance opportunities and provide the benefit of a sense of security when a hold performance is derived. Note that it may be configured such that the hold state can be set by a predetermined operation by the player.

Further, for example, the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 may be changed from the first pending display to the second pending display, but it may not be changed from the second pending display to the first pending display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a pattern that is not pleasing to the player in the prefetch target change effect where the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed. As a result, it is possible to make the look-ahead object change effect a favorable phenomenon for the player, and it is possible to make the gameplay of expecting the occurrence of the look-ahead object change effect more reliable.

(h-7) Although not specifically mentioned in the first embodiment, when a "prefetch target change effect" is performed, or "1, 3, 4, 6" is set in the pending effect counter, the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed, a corresponding sound effect or a predetermined lamp light emission mode may be generated. In this case, even if you do not directly view the hold display area 461, you can recognize the occurrence of the pre-read hold icon 472 etc. and check its mode by the sound effect, and the game can proceed more smoothly. .

(h-8) In the “hold exchange effect” of the first embodiment, the mode of the look-ahead hold icon 472 (character object 474) corresponding to the first exchange flag and the form of the look-ahead hold icon 472 corresponding to the second exchange flag (If they are the same, cancel, raise or lower the rank of one character object 474, or raise or lower the rank of one character object 474, or raise or lower the rank of another character object 474 from among those with the same meaning (if multiple characters have the same rank) You may choose to set a character, prepare a character with minor changes, etc.). Regarding the pre-read pending icon 472 corresponding to the first exchange flag and the second exchange flag, the pre-read pending icon 472 corresponding to a jackpot and the pre-read pending icon 472 corresponding to a loss are different from the pre-read pending icon 472 corresponding to a jackpot. It is desirable to configure (control) such that the higher rank is given (easier to be given a higher rank).

(h-9) In the first embodiment, the second variable display is stored on hold (the second validity-related information is acquired), and the execution flag is temporarily turned on in the hold information storage area of the sub-control device 262. (see step S6103), it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the corresponding hold icon 471 is displayed together with the hold icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display in the hold display area 461, and the corresponding hold icon 471 is displayed. When it is determined that there is a possibility, the rate at which the reservation flag is set may be increased compared to when it is determined that it will not be displayed. In this case, it is possible to increase the chance that a pleasant pattern will occur among the pre-read target change effects, such as switching the target of the pre-read pending icon 472 from the first variable display to the second variable display. In addition, in order to avoid a decrease in reliability, the rate at which the reservation flag is set only when a win may be increased may be increased.

(h-10) In the first embodiment, the mode pattern of the hold icon 471 in the hold display area 461 (hold corresponding area 463) does not change before and after the jackpot state, but for example, the pre-read hold icon In addition to increasing the number of patterns for each mode rank of 472, at the end of the jackpot state, the mode pattern of the pending icon 471 is reset based on the values of the pending effect counter, upper limit rank storage area, and execution rank storage area. may be configured. In this case, even if various effects (for example, complicated effects such as removing the correspondence between the pending icon 471 and the variable display) are performed in the pending display area 461 in the stage before the jackpot state, the jackpot state It can be reset after.

(h-11) In the first embodiment, in addition to the changes in the aspect such that the default hold icon 471 changes to the prefetch hold icon 472, the default hold icon 471 changes to another default hold icon 471. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the prefetch pending icon 472 may change to a different mode of the prefetch pending icon 472.

(h-12) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when a jackpot state occurs, the look-ahead pending icon 472 that was displayed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display that is advantageous in sorting the jackpot type is , the derivation target may be changed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display. In this case, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the gameplay by wanting the second variable display to be digested while the pre-fetch pending icon 472 is being derived in response to the second variable display, and the player is enthusiastically put on hold. You can check and enjoy the display behavior. Note that if the derivation target of the prefetch pending icon 472 does not change during the predetermined number of variable displays, it may be configured so that it does not change thereafter.

(i; Suggested contents of the prefetch pending icon 472) In the first embodiment, by changing the aspect of the pending icon 471 (configuring the prefetch pending icon 472 so that it can be derived), it is possible to determine whether or not a jackpot state will occur. (Jackpot expectation level), but it may be configured so that another suggestion may be made. For example, regardless of the suggestion of the jackpot expectation level, if a jackpot state occurs in the variable display, it may be suggested that a variable probability mode will be added (a probability variable jackpot), or if the reach state is It may be configured to suggest that the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed as long as it occurs. In this case, if the prefetch pending icon 472 (which may be derived into a plurality of consecutive pending icons 471) corresponding to the fixed variable mode is derived, interest in the corresponding variable display is further increased. It is possible to add dynamics to the game.

In the first embodiment, when the prefetch pending icon 472 indicates the occurrence of a special game state such as a jackpot state, the "prefetch target change effect" is not performed until the special game state occurs (for example, , the values 1 to 7 may not be set to the pending performance counter).

In addition, for example, while setting a time reduction mode in which the probability is low and a high number of balls entered, and a probability mode which is a high probability state and a low number of balls entered, it is also possible to set You cannot recognize whether you are staying in fixed mode or normal mode, whether there is still time left in time reduction mode, or whether you are staying in fixed variable mode or time reduction mode, or , the configuration may be such that it is difficult to recognize (setting a common production stage), and the mode of the look-ahead pending icon 472 may indicate that the player is staying in the potential mode or variable mode. good. Further, for example, when the variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 ends (this may be accompanied by a presentation such as a button presentation), the instruction that the mode is a probability mode or a variable probability mode is provided. The configuration may be such that the instructions may not be taught in the case of non-participation in the production. In this case as well, it is possible to increase performance opportunities and add new intonation to the game.

In addition, settings can be made by the player's operation so that a hold effect does not occur or a change in the form of the hold icon 471 (change to the look-ahead hold icon 472) itself does not occur. It may be configured as follows. In addition, in the third embodiment, by leading the pending icons 471 to the pending display area 461 based on various lottery results, three consecutive pending icons 471 of the same type may be lined up by chance, or a specific In some cases, four icons are lined up in a combination, but in order to prevent them from being lined up (if the hold icons 471 determined to be derived are in the specific line, they are forcibly placed in another (rewrite it to something). Furthermore, in that case, it may be configured to decide which one to derive from predetermined pending effects, or to increase the probability of deriving the pending effect.

(j; Relationship with mobile linked games)
(j-1) In the above embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer, etc. (so-called mobile linked gaming ). For example, when ending a mobile-linked game, a two-dimensional code containing the current game information is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, the player reads the two-dimensional code with a mobile communication terminal, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with a mobile communication terminal. By accessing the server, the gaming information is sent to the server, and when starting mobile-linked gaming again (for example, at a later date), accessing the server with a mobile communication terminal allows the game information to be stored corresponding to each player. A configuration may also be adopted in which a password issued according to data etc. is input into the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, for example, by playing a mobile-linked game, effects etc. are derived on the decorative pattern display device 42 etc. according to various settings made by the player or game information accumulated so far by the player. It may be configured such that a change occurs when selecting a pattern. For example, a player can change the balance of selected effects on the pachinko machine 10 or on the server side, or set characters that are likely to appear on the decorative pattern display device 42, etc. may be configured. In particular, in the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which effects that are likely to be derived in the hold display area 461 and patterns of the prefetch hold icons 472 can be set. For example, in the hold display area 461, the hold icon 471 is made to look like a cooking utensil such as a plate (dish) or a frying pan, and a character is displayed behind it, and the character cooks the food (in the "pre-read target change effect", It is configured to perform effects such as displaying changes such as replacing plates, etc., and can change such characters, and can change the content of the dish (which may be associated with the method of suggestion). It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, the number of settings that can be made increases depending on the content of the accumulated gaming information (rank updated when a specified amount of gaming information or specific gaming information is stored in the server for each individual player). The configuration may also be such that more unusual effects can be selected.

(j-2) By playing a mobile-linked game, display data on the decorative pattern display device 42 derived by the pachinko machine 10, decorative data related to audio data, etc. (character images, item images, action patterns, character voices) , sound effects, etc.) may be configured to set a period during which specific decoration data can be acquired or is easy to acquire (collection high probability state).

For example, if a jackpot state occurs in the variable display from which the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, or if a win/fail effect regarding the acquisition of decoration data (for example, the effect button 125 is pressed before the variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 is completed) The configuration is such that the decoration data related to the character object 474 displayed in the corresponding look-ahead pending icon 472 can be obtained with a predetermined probability when the effect used) is performed. 100%, or it may be configured to make it easier to obtain decoration data with a rare pattern among the decoration data related to the character object 474 displayed in the pre-read pending icon 472. When such a configuration is adopted, a player who is collecting decoration data will want the prefetch pending icon 472 to be derived in the collection high accuracy state, and the "prefetch" By deriving the "target change effect", a new intonation will be added.

Conditions for transitioning from a low collection certainty state to a high collection accuracy state include, for example, if you win a lottery, if a specified number of fluctuations are displayed in the collection low certainty state, or if a specified time has elapsed since the power was turned on. The state of transition from a high collection certainty state to a collection low certainty state includes, for example, when a specified number of fluctuations are displayed in a collection high certainty state, when a (fall) lottery is won, and when a collection Cases include a case where a specified time has elapsed in a high accuracy state, a case where a specified number of decorative data have been acquired in a collection high accuracy state, and a case where a jackpot has occurred.

Note that in the above embodiment, the decoration data is not stored in the mobile communication terminal owned by the player, but the decoration data or data related to it is stored in the mobile communication terminal, and images, sounds, etc. based on the decoration data are stored in the mobile communication terminal. may be configured to be derived at the mobile communication terminal. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that images, sounds, etc. based on the player's decoration data stored in the server can be derived on the server's website. However, in order to improve the desire to play, the decoration data can only be opened on the pachinko machine 10, or by opening the decoration data on the pachinko machine 10, images and sounds that cannot be derived by other methods can be derived. It is desirable to configure it as follows.

In addition, by being able to collect decoration data, it is possible to further enhance the pending performance using the pending icon 471, the performance button 125, etc. For example, a predetermined collection is displayed depending on the mode of the pending icon 471, and it can be used as a pending performance. A collection may be awarded if the player succeeds in the mini-game. In this case, effects such as suppressing the feeling of monotony and increasing the desire to play are further achieved.

(j-3) It is configured to be able to execute a game in which different results are given depending on the operation by the player, and a game reflection state is provided in which the result of such game is changed according to a winning lottery or a reach lottery. It may also be a thing. That is, by allowing the player to play the game along with playing the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress fatigue and the like. In particular, by playing mobile-linked games, the content of the current game can be saved as data along with the game content, and the enjoyment of accumulating data can be increased.

Further, the game result of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to change between a state in which the result of the game is reflected and a state in which it is not reflected in the result of the game. For example, the game basically has a structure in which the result is determined according to the player's operations, and if it is decided that a variable display such as a jackpot situation or a super reach situation will be performed. may be configured such that the contents and results of the game are forcibly determined (corresponding scenarios are set, etc.) according to the results of the lottery. However, in order to advance the game, it is essential to advance the game (start winning).

Regarding the operation of the game, the pachinko machine 10 is designed so that it can be operated with only the hand that is not gripping the handle 18, or the amount of rotation of the handle 18 (while operating the firing stop button), or the amount of the game The result of the game changes depending on the ball's movement path and the ball's destination (there is a detection means to detect the game ball, but even if the detection is done, there is no prize ball and there is no lottery involved in the game). (For this purpose, it is desirable to configure the game so that no matter where the game ball is hit, there is not much difference in the result of the game.)

(k; Effect regarding occurrence of prefetch pending icon 472 (appearance of character object 474))
(k-1) In the first embodiment, when the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, the pending icon 471 (base object 471 ), the character object 474 is derived, but other patterns may exist.

For example, after making the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 appear in a place other than the pending display area 461 (for example, at the timing when the variable display is suspended), the predetermined pending icon displayed in the pending display area 461 is displayed. 471 (base object 473). For example, a character object 474 or an object related to it (caricature, bait, trainer, etc.) may be displayed in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42 where decorative patterns etc. are displayed, and patterns such as the behavior of the object may be displayed. Accordingly, it may be configured to perform an effect in which it is determined whether or not the character object 474 is combined with a predetermined base object 473 to become the prefetch pending icon 472. Further, it may be a movable accessory with the character object 474 as a motif, a light-emitting information means that appears with a built-in lamp, or the like.

(k-2) Furthermore, the player touches the character object 474 (which may hide in the background, run away, move inside and outside the display area, etc.) displayed in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42; Alternatively, the fish may be moved so as to be pulled (it may be made easier to catch when a predetermined condition is met; for example, a net is displayed, the fish is put to sleep, food is spread, the fish is brought to a certain place, or the fish is moved to a display area. (e.g., the character object 474 is brought in from a state where it does not exist at all), the character object 474 moves to the reserved display area 461 and fits in the base object 473. It may be configured to perform the following.

(k-3) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when the prefetch target change effect is derived, the prefetch target change effect is derived before the prefetch target change effect is derived. It may also be configured to be able to derive a look-ahead change suggestion effect that suggests that. As the prefetch change suggestion effect, for example, a character is displayed in or near the hold display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the character performs a predetermined action on the prefetch hold icon 472, which is the target of the prefetch target change effect. The configuration may be such that the animation to be triggered is derived. Further, for example, a predetermined change occurs in the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 that is the target of the prefetch target change effect (a display such as the prefetch pending icon 472 shaking or fog appearing in front of the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived). (e.g.). In this way, by deriving the prefetching change suggestion effect, it is possible to more actively promote that the prefetching target change effect is derived, and it is possible to make it easier for people to visually recognize the prefetching target change effect from the beginning. .

(l; Timing of prefetch target change effect) In the first embodiment, the "prefetch target change effect" is configured to start only at the timing when the pending icon 471 is shifted, but it can also be started at another timing. It may also be configured such that it may be used. For example, when the operation of the effect button 125 is selected as an opportunity to start a look-ahead target change effect, the operation is guided, and a process is performed to make the operation of the effect button 125 a trigger for a look-ahead target change effect, and such a state It may be configured such that when the effect button 125 is operated in , the prefetch target change effect is started.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the release flag, change destination flag, or second exchange flag is set to on, the prefetch target change effect is always derived at the time of the next shift process. For example, a performance permission lottery is held to determine whether or not to start a look-ahead target change performance in a shift process with the release flag, change destination flag, or second exchange flag set to on, and if an individual wins, the look-ahead target It may be configured such that a change effect is derived.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the number of prefetch pending icons 472 can be increased only at the timing when a new pending icon 471 is newly added and displayed in the pending display area 461, but the number of prefetch pending icons 472 can be increased at another timing. However, it may also be configured so that the number may increase. For example, the configuration may be such that the pre-reading pending icon 472 is derived after a specific effect (such as an animation in which a character takes a predetermined action with respect to the pending icon 471) is derived in the pending display area 461. The pre-reading hold icon 472 is derived (or the mode rank is stepped up) under the condition that the person operates the production button 125 or a predetermined variable display (for example, a variable display in which a reach state occurs) is performed. ) may be configured. Further, for example, the configuration is such that the prefetch pending icon 472 is not derived only when the execution flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag are set to ON, and a state in which the prefetch pending icon 472 has the right to be derived is configured. In addition, the pre-reading pending icon 472 may be derived by winning a permission lottery performed when the pending icon 471 is shifted.

However, in order to avoid interference with the effects related to decorative patterns in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42, the "prefetch target change effect" or the effect of increasing the prefetch pending icon will cause a reach state to occur from the start of the variable display. It is desirable to do this between the following timings. Further, as a trigger for starting the performance, the performance button 125 may be operated in a state where the performance permission has been issued.

(m; winning history) Also, for example, the detection history of the left starting winning switch 224a, the right starting winning switch 224b, and the second starting winning detection switch 224c (the result of the winning lottery and the time of each detection are associated) Detection history storage means that can store the values of the hold effect counter (the value of the hold effect counter that was set when the fluctuation information was stored in the hold information storage area); A performance number storage means may be provided, and the storage information of the detection history storage means and the pending performance number storage means may be configured to be outputtable. For example, the detection history storage means and the pending performance number storage means are provided in a control device that is electrically connected to the main control device 261, and when a predetermined operation is performed by a person related to the hall, the detection history storage means and the pending performance number storage means are provided. The storage information of the pending performance number storage means may be read out and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Furthermore, the same information as the information stored in the detection history storage means and the pending performance number storage means may be configured to be output to the hall computer of the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. In this case, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where troubles caused by a misunderstanding regarding the "look-ahead target change effect" become complicated.

(n; Suspension of normal symbol) In the above embodiment, a suspension display (normal symbol suspension icon) indicating that the variable display related to the ordinary symbol display device 41 is suspended is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Good too. Furthermore, regarding the general map reservation icon, it may be configured to perform an effect such as changing the order in which the icons are consumed, like the reservation icon in the above embodiment.

For example, even in the normal mode entry support lottery, if a winner is won, the winning type (long opening winning) is set such that the second starting winning device 33b is opened for, for example, 4 seconds, and in the regular mode hold icon, It may be configured to teach or suggest such long opening. In addition, in the time reduction mode or the variable probability mode, the teaching or suggestion of long opening may be stopped, or the display of the normal pattern hold icon itself may be stopped.

(o) In the second embodiment, it is basically determined whether or not to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 (substitute prefetch pending icon 472, etc.) based on the interval with the preceding prefetch pending icon 472. However, for example, the subsequent pre-read pending icon is set based not only on the interval between the preceding pre-read pending icon 472 but also the content of the fluctuation information corresponding to the pre-read pending icon (such as whether or not it is a jackpot, reach type, etc.). It may be determined whether or not to derive the winning probability (for example, by changing the probability of winning in the appearance lottery process).

Furthermore, the correspondence between the interval and the probability of deriving the prefetch pending icon can be set as appropriate for each model. Further, separate tables are provided as in the above embodiment, which are referred to in the first appearance lottery process (step S7112) and the second appearance lottery process (step S7119) of the pending icon setting process (see FIG. 58). It may also be configured to be used in common.

(p) In the second embodiment, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined when the character flag is set on in the new storage pending area, and the pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined when the proxy request flag is set to on. 472, a different character determination table is referred to, but the pattern of the preceding pre-read pending icon 472 is referred to so as not to overlap with the pattern of the preceding pre-read pending icon 472. or the pre-read pending icon of the subsequent (substitute) pre-read pending icon 472 so that a predetermined meaning is generated when a predetermined association is made in combination with the pattern of the preceding pre-read pending icon 472. 472, or by referring to the pattern of the preceding pre-read pending icon 472 and the corresponding variation information, and the pattern of the subsequent pre-read pending icon 472 and the corresponding variation information (based on the order etc.) It may also be configured to determine a pattern for scenario presentation. Note that the trigger for starting the scenario performance is not particularly limited, and for example, if a player wins in a predetermined lottery performed during data shift processing with the scenario flag set to on, the turn flag may start. Alternatively, based on the player's input operation of the performance button 125 or the like, it is also possible to start the scenario performance in such a way that the variable display is interrupted midway.

(q) In the second embodiment, unless a situation occurs in which a plurality of pre-read pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, the variation information targeted by the pre-read pending icon 472 is not changed. However, even if the pre-read pending icon 472 is not displayed, the player wins in the pending pre-read effect lottery process that is triggered by the change information being newly stored in the pending information storage area. In this case, a first appearance lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not to immediately derive the prefetch pending icon 472.

Furthermore, a plurality of hold effect counters are provided for each hold area and execution area in the hold information storage area, and a plurality of return flags are set to on in a plurality of hold areas and an execution area, and a plurality of substitute flags are set to on in the hold area and execution area. It may also be configured such that it is set to on.

When these configurations are adopted, the spacing and order of the prefetch pending icons 472 will change in a more complex manner, improving the gameplay and performance from when the prefetch pending icons 472 are derived until they are deleted. etc. can be achieved.

In addition, in the second embodiment, based on the operation of the production button 125, the prefetch pending icon 472 (substitute character object 474) corresponding to the pending area in which the proxy flag is set to ON is displayed as the return flag is set to ON. It may be configured such that an approach lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to approach the reservation corresponding area 463 corresponding to the reservation area. In addition, as a result of the approach lottery process, the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured not only to move toward the execution compatible area 462, but also to move away from the execution compatible area 462 in some cases. Good too.

(r) In the second embodiment, the aspect of the first pre-reading hold icon 472 and the aspect of the second pre-reading holding icon 472 as shown in FIGS. 68(d) and (f) are combined to support multiple hold When deriving the look-ahead hold icon 472 that straddles the area 463, the expectation level of the first look-ahead hold icon 472 and the second look-ahead hold icon 472, whichever has a higher expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot state, is set to the lowest level. However, it is desirable that the prefetch pending icon 472 is integrated (combined), or synergistically, so that the expectation level may be improved in some cases. In other words, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(d), when the targets of the first and second prefetch pending icons 472 are combined into one variation information, the number of variation displays that are the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is reduced by one. However, by deriving a mode indicating that the level of expectation has been increased accordingly, dissatisfaction among the players can be suppressed.

(s; Operation means) In the third embodiment, an operation time measurement timer is used as an operation time measurement means for measuring the operation time of the production button 125, and the number of operations for counting the number of operations of the production button 125 per specified time. At least one of the operation count counters serving as the counting means may be provided. Furthermore, by pressing the effect button 125, various lottery results for pending effects are selected depending on whether or not the time measured by the operation time measurement timer exceeds the first threshold, or whether the number of times measured by the operation number measurement counter exceeds the second threshold. Regarding the various tables to be used, the configuration may be such that different tables are selected. For example, when the effect button 125 is turned on, the roulette wheel continues to rotate and stops when released, or when the effect button 125 is held over the effect button 125, a balloon inflates and deflates. It may also be possible to create an effect in which the player can play it when operated.

In this case, a variety of inputs can be performed with one effect button 125. Therefore, in addition to making it easier to reflect the player's intention regarding the hold effect such as changing the form of the hold icon 471, the number of effect buttons 125 whose predetermined operation triggers resetting the form of the hold icon 471 is minimized. You can improve operability, increase interest in operations, and more. By reducing the number of performance buttons 125 as much as possible, it is possible to make it easier for players to understand the performance that involves the operation of the performance buttons 125, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the space required for installing the performance buttons 125. can.

Furthermore, for example, detection by a proximity detection sensor 495 that is provided in the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42 and detects that an object approaches the space in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 triggers the resetting of the pending icon 471. Alternatively, a button approach detection sensor capable of detecting an object close to the effect button 125 may be provided to control the speed at which the effect button 125 is operated or the state above the effect button 125. It may be configured such that different tables are selected in various lottery drawings in the pending performance depending on the time period during which the hand is held up without touching. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the hold effect is reset upon detection by the button proximity detection sensor. When these configurations are adopted, various inputs can be made when resetting the mode of the hold icon 471, and more diverse effects can be performed.

In addition, buttons and sensors corresponding to each hold corresponding area 463 and execution corresponding area 462 of the hold display area 461 are provided, and the hold display area 461 is provided on a touch panel separate from the decorative pattern display device 42. You may. In this case, since each hold icon 471 is directly touched, the operation is intuitive and easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to arouse more interest in the visual appearance of the hold display area 461 and the behavior of the hold icon 471, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the user overlooks resetting the hold display form. Furthermore, by making the operations easy to understand, it is possible to avoid situations such as being confused by the operations and causing a timeout, or the game tempo becoming slow due to setting a relatively long time for such operations. . In particular, when an operation such as selecting one of the plurality of hold icons 471 is required, it is possible to select the target hold display more clearly and reliably.

(t; Covering means) In the above embodiment, a blind plate is provided as a covering means that can be displaced between a covering position located in front of the holding display area 461 and a retreating position retreating from the front position of the holding display area 461. It may also be provided. For example, in the third embodiment, eight blindfold boards that can appear upward from the lower frame of the decorative pattern display device 42 are provided corresponding to each reservation corresponding area 463, and are covered at the timing when a reservation effect may occur. It may be configured such that the entire or part of the hold icon 471 located behind the hold icon 471 is hidden, and the hold icon 471 is moved to the retreat position at the timing when the hold effect is completed. In addition, a plurality of blindfold boards are provided corresponding to each holding area 463, and each of the plurality of blindfold boards has predetermined information (a sticker with a pattern, etc. printed on it) depending on the difference in the visual recognition mode. Depending on the situation, a blindfold board is selected for the cover position or retreat position. It may be configured to do so. Furthermore, the blindfold board can be rotatably provided so as to change the visible area from the front, and can be slid left and right along the shift direction of the hold icon 471 (so that it does not follow the shifting movement of the hold icon 471). It is also possible to provide the

When these configurations are adopted, a more interesting performance can be derived by combining the change in the mode of the hold icon 471 or the hold effect with the operation of the blind board. In addition, when the blindfold board covers the entirety of each pending icon 471 to the point where it becomes invisible or difficult to see (the fully covered position), the moment when the pending icon 471 or the mode of the pending effect changes can be seen. It is possible to improve the effect of showing how things have changed or not. In particular, since the blindfold board can individually cover each hold icon 471 displayed in the hold display area 461, it is possible to limit the hold icons 471 that you want to draw attention to among the plural hold icons 471, and the aspect changes. It is possible to make it easier for people to recognize whether or not this has been carried out. Furthermore, when the blindfold board covers a part of the hold icon 471 to the point where it becomes invisible or difficult to see (it is set to a partially covered position), the hold icon 471 and the hold effect, and the form of the blindfold board. (A part of the hold icon 471 can be seen and hidden from the side of the blindfold board, but it is difficult to determine which hold icon 471 it is. It is possible to understand the meaning, but it is difficult to understand accurately).

Moreover, the blindfold board can cover only the reserved display area 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the main display area 468 as a performance display means is not hidden by the blindfold board. For this reason, for example, compared to a configuration in which the covering means covers the entire display section of the decorative pattern display device 42, attention can be drawn to the mode of the pending display area 461, and changes in the mode in the pending display area 461 can be more easily noticed. It can be made easier to be recognized. Further, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of other parts of the decorative pattern display device 42 by the covering means in the covering position. As a result, the degree of freedom in the timing of presentation using the covering means can be improved.

Incidentally, the covering means is not particularly limited to a movable accessory, and may be constituted by an EL display device, a liquid crystal display device, etc. disposed in front of the holding display area 461. Further, the blind plate may be configured to cover the front of the plurality of reservation icons 471. Further, the hold icon 471 may be made of a translucent material in a prismatic shape (irregular shape) or in a mesh shape so that the aspect of the hold icon 471 appears blurred. In addition, the configuration may be such that the hold icon 471 is always present behind the blindfold board that is set to the cover position, or the cover position is set to a part where the hold icon 471 is not derived from the blindfold board. Alternatively, the blindfold plate may be configured to be in the covered position so that the blindfold plate indicates that there is a reservation.

(u) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when the mode of the pending icon 471 is changed (such as pending effect) in the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 is displayed in the main display area 468 of the decorative pattern display device 42. The object may be configured to be able to display a visibility change object whose visibility mode changes before and after the mode change of 471. In this case, while the player's attention is focused on the hold display area 461, the visual recognition mode changes quietly (without sound effects, etc.) in other parts of the decorative pattern display device 42, so that the player's When the user's attention shifts to the main display area 468, the user can notice a change in the viewing mode and feel surprised and amused.

(v) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 performs the main processing (see FIG. 9) and then the normal processing (see FIG. 10), but the configuration is particularly limited to this. isn't it. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating the counter value that was performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal processing in the above embodiment is performed, and for example, in the timer interrupt processing that is performed every 2 msec, the above processing is performed. The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In addition, as for the process of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether the power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power outage signal SK1 is confirmed, the power outage is detected. An example of such a configuration is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of the event. Furthermore, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, similar to the above embodiment.

(w) In the above embodiment, the information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs is overwritten in the win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the win/fail random number counter C1, but in particular, such a configuration It is not limited to. For example, separate from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a storage area may be provided to store information on whether or not a jackpot condition will occur, or a special fluctuation holding area may be provided. Separately from the area, a storage area may be provided that individually corresponds to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, and information on whether or not a jackpot state will occur may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area that stores the type of jackpot may be provided, or a reach random number storage area that stores the value of the variable selection counter C3. Alternatively, a storage area may be provided to store reach information. In addition, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is checked again whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation process (the status of the win/fail flag, etc. ) may be configured such that the pattern of variable display, etc. is determined according to the following.

(x) The present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, the movable means ( a variable ball entry means comprising: a feather member); a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means into which a game ball that has entered a specific area can enter; and a specific ball entry means that detects a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means. a specific ball entry detection means (condition fulfillment detection means), a special starting means provided outside the specific area and into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter, and a special starting means detecting the game ball entering the game ball. and a main control means that controls the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which ball enters the ball, and the main control means activates the variable ball entry means for the first time based on the detection by the special start detection means. A small winning state in which the variable winning means is held open once or multiple times, or the variable winning means is held open for a second time longer than the first time, or the variable winning means that is in the open state receives a specified number of balls. One round is until the game ball enters the ball, and this is repeated a specified number of times to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and if a small win is won in the jackpot lottery, a small win state is generated. The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state when a jackpot is won in a win/fail lottery and when a specific ball entering detection means detects the jackpot. In addition to pachinko machines, we also offer arrangement ball machines, similar mahjong balls, and other types of gaming machines, slot machines that are reel-type gaming machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of slot machines and pachinko machines. You may.

For example, in the case of a slot machine, identification information (such as reels with various symbols) on the variable display means that is started based on the detection of the start detection means that detects the operation of the start operation means (start lever). One game is the time until the variable display (rotation) is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means (stop button), and the winning/failure lottery (so-called bonus, assist time, assist Among the results based on various lottery results (such as a lottery to determine whether or not to grant special conditions advantageous to players such as replay time), variable display by the variable display means performed based on the detection by the start detection means is performed. There is a postponement result that is taught after a predetermined number of games (which can be set as appropriate for each model from among the results of various winning lots, the results of a lottery to determine whether or not to derive a specific effect, etc.). The content of the postponement result may be suggested or taught like the hold icon in the above embodiment, and effects such as changing the order of the hold icon may be performed.

(y) In the first embodiment, when a pre-hold movement effect (a look-ahead target change effect that moves the look-ahead hold icon 472 in the hold display area 461 from the later position to the earlier position in the execution order of the variable display) is performed. , the release flag is not set on unless the reservation flag is set on in advance, that is, the movement effect before reservation is not performed, but the fluctuation information is newly stored in the reservation information storage area. (newly put on hold), after deriving the prefetch hold icon 472 corresponding to the fluctuation information, the prefetch hold icon 472 is changed to correspond to the change information already stored in the hold information storage area. It may also be configured to move it in the same way. For example, when the execution flag is turned on, the type of look-ahead target change effect is determined, and when the pre-hold movement effect is selected, the upper limit rank of the hold area where the change information of the hold information storage area is stored. When the storage area is referred to (from the one to be digested first) and fluctuation information of a predetermined rank or higher is confirmed, such fluctuation information is set as the destination of the prefetch pending icon 472, and the upper limit rank or The configuration may be such that the mode of the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the new pending (temporarily issued) is determined based on the execution rank. Note that in this configuration, even if the prefetch pending icon 472 is not derived, the upper limit rank and execution rank are determined and stored in accordance with each piece of variation information.

Furthermore, regarding the hold exchange performance and post-hold movement performance, instead of setting the first exchange flag or pre-change flag in advance, a pre-read hold icon 472 is displayed in the hold display area 461 when a new hold is performed. If the judgment is affirmative, do you derive the post-hold movement effect or the hold exchange effect, or turn on the execution flag and simply derive the pre-read hold icon 472? , it may be configured to determine whether to simply display the normal hold icon 471. In this case as well, in order to make it easier to understand whether the variable display stored in the pending information storage area is suitable for the look-ahead target change effect, the upper limit rank and execution rank are determined in accordance with each variable information. It is desirable that the information be recorded and memorized.

(z)
(z-1) In the first embodiment, prior to the pending pre-read effect lottery process (see pending icon setting process in FIG. 38), the execution flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag are turned on in the pending information storage area. It is determined whether or not the set fluctuation information is stored (whether the pre-reading pending icon 472 is displayed in the pending display area 461), and if it is not stored, the pending pre-reading effect is displayed as in the above embodiment. When the lottery process is performed and it is stored, the reservation flag, pre-change flag, first exchange flag, and pre-change flag will not be set on (so that only the execution flag may be set on) may be configured. In this case, in a state where three or more prefetch pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, a prefetch target change effect that is unrelated to (unrelated to) the prefetch pending icon 472 to be consumed first is derived. Such situations can be avoided. Therefore, by performing the look-ahead object change effect not on the look-ahead hold icon 472 that will be consumed first, but on the look-ahead hold icon 472 that will be consumed later, the player's interest will be increased. It is possible to avoid a situation where the user becomes more interested in the icon 472 and loses interest in the pre-read pending icon 472, which is consumed first (the pre-read pending icon 472 loses its value or becomes useless). As a result, the user can enjoy the variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 one after another.

Note that it may be configured such that there is a possibility that multiple pieces of variation information for which the reservation flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are set to ON are stored on hold, but after that, the release flag, the change destination When the flag and the second exchange flag are set to on, the target of pre-reading is changed to the change information to be digested first among the change information for which the reservation flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag are set to on. It is assumed that the configuration is such that the performance is derived.

(z-2) For example, when performing a pre-hold movement effect, a held exchange effect, or a post-hold movement effect, the pre-change flag, the first exchange flag, and the pre-change flag are set to be on before the change information. For the variation display to be digested, is variation information in which the execution flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag are set to ON stored? (Is the look-ahead pending icon 472 displayed in the pending display area 461?) It may be determined whether or not, and if it is stored, the pre-hold movement effect, the hold exchange effect, and the post-hold movement effect may be configured not to be performed. Even in this case, in a state where three or more prefetch pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, a prefetch target change effect that is unrelated to (unrelated to) the prefetch pending icon 472 that is to be consumed first is derived. It is possible to avoid such situations.

(z-3) Furthermore, as in (z-1) and (z-2) above, the pre-reading pending icon is displayed in response to variable information that is to be digested earlier than the variable information targeted by the pre-reading target change effect. 472 is derived, the prefetch target change effect is not performed. For example, as in (y) above, the reservation flag, pre-change flag, and first exchange flag are omitted, and the reservation display area 461 The prefetching target change effect may be set so as to relate to the prefetching pending icon 472 to be consumed first among the prefetching pending icons 472 displayed. In that case, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the chance of deriving a look-ahead target change effect.

Specifically, for example, at the stage when a new reservation is made, a right grant lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant the right to derive the pre-read reservation icon 472 (same as the reservation pre-read effect lottery process of the reservation icon setting process in FIG. 38). If the right-granting lottery is won, it is determined whether to simply display the pre-reading pending icon 472 or to perform a pre-reading target change effect.

Then, when performing the "pre-holding movement effect" of the pre-reading object change effect, a process of searching for a destination of the pre-reading holding icon 472 is performed. In other words, since the look-ahead target change performance is a performance to increase the expectation of a jackpot, for example, if there is no variation information corresponding to a hit or variation information with an upper limit rank of 4 or higher, the pre-suspension movement performance is derived. cancel. Furthermore, even if the target variation information exists, if it is the variation information of the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed in the pending display area 461, or if it is the variation information that will be consumed later than the variation information. Also, the movement performance before being put on hold will be canceled. Regarding the processing related to the "pre-retention movement effect", by setting the reservation flag in advance as in the above embodiment, it is possible to avoid a situation where searching for change information of the movement destination is wasted. can be done and is efficient.

In addition, when performing the "move effect after suspension" of the prefetch target change effect, a process is performed to search for the prefetch pending icon 472 to be moved as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the new pending. Here, confirmation of whether or not the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed is performed in order from the variation information to be digested first. In a state where the prefetch pending icon 472 is not displayed, the post-hold movement effect is canceled. Furthermore, when the pre-reading hold icon 472 is found, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading holding icon 472 may be used in the post-hold movement effect by referring to the corresponding fluctuation information. Here, for example, if it corresponds to a hit or if the execution rank is 4 or higher, the post-suspension movement performance is stopped. In addition, it is only necessary to check once whether the pre-read pending icon 472 can be used in the post-hold movement effect, and even if multiple pre-read pending icons 472 are displayed, the second or later No confirmation is made regarding the prefetch pending icon 472. Regarding the process related to "movement effect after suspension", keep in mind that as in the above embodiment, the prefetched suspension icon 472 may later be moved to correspond to another change information. By setting the mode rank (execution rank) as well as setting the reservation flag, for example, the move source pre-read pending icon 472 actually has a high jackpot expectation, so the pre-read pending icon 472 is set, so the move Situations where appropriate fluctuation information that is difficult to move, or where the expected jackpot is as high as or higher than the source, is held and stored in memory before the source is exhausted. can be avoided and is efficient.

Furthermore, when performing a "holding exchange performance" of the look-ahead target change performance, a process is performed to determine two pieces of variable information to be targeted for the pending exchange performance. That is, it is checked whether there is any variation information for which the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived, starting from the one to be digested first. If the variation information from which the pre-read pending icon 472 is derived is not found, the pending exchange performance is stopped. On the other hand, if variation information from which the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived is found, the first exchange flag of the variation information is turned on. Furthermore, for the remaining variation displays, it is checked whether the pre-read pending icon 472 has been derived, and if not found, the second exchange flag of the new pending variation information is turned on. At this time, the aspect of the look-ahead hold icon 472 of the new hold is determined (forcibly overwritten) by referring to the upper limit rank of the fluctuation information for which the first exchange flag is turned on, and when the next shift process is performed, the first exchange A hold exchange effect is performed in which the pre-read hold icon 472 corresponding to the flag and the read-ahead hold icon 472 corresponding to the second exchange flag are exchanged. Note that if the execution rank of the fluctuation information corresponding to the first exchange flag is the same as the upper limit rank, the pending exchange performance may be canceled.

Further, after turning on the first exchange flag of the predetermined fluctuation display, it is determined whether or not the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived for all remaining variation information, and the variation information for which the prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived. , and selects the variation information with the highest execution rank from the new pending variation information, and turns on the second exchange flag. If there is a plurality of pieces of variation information with the highest execution rank, the second exchange flag of the variation information to be digested first is turned on.

Furthermore, when comparing the execution rank of the variation information for which the first exchange flag is turned on and the execution rank of the variation information for which the second exchange flag is turned on, if the execution rank of the variation information for the second exchange flag is lower, turns off the first exchange flag and the second exchange flag, and cancels the pending exchange performance.

By adopting this configuration, a look-ahead object movement effect that does not interact with the look-ahead hold icon 472 that is to be consumed first is performed, and the player's interest leans toward the look-ahead hold icon 472 that is to be consumed later. It is possible to avoid a situation where the user loses interest in the prefetch pending icon 472, which is consumed first. In addition, in terms of the appearance of the pending display area 461, by performing the look-ahead target change effect, the jackpot expectation level of the look-ahead pending icon 472 that is consumed first becomes the highest at that point. , it is possible to reliably enliven the variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 to be consumed first.

In addition, the right grant lottery may be performed at the stage when the shift process is performed, and if the lottery is won, two suitable pieces of variable information may be selected as targets of the look-ahead target change performance. Furthermore, when a prefetch target change effect is performed in a state where three or more prefetch pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, at least one of the plurality of prefetch pending icons 472 will be digested first. A process for configuring the prefetch pending icon 472 to be the target of a prefetch target change effect, or a prefetch target change effect is performed (in the case where an effect indicating whether or not the prefetch target change effect is successful) is performed. is the mode rank (jackpot expectation level) of the prefetching pending icon 472 that will be digested first among the plurality of such prefetching pending icons 472 when the effect is successful and the prefetching target change effect is performed. ) is the highest (it may be configured so that there are prefetch pending icons 472 with the same score, or may be configured such that there are no pending icons 472 with the same score). It can be set as appropriate.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below.

A. A pachinko machine is a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a firing means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and a variable display means A variable display is made to show the results of the lottery (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, many devices are configured such that when a winning lottery is performed while a fluctuating display is being performed, the fluctuating display corresponding to the winning lottery is suspended. Such gaming machines are generally provided with a pending display means that can derive a pending display that makes it possible to grasp the number of pending variable displays. Further, in a stage before the suspended variable display is executed, an effect that suggests the content of a predetermined variable display (so-called pending look-ahead effect) is performed for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined variable display. There is something.

In addition, in recent years, a plurality of starting ball entry means have been provided, and the type of special gaming state that is awarded when a winner is won in a lottery conducted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. Regarding this, the special game type that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected by sorting based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering means than by sorting based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering means. There is such a thing as being there. Further, in the hold display means, the held variable display is a first change display based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entering means, and a first changing display based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means. In some cases, it is possible to identify which of the second variable displays is based on.

By the way, in a state where multiple variable displays are on hold, if a pending look-ahead effect is performed for any of them, the player will not show as much interest in the variable display that was excluded. There is a concern that it will be stored away. In other words, there is a concern that, in the player's mind, interest in the fluctuating display in which the pending look-ahead effect has been performed will increase, while interest in other fluctuating displays will relatively decline, and this is not the case. When digesting the variable display, there is a risk of having a negative image (thinking that you are not going to win anyway, so you want it to end quickly).

In particular, for example, in a state where both the first variable display and the second variable display are on hold, a pending look-ahead effect that increases expectations for the special gaming state is performed with respect to the first variable display being on hold. In this case, the expectation of winning the second variable display, which is likely to be more advantageous than the first variable display if a winner is won in the win/fail lottery, will be relatively lowered. For this reason, there is a concern that a negative image such as ``I wish the pending look-ahead effect would have been derived in response to the pending second variable display'' may occur, which may result in a decrease in interest. .

Note that the above-mentioned problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more reliably improve interest by performing a reservation look-ahead effect. It is in.

Means A-1. a condition fulfillment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the condition establishment detection means detects, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state is generated based on the result of the lottery. main control means;
variable display means capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner;
A gaming machine comprising: a display control means capable of variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means and then stopping displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning lottery;
Information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail related information regarding the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
a retention storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the validity-related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
A pending look-ahead effect in which the mode of the pending display corresponding to predetermined validity-related information stored in the pending storage means is a specific mode that suggests the content of the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display; ,
After the pending pre-read effect is derived for the first pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information, the pending display from which the pending pre-read effect is derived is changed from the first pending display to the second pending display. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to derive a look-ahead target change effect in which the mode of the second suspension display is changed to the specific mode.

According to the means A-1, even if the pending look-ahead effect is not derived for the second pending display at this stage, the first pending display is executed before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second pending display is executed. The hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect that was derived in response to the first hold display is derived is changed to become the second hold display, and the hold look-ahead effect is derived in response to the second hold display. It is structured in such a way that it leaves open the possibility that Therefore, due to the existence of a pending display for which a pending pre-reading effect has been derived and a pending display for which a pending pre-reading effect has not been derived, the player's feeling is that interest in the pending display for which a pending pre-reading effect has not been derived is relatively reduced. (If the specific aspect of the pending look-ahead performance suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state, the expectation level of the pending display from which the pending look-ahead performance is not derived will be relatively reduced), It is possible to avoid a situation in which the user has a negative impression of the fluctuating display of identification information corresponding to such a pending display (thinking that it will not be successful anyway, so they want it to end quickly, etc.). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the negative aspects of performing the pending pre-reading effect, and by performing the pending pre-reading effect, it is possible to more reliably improve interest.

Furthermore, after the pending pre-read effect is derived for the first pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information, the pending display from which the pending pre-read effect is derived is changed from the first pending display to the first pending display. 2 pending display, and the mode of the second pending display is set to the specific mode" means "After the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display corresponding to predetermined validity related information. , an aspect in which the suspension look-ahead effect related to the first hold display is deleted and at least a part of the aspect of the hold look-ahead effect derived for the first hold display is inherited, or the same aspect The suspension prefetch effect is derived in response to a second suspension display different from the first suspension display among the suspension displays displayed on the suspension display means.

Further, it may be configured such that a state in which a pending look-ahead effect is derived for a plurality of pending displays is possible. In other words, for example, in a state where the first pending look-ahead performance with a high expectation of the occurrence of a special gaming state and the second pending look-ahead performance with a low expectation are derived, the game will be Although there is a concern that people's interest may tend to fade, by having the possibility of changing the targets of the first pending look-ahead effect and the second hold look-ahead effect, it is possible to maintain expectations for any hold display. be able to.

Means A-2. The condition fulfillment detection means includes a first condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied, and a second condition establishment detection means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied,
Regarding the distribution of the type of the special gaming state that is awarded when a winner is won in the win/fail lottery conducted in response to the detection by the condition fulfillment detection means, the distribution corresponds to the detection by the second condition fulfillment detection means. is configured such that a type more advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than the allocation corresponding to the detection by the first condition fulfillment detection means,
In the suspension display means, depending on the mode of the suspension display, it is possible to grasp the number of storage areas of the suspension storage means in which the validity-related information is stored, and to display information stored in each storage area of the suspension storage means. identifying whether the validity-related information that has been set is first validity-related information based on the detection by the first condition satisfaction detection means or second validity-related information based on the detection by the second condition satisfaction detection means. configured to allow
In the hold display means, in a state where both a first hold display corresponding to the first pass/fail related information and a second hold display corresponding to the second pass/fail related information are displayed, the first hold display After the hold look-ahead effect is derived for a given hold look-ahead effect, the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived can be changed from the first hold display to the second hold display. The gaming machine according to means A-1.

According to means A-2, rather than winning the special game state with the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first win/fail related information (first variable display), the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second win/fail related information Since the type of special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player is more likely to be selected by winning the special gaming state in the second variable display (second variable display), the player should preferably enter the special gaming state in the second variable display. I think I want him to be elected. However, for example, in a state where both the first variable display and the second variable display are on hold, a pending look-ahead effect that increases the level of expectation for the special gaming state with respect to the pending display of the first variable display may be performed. If it is derived, there is a concern that the user may become disappointed, thinking that it would have been better if the suspension look-ahead effect had been derived for the suspension display of the second variable display. Furthermore, depending on the player, the expectations for the special gaming state for the hold display of the first variable display from which the hold look-ahead effect has been derived are increased, and for the hold display of the second variable display for which the hold look-ahead effect has not been derived. There is a concern that players may get the impression that expectations for the special gaming state have decreased relatively. In this case, there is a possibility that the negative image of the pending look-ahead effect will become stronger, resulting in a decrease in interest.

In this regard, as described in the above means A-1, even after a pending pre-read effect is derived for a pending display corresponding to predetermined propriety-related information, the pending display from which the pending pre-read effect is derived. can be changed from the pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information to any other pending display, even if the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the first pending display of the first variable display. , the user can expect that the target of the pending look-ahead effect will be changed from the first variable display to the second variable display. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated.

Furthermore, for example, even if the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the second pending display of the second variable display, in a case where the configuration is configured such that there remains a possibility that it will be changed to the first pending display of the first variable display. can add a sense of tension to the gameplay. In other words, when a pending look-ahead effect is derived for a desired pending display, the user should eagerly check and enjoy the behavior of the pending display, such as wanting the corresponding variable display to be digested without changing the derivation target. I can do it. Incidentally, if the derivation target of the pending look-ahead effect does not change during the predetermined number of variable displays, it may be configured so that it does not change thereafter.

Note that, for example, after the hold look-ahead effect is derived for the hold display of the second variable display, a hold effect indicating that no further changes will be made may be derived. In this case, it is possible to increase performance opportunities and provide the benefit of a sense of security when a hold performance is derived. Further, for example, the target of the hold look-ahead effect may be changed from the first hold display to the second hold display, but it is configured such that it is not changed from the second hold display to the first hold display. It is also good to be present. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation where there is a pattern that is not pleasing to the player in the prefetch target changing performance where the target of the pending prefetch performance is changed. As a result, it is possible to make the look-ahead object change effect a favorable phenomenon for the player, and it is possible to make the gameplay of expecting the occurrence of the pending look-ahead effect more reliable.

Means A-3. A firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area provided on the front side of the game board, where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a starting ball entering means into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
and a starting ball entry detection means as the condition satisfaction detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means,
A configuration in which the winning/failure lottery is performed when the detection by the starting ball entry detection means is performed,
The starting ball entry means is
A ball entry opening into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter at any time, a pair of left and right first prize openings and second prize opening into which game balls that have entered the ball entry opening can enter, and a ball entrance. At least including a specific starting ball entry means comprising a sorting device that alternately guides game balls that have entered the opening to a first winning hole and a second winning hole,
The starting ball entering detection means is provided with a first starting ball detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the first winning hole, and a second starting ball detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second winning hole. A starting ball detection means is provided,
The suspension storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of pieces of first validity related information acquired based on the detection by the first starting ball entering detection means, and the second starting ball entering detection means configured to be able to store up to a predetermined number of second validity related information acquired based on detection by the means;
Means A-2 characterized in that the first starting ball entering ball detecting means constitutes the first condition satisfaction detecting means, and the second starting ball entering detecting means constitutes the second condition satisfaction detecting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to means A-3, the game ball can be alternately entered into the first winning hole and the second winning hole by simply entering the game ball into the specific starting ball entering means, and the first winning/wrong-related The information and the second validity related information (variable display) can be efficiently held and stored.

On the other hand, in the hold display means, the chances that both the first hold display corresponding to the first pass/fail related information and the second hold display corresponding to the second pass/fail related information are displayed increase. becomes. Therefore, it is easier to play the game if you win in the lottery that is triggered by the detection of the second condition fulfillment detection means than if you win in the lottery that is triggered by the detection of the second condition fulfillment detection means. Players who recognize that there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous to the player become fed up with the fact that the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the first pending display of the first pending display and the second pending display. There is a concern that pre-reading effects may increase the possibility of a decline in interest. In such a configuration, as described in the above means A-2, even after the pending pre-reading effect is derived for the first pending display, the target for deriving the pending pre-reading effect is the first pending display. By adopting a configuration in which the possibility of changing to the second hold display is left open, the above-mentioned problems can be significantly suppressed, and the effect of improving interest by performing a hold look-ahead effect can be achieved. It will be played more prominently.

Means A-4 (Control example 1, from back to front). Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with derivation information storage means for storing derivation information regarding the derivation status of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the win/fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means, a hold effect setting process is performed to set the hold lookahead effect corresponding to the win/fail related information, and the hold effect setting process The result is stored in the derived information storage means,
The derived information storage means includes:
A pending effect execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised, and
According to any one of the means A-1 to A-3, the method is configured to be able to set a pending effect reservation flag indicating that the right to derive the pending pre-read effect has been obtained and has not been exercised. Game machine.

According to means A-4, even if a pending pre-reading effect is not derived for the pending display at the time when the pending display is derived, a pending pre-reading effect is derived for the pending display at a subsequent timing. be able to. As a result, it is possible to sustain the player's expectation that a pending look-ahead effect may be derived until a variable display corresponding to the hold display is executed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest by performing a hold look-ahead effect. The effects will be even more effective.

Furthermore, as in the above means A-1, even if it is possible to change the pending display from which the pending pre-reading effect is derived, the content of the variable display corresponding to the pending display to be changed may not be the same as the pending pre-reading effect. It must be commensurate with the suggested content. In other words, for example, when trying to derive a pending prefetch effect for a pending display corresponding to the validity-related information already stored in a predetermined storage area of the suspension storage means, the validity-related information is referred to (again). Then, it is determined whether the content is worthy of deriving a pending pre-reading effect, and if the determination is negative, the derivation of the pending pre-reading effect is canceled or the content is stored in other storage areas of the pending storage means. Concerning the validity-related information stored in There is concern that the amount of processing required will become enormous.

In this regard, according to means A-4, by checking the pending performance reservation flag that can be set when the validity-related information is acquired, it is possible to determine whether validity-related information that can derive the pending pre-read performance is stored. can be easily understood. Therefore, there is no need to continue searching for appropriateness-related information that is suitable for blindly deriving a pending look-ahead effect, so in a configuration in which it is decided to perform a pending look-ahead effect later, the processing when the decision is made is possible. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming complicated and possibly resulting in processing failure.

In addition, corresponding to means A-2, "When the second propriety related information is acquired and it is decided to execute the suspension look-ahead effect, the corresponding second suspension display is displayed in the suspension display means, It is determined whether or not there is a possibility that it will be displayed together with the first suspension display, and if it is determined that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, the suspension effect reservation flag will be set higher than when it is determined that it will not be displayed. It is also possible to increase the rate at which ``is set''. In this case, it is possible to increase the chance that the most pleasing pattern among the prefetch target change effects, in which the target of the prefetch effect is switched from the first hold display to the second hold display, will occur.

Means A-5. The derivation information storage means is configured to exercise the right to derive the pending pre-read effect for the pending display corresponding to the validity-related information for which the pending effect reservation flag is set (to derive the pending pre-read effect). It is configured such that a reservation release flag can be set to indicate that the
When the holding performance setting process is performed, the holding performance execution flag, the holding performance reservation flag, and the reservation cancellation flag are set,
Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information regarding the mode of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the suspension effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity related information is newly stored, the mode of the suspension pre-reading effect is determined, and the mode information is is stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the production execution flag is set, and the suspension display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the suspension performance execution flag is set. On the other hand, a pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the pending effect reservation flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending pre-reading effect is determined, and the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the production reservation flag is set;
When the reservation release flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area where the validity related information is newly stored,
Stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the reservation effect reservation flag is set for the reservation display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the reservation release flag is set. The pending look-ahead effect of the mode determined based on the mode information set is derived (as a temporary hold look-ahead effect),
Thereafter, the hold display from which the (temporary) hold look-ahead effect is derived is set to the hold effect reservation flag from the hold display corresponding to the validity-related information in the storage area where the hold release flag has been set. Means A-4, characterized in that the display is changed to a hold display corresponding to the propriety-related information in the storage area that has been set (thereby, the temporary hold look-ahead effect is derived as a true hold look-ahead effect). The gaming machine described in .

According to means A-5, just by storing the validity-related information, regardless of its content, after the validity-related information for which the suspension performance reservation flag has been set, the validity-related information for which the suspension performance reservation flag has been set is always followed by the validity-related information for which the suspension performance reservation flag has been set. It is possible to avoid deriving a pending look-ahead effect for a corresponding pending display. Furthermore, if the validity-related information for which the hold performance execution flag is set is not stored after the validity-related information for which the hold performance reservation flag is set, the hold display corresponding to the validity-related information for which the hold performance reservation flag is set is displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid a situation where the pending look-ahead effect is not derived. As a result, after the pending pre-read effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information, the pending display for which the pending pre-read effect is derived is changed to the pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid having too many, too few, or too unambiguous presentation opportunities such as changing to an earlier hold display. As a result, it is possible to improve performance and gameplay.

In addition, when the reservation cancellation flag is set in a state where the reservation performance reservation flag is set in a plurality of pieces of success/failure related information stored in the reservation storage means, all the success/failure related information for which the reservation performance reservation flag is set are It may be configured such that a pending pre-reading effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the information, or a pending pre-reading effect is derived only for any of the validity related information for which the pending effect reservation flag is set ( For example, it is determined whether or not the hold performance reservation flag is set in order from the newly stored one to the first stored one, and when it is determined that the hold performance reservation flag is set, the hold performance reservation flag is set. The configuration may be such that the process for confirming the performance reservation flag is ended.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the target pending display can be changed until the pending pre-reading effect makes the final suggestion (which is considered to be a true pending pre-reading effect) is not limited to one time. , may be changed multiple times. It should be noted that it may be configured such that the higher the number of changes to the target pending display, the higher the expectation of the occurrence of the special gaming state, or if the rule is broken when the target pending display is changed (rare If a special change pattern is selected), the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special gaming state may be dramatically increased, or the occurrence may be determined.

In addition, when the hold performance execution flag is set with respect to the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the hold storage means, the win/fail related information for which the hold performance reservation flag has already been set. If it is determined that it exists, regarding the validity related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means (instead of the suspension performance reservation flag) The reservation release flag may be configured to be settable.

Means A-6 (Control example 2, front to back). Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with derivation information storage means for storing derivation information regarding the derivation status of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the win/fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means, a hold effect setting process is performed to set the hold lookahead effect corresponding to the win/fail related information, and the hold effect setting process The result is stored in the derived information storage means,
The derived information storage means includes:
a pending performance execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending pre-reading performance has been obtained and exercised;
A pre-change flag indicating that the right to derive the pending pre-reading effect has been obtained and exercised, but there is a possibility that the right will be transferred (that the target of the pending pre-reading effect may be changed);
The right to derive the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the pre-change flag is transferred (for the pending display corresponding to the validity-related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set) and a change destination flag indicating that the derived pending look-ahead effect is a change destination,
When the suspension performance setting process is performed, the suspension performance execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the change destination flag are set,
Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information regarding the mode of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the suspension effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity related information is newly stored, the mode of the suspension pre-reading effect is determined, and the mode information is is stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the production execution flag is set, and the suspension display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the suspension performance execution flag is set. On the other hand, a pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the before-change flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity-related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is determined, and the mode information is changed to the state before the change. with respect to the pending display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the flag has been set, and the validity related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag has been set; A pending look-ahead effect of the determined aspect is derived,
When the change destination flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area where the validity related information is newly stored,
The target of the pending look-ahead effect that has been derived for the pending display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set is the same as the one where the pre-change flag is set. The pending display corresponding to the pass/fail related information stored in a storage area is changed to the hold display corresponding to the pass/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the change destination flag is set. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-5, characterized by:

According to means A-6, the target of the pending look-ahead effect that was derived for the pending display corresponding to the previously stored validity-related information is changed to the pending display corresponding to the subsequently stored validity-related information. Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which it is feared that the target of the pending look-ahead performance will be changed, and it is possible to add a sense of tension to the progress of the game and to suppress feelings of fatigue. Furthermore, since the multiple hold displays are linked together, it is possible to improve the performance compared to, for example, a case where a hold look ahead effect is derived independently for each of the multiple hold displays.

Means A-7. The pending look-ahead effect suggests the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special game state according to its own aspect, and has a plurality of patterns ranked according to the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special game state,
When determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect, the upper limit of the rank is determined based on the validity related information, and the execution rank is determined from among the ranks below the upper limit rank,
When determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect regarding the pending display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set, when selecting the execution rank, In addition to the conditions that require the rank to be lower than the specified rank,
The suspension look-ahead effect in a mode corresponding to the execution rank is derived for the suspension display corresponding to the validity-related information stored in the storage area in which the pre-change flag is set. The gaming machine according to means A-6.

The predetermined suspension look-ahead effect derived for the suspension display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information stored in the predetermined storage area in which the pre-change flag is set is then used when another validity-related information is stored. When the change destination flag is set in the storage area, the target of the predetermined pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display corresponding to the other validity related information. For this reason, if the rank of a predetermined pending look-ahead effect mode is too high, the change destination flag cannot be set until the validity-related information corresponding to the rank is stored pending storage.

On the other hand, such concerns can be suppressed by setting the rank of the pending look-ahead effect of the pre-change flag as low as possible, as in method A-7, and the situation where the opportunities for the effect are extremely reduced can be avoided. can do. Furthermore, since the derived aspect rank is not high (above, the setting conditions for the pre-change flag are limited to some extent), the change destination flag is not set on, and information related to whether the pre-change flag is set on is correct or not. Even if the variable display corresponding to the above disappears, the game can be played without causing any discomfort.

Means A-8. If the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means corresponds to the occurrence of the special gaming state, the pre-change flag is not set regarding the win/fail related information. The gaming machine according to means A-6 or A-7, characterized by:

For example, the hold look-ahead effect that was derived in response to a predetermined hold display has been changed to correspond to a later hold display, but the hold look-ahead effect was originally derived from the predetermined A special gaming state has occurred in the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display (a special gaming state does not occur in the variable display corresponding to the pending display from which the pending pre-reading effect was derived after the change). There is a risk that the credibility of the information will be significantly reduced.

In this regard, according to means A-8, when setting the pre-change flag, the win/fail related information before the target of the pending look-ahead effect is changed is such that it will not be won in the win/fail lottery ("lost"). The above concerns can be dispelled by confirming that

In addition, in models where the judgment criteria for determining the mode of the pending effect execution flag may change before and after the special gaming state, "the validity-related information for which the pending effect execution flag is set indicates the occurrence of the special gaming state. It is desirable to stop setting the suspended performance execution flag with respect to the validity-related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspended storage means when it is determined that the suspended performance execution flag corresponds to the storage area of the suspended storage means.

Means A-9. When it is decided to change the pending display that is the target for deriving the pending pre-reading effect, while maintaining at least part of the aspect of the pending pre-reading effect before the target of the pending pre-reading effect is changed, The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-8, characterized in that the suspension display from which the suspension look-ahead effect is derived is changed.

According to means A-9, even if the pending display from which the pending look-ahead effect is derived is changed, at least a part of the mode of the hold look-ahead effect is maintained (for example, there is no change in the mode, and the display remains the same). Therefore, the hold look-ahead effect that had been compatible with the first hold display until now was changed to correspond to the second hold display instead of the first hold display. In other words, the content suggested by the hold look-ahead effect is not about the first variable display corresponding to the first hold display, but about the second variable display corresponding to the second hold display. can be made easier to understand.

Further, even if the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived is changed, it can be recognized that the mode of the hold look-ahead effect and, by extension, the suggested contents have been followed. In other words, for example, if the target of a pending look-ahead effect that increases the expectation level for the occurrence of a special gaming state is changed from the first pending display to the second pending display, the expectation level for the first pending display will decrease. become. Therefore, it is feared that if the suggested content of the pending look-ahead effect derived for the first pending display (for example, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state) is not guaranteed, players may feel anxious or distrustful. Ru. In this regard, with this means, even if the pending display from which the pending pre-reading performance is derived is changed, the pending pre-reading performance in the same manner is derived, so the pending display from which the pending pre-reading performance is derived is changed. However, when looking at the entire pending display displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the effects (such as the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state) due to the derivation of the pending prefetch effect remain unchanged. Therefore, for example, not only the pending display from which the pending pre-reading effect is derived is changed, but also the mode of the pending pre-reading effect is changed, so that the content suggested by the pending pre-reading effect becomes unclear, or the pending pre-reading effect is changed. The value of the content suggested by the production has changed, and where has the effect of the pending pre-reading production on the pending display that was targeted before the change (expectation level of special game state, etc.) gone? This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful or the like.

In addition, "If the mode of the hold look-ahead effect is configured to be changeable, and it is decided to change the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived, and to change the mode of the hold look-ahead effect. , the pending display from which the pending pre-reading performance is to be derived is changed while maintaining the form of the pending pre-reading effect before the targeted pending display is changed, and then the mode of the pending pre-reading effect is changed. may also be defined as "configured so that it changes." In other words, even in the above case, by once following the mode of the pending look-ahead effect before the change, it is possible to help the player understand that the mode of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed, and to suppress distrust, etc. I can do it. In addition, a change in the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect in which the target hold display is changed is such that the content suggested by the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect becomes advantageous to the player or changes that maintain the status quo. It may be limited. As described above, by associating the look-ahead target change performance with the change in the form (step-up) of the pending look-ahead performance, it is possible that a step-up in the hold look-ahead performance will occur just by the occurrence of the look-ahead target change performance. This can create a sense of expectation.

Furthermore, by configuring the mode of the pending look-ahead effect to be changeable, for example, when there are multiple modes of the pending look-ahead effect with different degrees of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state, a hold ahead-read effect with a low expectation level can be derived. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming depressed. In addition, ``If a lookahead target change effect that changes the target of the hold lookahead effect is performed, the proportion of hold change effects that change the aspect of the hold lookahead effect will be higher than when it is not performed. It may also be expressed as "something that can be enhanced or something that must be done." In this case, the value of the prefetch target change effect can be further enhanced.

Means A-10. In the suspension display means, a transition for visualizing a process (in the middle) in which a suspension display from which the suspension look-ahead performance is derived is changed from a suspension display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information to another suspension display. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to derive a performance.

For example, if a pending look-ahead effect that was derived to a predetermined hold display suddenly disappears, and a hold look-ahead effect is suddenly derived to another hold display, the previous hold look-ahead effect and the subsequent hold look-ahead effect are different. There is a concern that they may be perceived as independent (completely unrelated). In particular, if there is even a slight time lag between the time when the pending look-ahead effect that was derived from a predetermined hold display is deleted and the time when the hold look-ahead effect is derived from another hold display, or when the predetermined hold display is After deriving the derived pending look-ahead effect to another hold display, if you delete the hold look-ahead effect that had been derived to a predetermined hold display (there is a period in which it is duplicated), , such concerns are made more prominent.

On the other hand, according to means A-10, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from the source pending display where the target of the pending look-ahead performance is changed to the destination pending display by the connecting performance. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice that the target of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed.

In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, at a stage before the change in the pending look-ahead effect, a character etc. is displayed on the change source hold display and the change target hold display, and the change in the hold look ahead effect is performed. In response to the pending display of the change source, display as if the pending prefetch effect has been sent out, and in response to the pending display of the change destination, display as if the pending prefetch effect had been received. You can also use it as In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, a display that allows you to see the trajectory of the movement of the mode of the pending look-ahead effect from the hold display that is the source of the change in the hold look-ahead effect to the hold display that is the destination of the change (for example, a character is It may also be configured so that the user is shown carrying the device.

Means A-11. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
Means A-1 to A-10, characterized in that the display control means is configured to be able to change the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived based on an operation on the operating means. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to means A-11, since the "pre-read target change performance" is performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to arouse more interest in the "pre-read target change performance", and It is possible to prevent a situation where the "look-ahead target change effect" is overlooked.

Means A-12. The suspension display means includes an approach detection means capable of detecting contact or proximity of an object to a portion where each suspension display is displayed,
According to any one of the means A-1 to A-11, the holding display from which the holding look-ahead effect is derived can be changed based on the detection information of the approach detection means. Game machine.

According to means A-12, since the "pre-read target change effect" is performed based on the player's operation on the approach detection means, it is possible to arouse more interest in the "pre-read target change effect" and , it is possible to prevent a situation where the "prefetch target change effect" is overlooked. In particular, since the player appears to be touching the pending display directly with his/her hand, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the "look-ahead target change effect". Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations where the player is confused by such an operation and the time runs out, or where the game tempo becomes slow due to setting a relatively long time for such an operation. In particular, when "prefetch target change effect" is derived simultaneously for multiple pending displays (selecting one from among multiple), it is possible to select the target pending display more clearly and reliably. It can be made possible to do so.

Means A-13. The hold display means includes:
a suspension corresponding area from which the suspension display corresponding to the validity-related information for which the fluctuation display of the corresponding identification information has not yet been performed;
Means A-1 to A-1 characterized in that an execution corresponding area is provided from which the pending display corresponding to the validity-related information is derived while the fluctuation display of the corresponding identification information is being executed. The gaming machine described in any of A-12.

According to means A-13, in the hold display means, for example, when a change in the hold look-ahead effect is performed for the corresponding hold display immediately before the change display of the corresponding identification information is executed, the confirmation It is possible to avoid a situation where it is difficult to confirm (actually cannot be confirmed). In addition, when displaying changes in identification information, it is possible to check whether or not a hold look-ahead effect has been derived for the hold display corresponding to the change display, as well as the type of hold look-ahead effect (suggested content). By combining the contents of the look-ahead performance and the performance etc. during the variable display of identification information, it is possible to make various guesses and enjoy the variable display even more.

In addition, when the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect has been derived moves to the execution compatible area, an effect in which the mode of the hold display changes may be derived. In addition, when a pending display from which a pending look-ahead effect has been derived is moved to an execution-compatible area, only the mode of the pending look-ahead effect that has been derived for the held display is displayed in the execution-compatible area. You can.

Means A-14. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13, characterized in that the timing at which the suspension look-ahead performance is derived in the suspension display means is only the timing at which the suspension display increases.

According to means A-14, the timing at which the pending pre-read effect is newly derived is limited to the timing at which the pending display is newly displayed, thereby making it easier to notice that the pending pre-read effect has been derived. I can do it. Therefore, for example, in a state where only the pending display for which the pending look-ahead effect has not been derived is displayed, even though it is not the timing for the pending display to increase (new validity-related information is suspended and stored), suddenly a predetermined Compared to a configuration in which a phenomenon occurs in which a pending look-ahead effect is derived in response to a pending display, this prevents a situation where the pending look-ahead effect becomes confusing and difficult to understand (making it difficult for players to get involved). be able to. Moreover, if the number of pending displays does not increase, the number of pending displays that are a mode of the pending pre-read performance will not increase, so it is possible to further improve the player's motivation to increase the number of pending displays (to start the ball).

Means A-15. The mode of the pending look-ahead performance is such that the win/fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means is different from the win/fail related information that determines whether or not a winner will be won in the win/fail lottery depending on the gaming state, and the gaming state changes. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-14, characterized in that the setting is based on a determination result as to whether the result of the winning lottery is the same or the winning/failure related information. .

For example, the probability of winning a lottery or the meaning of the pending look-ahead effect may change at a predetermined timing (for example, before or after a special gaming state, etc.), and in that case, the hold look-ahead effect that was displayed before the predetermined timing If the performance is continued as it is after a predetermined timing, there is a concern that a contradiction may occur. For example, in a configuration where the probability of winning in a win/fail lottery is changed before and after a special gaming state, before the special gaming state, it was supposed to be won in the special gaming state, but by inserting the special gaming state, If a pending pre-reading effect indicating the occurrence of a special gaming state is continuously derived after the special gaming state for a pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information that no longer wins in the gaming state, the pending pre-reading effect will not be displayed. Trouble may occur if the special gaming state that was supposed to be given is not given.

In this regard, according to means A-15, even if the gaming state (gaming mode) changes between the time when the success/failure related information is stored and the time when the fluctuating display corresponding to the win/fail related information is executed, it is handled. The mode of the pending look-ahead effect can be set in advance so that it can be performed (without causing any trouble). Therefore, when the gaming state changes, or when a timing when a change is likely to occur occurs, it is possible to avoid the situation of having to reconfirm the mode of the pending look-ahead effect or setting it again from scratch. I can do it. Further, for example, when the meaning (interpretation) of the win/fail related information changes due to a change in the gaming state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the mode of the pending look-ahead presentation is forcibly changed.

Incidentally, after the end of the special game state, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect may be reset. In this case, even if various performances (for example, complex performances such as eliminating the correspondence between the pending pre-reading effect and the pending display) are performed using the pending pre-reading effect in the pre-game state, It can be reset after the special gaming state.

In addition, "at the time when the said success/failure related information is held and stored, a first win/failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the said win/failure related information acquired by said information acquisition means is one that will win in said win/fail lottery. ,
a result storage process for storing the result of the first validity determination process;
Prior to execution of the variable display in the variable display means, a second validity determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the first validity determination process;
It is possible to execute a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second validity determination process,
a first game mode in which the win/fail lottery is performed with a first probability predetermined as the probability of winning the special game state;
a second game mode in which the win/fail lottery is held with a second probability of winning the special game state that is higher than the first probability;
In the first validity determination process,
a common winning value determination process that determines whether the win/fail related information is a win in the win/fail lottery in either the first game mode or the second game mode;
Limited winning value determination for determining whether the win/fail related information is a value that results in a win in the win/fail lottery in the second game mode, and a value that results in a failure in the win/fail lottery in the first game mode. processing and
a first determination result setting process that sets the first validity determination result holding means to a positive determination state when the common winning value determination process makes a positive determination;
and a second determination result setting process that sets the second win/fail determination result holding means to a positive determination state when an affirmative determination is made in the limited winning value determination process, in either the first game mode or the second game mode. Execute even if there is
(In the second validity determination process,
Determining whether or not the mode is the first game mode, and mode determination processing whether or not the mode is the second game mode;
a first game mode propriety determination process for determining whether or not the first propriety determination result holding means is in an affirmative determination state when the mode determination process determines that the mode is the first game mode;
When it is determined that the mode is the second game mode in the mode determination process, a step for determining whether or not the first validity determination result holding means or the second validity determination result holding means is in an affirmative determination state. (2) A configuration that executes a process for determining validity during a gaming mode,
The mode of the pending look-ahead effect may be set based on the determination state of the first validity determination result holding means or the second validity determination result holding means.

Means A-16. The hold display means includes:
a first reservation display means capable of deriving a reservation display indicating the number of storage areas of the reservation storage means in which the validity related information is stored;
a second suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-15, characterized in that the suspension look-ahead effect can be derived for the second suspension display of the second suspension display means.

According to means A-16, even if various effects are performed in the second hold display means and a situation occurs where it becomes somewhat difficult to understand the correspondence between the hold display and the held variable display, the first hold display means Whether or not the variable display is on hold can be surely grasped by the hold display means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom and performance of the reservation pre-read performance in the second reservation display means.

Means A-17. When the prefetch target change effect is derived, the prefetch change suggestion effect that suggests that the prefetch target change effect is derived before the prefetch target change effect is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-16, characterized in that:

According to means A-17, it is possible to more actively emphasize that the prefetch target change effect is derived, and it is possible to make it easier for the user to visually recognize the prefetch target change effect from the beginning.

Means A-18. The prefetching target change effect targets the pending prefetching effect that has been derived for at least the first pending display to be consumed among the pending displays for which the pending prefetching effect has been derived in the hold display means. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-17, characterized in that the gaming machine is played as a game machine.

According to means A-18, the look-ahead target change effect is performed not for the hold display with the hold look-ahead effect that is to be consumed first, but for the hold display with the hold look-ahead effect that is to be consumed later. , the player's interest tends toward the pending display with a pending look-ahead effect that will be performed later, and the player will lose interest in the hold display with a pending look-ahead effect that will be consumed first (the value of the hold look-ahead effect is It is possible to avoid situations such as items running out or being wasted. As a result, the user can sequentially enjoy the variable display corresponding to the hold display with the hold look-ahead effect.

Means A-19. The pending look-ahead effect suggests the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special game state according to its own aspect, and has a plurality of patterns ranked according to the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special game state,
When the pre-fetching target change effect is performed, the pending pre-reading is derived for the pending display to be consumed first among the pending displays from which the pending pre-reading effect is derived in the pending display means. The gaming machine according to means A-18, characterized in that the performance mode is configured to have the highest rank among the pending pre-read effects derived by the pending display means.

According to means A-19, it is possible to reliably enliven the variable display corresponding to the hold display with the hold look-ahead effect that will be consumed first.

B. A pachinko machine is a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a firing means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and a variable display means A variable display is made to show the results of the lottery (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, many devices have been configured so that if a lottery is held while a variable display is being displayed, the variable display corresponding to the lottery is suspended; generally, the variable display is suspended. There is provided a hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that a hold is being held. Further, before the variable display is executed, there are some cases in which an effect suggesting the content of a predetermined variable display (so-called "suspended look-ahead effect") is performed.

In addition, a low probability mode in which you win with a first probability in a win/fail lottery and a high probability mode in which you win with a second probability higher than the first probability in a win/fail lottery are set, and a predetermined starting ball entry method On the other hand, it is known that a game ball has a high entry ball mode in which it is easy to enter a game ball, and a low entry ball mode in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball, or a low ball entry mode in which it is impossible to enter a ball. Furthermore, it is known that the period of a specific game mode that has a high added value for the player, such as a high probability mode or a high ball entry mode, is set until a specified number of variable displays are performed.

By the way, even though the aspect of the predetermined pending look-ahead performance is the same when it is performed in the above-mentioned "specific game mode" and when it is performed in the other "normal game mode," the value (for example, There are many different types with different meanings (e.g., degree of expectation of winning) and meanings. For example, during a specific game mode, a special game state may occur just by deriving the pending look-ahead effect A, or it may occur with a fairly high probability (for example, the winning expectation is 70% to 95%). , in the normal mode, there is a higher possibility that the special game state will not occur (for example, the expectation of winning in the special game state is 25% to 45%), and during the specific game mode, the pending look-ahead effect B is derived. When the occurrence of a special game state is taught through a variable display, a specific game mode is given after the special game state ends, whereas a specific game mode is not necessarily given in the normal game mode. Examples include.

For this reason, immediately after switching from a specific game mode to the normal game mode, the hold display means generally displays a hold display corresponding to the variable display executed in the specific game mode, and a hold display that corresponds to the variable display executed in the normal game mode. In a state where the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed together, if a pending look-ahead effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the normal gaming mode, the pending display corresponding to the specific gaming mode There is a risk that the user may end up having to digest the variable display corresponding to the pending display, feeling depressed and wishing that the pending look-ahead effect had been derived.

On the other hand, for example, a hold display corresponding to the variable display immediately after switching from a specific game mode to the normal game mode (a hold display corresponding to the normal game mode that is displayed at the same time as a hold display corresponding to the specific game mode) ), it is conceivable to perform control such as not to derive the pending look-ahead effect. However, in this case, there is a concern that not only will the performance opportunity be destroyed, but also the amount of processing will increase, resulting in a vicious cycle.

Note that the above-mentioned problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more reliably improve interest by performing a reservation look-ahead effect. It is in.

Means B-1. a condition fulfillment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the condition establishment detection means detects, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state is generated based on the result of the lottery. main control means;
variable display means capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner;
A gaming machine comprising: a display control means capable of variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means and then stopping displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning lottery;
Information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail related information regarding the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
a retention storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the validity-related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
comprising a suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
A first gaming mode and a second gaming mode are set as gaming states in which the win/fail lottery is performed,
In the suspension display means, depending on the mode of the suspension display, it is possible to grasp the number of storage areas of the suspension storage means in which the validity-related information is stored, and to display information stored in each storage area of the suspension storage means. The validity-related information that is displayed is the (planned) first correspondence validity-related information for which the corresponding identification information will be displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first game mode, and the corresponding identification in the second game mode. It is configured such that it is possible to identify which of the (planned) second response appropriateness related information is to be displayed in a changing manner;
A mode of the pending display corresponding to predetermined propriety related information stored in the pending storage means is a specific mode that suggests the content of the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display. configured to be derivable,
The predetermined suspension look-ahead effect is derived for a second correspondence suspension display corresponding to the second correspondence validity related information rather than for the first correspondence suspension display corresponding to the first correspondence validity related information. It is configured such that the value of the predetermined pending look-ahead performance is higher when it is derived,
In a state where both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed in the pending display means, after the pending pre-reading effect is derived for the first corresponding pending display, the pending pre-reading effect is A gaming machine characterized in that a suspension display from which a performance is derived can be changed from the first corresponding suspension display to the second corresponding suspension display.

According to means B-1, for example, in a state where both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed in the pending display means, the pending pre-reading that has been derived for the first corresponding pending display It is configured such that it is possible to stop deriving the effect A for the first corresponding pending display and derive it for the second corresponding pending display (prefetch target change effect). In other words, for the player, it is more desirable for the player to derive the hold lookahead effect from the second corresponding hold display than from the first corresponding hold display. In a state where both are displayed, the hold look-ahead effect is derived for the first corresponding hold display, causing the player to say things like, ``I wish the target (timing) of the hold look-ahead effect was a little different.'' There is a concern that he may harbor feelings.

In this respect, even after the hold look-ahead effect is derived for the first corresponding hold display, there remains a possibility that the target of the hold look ahead effect will be changed to the second corresponding hold display. It is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned problems such as the game becoming depressed when it is derived for the corresponding pending display, and it is possible to proceed with the game while expecting that the pending pre-reading effect will be derived for the second corresponding pending display. can. In particular, in a state where the second corresponding pending display is executed in advance of the first corresponding pending display, in order to derive the pending prefetching effect to the second corresponding pending display, first, a new pending display must be performed. Since it is assumed that a pending look-ahead effect is derived for the first corresponding hold display that is displayed, the significance of ``the derivation of a hold look-ahead effect'' is simply ``something that is desirable for the player.'' It can be performed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the negative aspects of performing the pending pre-reading effect, and by performing the pending pre-reading effect, it is possible to more reliably improve interest.

In addition, in a state where both the first response hold display and the second response hold display are displayed, the hold lookahead effect is not derived for the second response hold display, and the hold lookahead effect is derived for the first response hold display. In order to avoid a situation where the first response pending display and the second response pending display are both displayed, the pending prefetch effect will not be derived for the first response pending display. There is no need to perform control (prohibition processing) such as Therefore, it is possible to avoid a vicious cycle that does not contribute to the improvement of gameplay or performance, such as intentionally destroying performance opportunities such as deriving a pending look-ahead performance to the first corresponding pending display, or increasing the processing amount for this purpose. be able to.

Furthermore, when both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed, there is a possibility that the pending pre-reading effect displayed on the first corresponding pending display will change its target to the second corresponding pending display. When the second game mode ends and the first game mode starts, the player can recognize this, and when the second game mode ends and the first game mode starts, it is possible to say, ``I want to display as much as possible the first corresponding pending display that can be displayed together with the second corresponding pending display.'' You can increase your desire to play.

It should be noted that "the value of the predetermined pending pre-read performance increases" includes the meaning that even if the form of the predetermined pending pre-read performance is the same, it will have a more favorable meaning for the player. For example, in the first game mode, it suggests that the expectation of winning the special game state is about 35%, and in the second game mode, it suggests that the expectation of winning the special game state is about 80%. In the first game mode, the expectation of winning the special game state is only improved compared to the case where the special game state is not derived, but in the second game mode, when the special game state occurs, Examples include a configuration that suggests that a special gaming state of a type more advantageous to the player will be provided.

Further, "in a state where both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed in the pending display means, after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first corresponding pending display, "The hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived is configured to be changeable from the first corresponding hold display to the second corresponding hold display." After the suspension look-ahead effect is derived, while erasing the hold look-ahead effect regarding the first corresponding hold display, at least part of the aspect of the hold look-ahead effect that was derived for the first corresponding hold display. or the same aspect of the pending pre-reading effect (the same (same) pending pre-reading effect as the pending pre-reading effect that was derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information) or the more valuable pending pre-reading effect) can be derived in response to the second corresponding pending display displayed on the pending display means.

In addition, the mode of the "suspended look-ahead effect" is not limited to a pattern in which predetermined information regarding the variable display is suggested from the beginning of the derivation. There are two cases in which a pending look-ahead effect is derived in a manner that makes a predetermined suggestion. It may be configured such that there is a case in which the pending look-ahead effect is simply erased instead of being erased due to the change.

It should be noted that "the second game mode is a state in which the probability of winning in the win/fail lottery is higher than that in the first game mode", or "the second game mode is a state in which the probability of winning in the lottery is higher than that in the first game mode", or "the second game mode is a state in which the probability of winning in the lottery is higher than that in the first game mode", a game area provided on the front side, into which a game ball fired by the launching means is guided; a starting ball entering means into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter; and a ball entering the starting ball entering means. and a starting ball entering detection means as the condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting a game ball that has been played, and the winning/failure lottery is performed when the starting ball entering detecting means detects the second ball. The game mode may be a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the starting ball entry means than in the first game mode, or "in the second game mode, the first game It may be a state in which a performance that is not derived or has a low probability of being derived is likely to be derived in the mode, or a state in which the pending pre-read performance is derived for the pending display corresponding to the second game mode. In this case, a benefit advantageous to the player is awarded or is likely to be awarded, and when the suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the suspension display corresponding to the first gaming mode. , the bonus may not be awarded, or the bonus may be configured such that the possibility of the bonus being awarded is lower than in the first game mode.

Means B-2. The condition fulfillment detection means includes a first condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied, and a second condition establishment detection means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied,
Regarding the distribution of the type of the special gaming state that is awarded when a winner is won in the win/fail lottery conducted in response to the detection by the condition fulfillment detection means, the distribution corresponds to the detection by the second condition fulfillment detection means. is configured such that a type more advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than the allocation corresponding to the detection by the first condition fulfillment detection means,
The gaming machine according to means B-1, characterized in that in the second gaming mode, the second condition is more easily met than in the first gaming mode.

According to means B-2, in the second game mode, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied and an advantageous type of special game state is more likely to be provided than in the first game mode. Therefore, in a state where both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed, the gameplay becomes more reliable, such as expecting the pending pre-read effect to be derived from the second corresponding pending display. Therefore, the effects of the above means B-1 can be further exhibited.

Means B-3. The suspension display means defines a boundary between a range from which the suspension display scheduled to be executed in the first gaming mode is derived and a range from which the suspension display scheduled to be executed in the second gaming mode is derived. The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2, characterized in that the boundary teaching to be taught is derived without changing the mode of the reservation display.

According to means B-3, by visually checking the hold display means, it is possible to more reliably grasp whether the variable display corresponding to the hold display is to be performed in the first game mode or the second game mode.

In addition, for example, when teaching whether the corresponding variable display is to be performed in the first game mode or the second game mode by changing the mode of the pending display, the pattern of the pending display mode becomes more complicated ( There is a risk that it may be difficult to understand the correspondence between various types of pending displays, including the aspects of pre-read effects, and various effects, etc.). Furthermore, the special game state is set in a state where both the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the schedule to be performed in the first game mode and the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the schedule to be performed in the second game mode are displayed. If this occurs and the gaming mode is changed as a result, the correspondence between the gaming mode and the pending display will change after the special gaming state ends, resulting in the pending display before the special gaming state being inconsistent. It ends up being what I was doing.

In this regard, as in the present means B-3, the above-mentioned problems can be eliminated by displaying the boundary regardless of the mode of the hold display, and the game can be easily understood and progressed smoothly. . The boundary display includes, in the hold display area, a range where a hold display scheduled to be executed in the first game mode is derived, and a range where a hold display scheduled to be executed in the second game mode is derived. For example, the background color may be different, or a line or the like may be displayed at the boundary of the range.

Means B-4. Means B-1 to B-1 are characterized in that they are configured such that even if the suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the second corresponding suspension display, there is a possibility that it may be changed to the first corresponding suspension display. The gaming machine described in any of B-3.

According to means B-4, even if the suspension look-ahead effect is derived in the second correspondence hold display, there is a possibility that the derivation target of the hold look-ahead effect is changed from the second correspondence hold display to the first correspondence hold display. This makes it possible to add a sense of tension to the gameplay. For example, if a pending look-ahead effect is derived for a desired pending display, you may wish to eagerly check and enjoy the behavior of the pending display, such as wanting the corresponding variable display to be digested without changing the derivation target. I can do it. Moreover, if a predetermined condition is cleared, it is possible to add gameplay features such as being exempted from changes that are undesirable for the player, and it is possible to increase the points for adding intonation to the game. In addition, if the derivation target of the pending look-ahead effect does not change during the specified number of variable displays, it may be configured so that it does not change after that, or the predetermined effect may be derived as a result of a predetermined lottery. In this case, it may be configured such that changing the derivation target of the predetermined pending prefetch effect is prohibited.

Means B-5. When it is decided to change the pending display that is the target for deriving the pending pre-reading effect, while maintaining at least a part of the aspect of the pending pre-reading effect before the target of the pending pre-reading effect is changed, The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, characterized in that the suspension display from which the suspension look-ahead effect is derived is changed.

According to means B-5, even if the pending display from which the pending pre-read effect is derived is changed, at least a part of the mode of the pending pre-read effect is maintained (for example, the mode does not change and remains the same). Therefore, the pending look-ahead effect that was previously compatible with the first pending display was changed to correspond to the second pending display instead of the first pending display. In other words, the content suggested by the pending look-ahead effect is not about the first variable display corresponding to the first corresponding pending display, but about the second variable display corresponding to the second corresponding pending display. can be made easier to understand.

In addition, even if the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived is changed, it can be recognized that the mode of the hold look-ahead effect and, by extension, the suggested contents have been followed. In other words, for example, if the target of a pending look-ahead effect that increases the expectation level for the occurrence of a special gaming state is changed from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display, the expectation level for the first corresponding pending display will decrease. become. Therefore, there is a concern that players may feel uneasy or distrustful if the suggested content of the pending look-ahead effect that was derived for the first corresponding pending display (for example, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state) is not guaranteed. Ru. In this regard, with this means, even if the pending display from which the pending pre-reading performance is derived is changed, the same type of pending pre-reading performance is derived, so the pending display from which the pending pre-reading performance is derived is changed. However, when looking at the entire pending display displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the effects (such as the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state) due to the derivation of the pending prefetch effect remain unchanged. Therefore, for example, not only the pending display from which the pending pre-reading effect is derived is changed, but also the mode of the pending pre-reading effect is changed, so that the content suggested by the pending pre-reading effect becomes unclear, or the pending pre-reading effect is changed. The value of the suggested content of the production has changed, and where has the effect of the pending pre-reading production on the pending display that was targeted before the change (expectation level of special game state, etc.) gone? This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful or the like.

In addition, "If the mode of the hold look-ahead effect is configured to be changeable, and it is decided to change the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived, and to change the mode of the hold look-ahead effect. , the pending display from which the pending pre-reading performance is to be derived is changed while maintaining the form of the pending pre-reading effect before the targeted pending display is changed, and then the mode of the pending pre-reading effect is changed. may also be defined as "configured so that it changes." In other words, even in the above case, by once following the mode of the pending look-ahead effect before the change, it is possible to help the player understand that the mode of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed, and to suppress distrust, etc. I can do it. In addition, a change in the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect in which the target hold display is changed is such that the content suggested by the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect becomes advantageous to the player or changes that maintain the status quo. It may be limited. As described above, by associating the look-ahead target change performance with the change in the form (step-up) of the pending look-ahead performance, it is possible that a step-up in the hold look-ahead performance will occur just by the occurrence of the look-ahead target change performance. This can create a sense of expectation.

Furthermore, by configuring the mode of the pending look-ahead performance to be changeable, for example, when there are multiple modes of the pending look-ahead performance with different expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state, a hold look-ahead performance with a low expectation level can be derived. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming depressed. In addition, ``When a look-ahead target change effect that changes the target of the hold look-ahead effect is performed, compared to a case where it is not performed, the rate at which a hold change effect that changes the aspect of the hold look-ahead effect is performed is higher. It may also be expressed as "something that can be enhanced or something that must be done." In this case, the value of the prefetch target change effect can be further enhanced.

Means B-6 (Control Example 1). Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with derivation information storage means for storing derivation information regarding the derivation status of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the win/fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means, a hold effect setting process is performed to set the hold lookahead effect corresponding to the win/fail related information, and the hold effect setting process The result is stored in the derived information storage means,
The derived information storage means includes:
A pending effect execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised, and
It is characterized by being configured to be able to set a pending performance reservation flag indicating that the right to derive the pending pre-read performance has been acquired and not exercised. The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-5.

According to means B-6, even if a pending pre-reading effect is not derived for the pending display at the time when the pending display is derived, a pending pre-reading effect is derived for the pending display at a subsequent timing. be able to. As a result, it is possible to sustain the player's expectation that a pending look-ahead effect may be derived until a variable display corresponding to the hold display is executed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest by performing a hold look-ahead effect. The effects will be even more effective.

Further, as in the above means B-1, even if it is possible to change the pending display from which the pending pre-reading effect is derived, the content of the variable display corresponding to the pending display to be changed may not be the same as the pending pre-reading effect. It must be commensurate with the suggested content. In other words, for example, when trying to derive a pending prefetch effect for a pending display corresponding to the validity-related information already stored in a predetermined storage area of the suspension storage means, the validity-related information is referred to (again). Then, it is determined whether the content is worthy of deriving a pending pre-reading effect, and if the determination is negative, the derivation of the pending pre-reading effect is canceled or the content is stored in other storage areas of the pending storage means. Regarding the validity-related information stored in , there is a huge amount of processing when the validity-related information is acquired, such as continuing the process of checking the content until something worthy of deriving the pending look-ahead effect is found. There are concerns that this will become the case.

In this regard, according to means B-6, by checking the pending performance reservation flag that can be set when the validity-related information is acquired, it is possible to determine whether validity-related information that can derive the pending pre-read performance is stored. can be easily understood. Therefore, there is no need to continue searching for appropriateness-related information that is suitable for blindly deriving a pending look-ahead effect, so in a configuration in which it is decided to perform a pending look-ahead effect later, the processing when the decision is made is possible. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming complicated and possibly resulting in processing failure.

In addition, if there is a pending pre-read effect (pending pre-read confirmation effect) that teaches that a predetermined state (special gaming state, etc.) will be granted, if the pending pre-read confirmation effect has already been derived, further It may be configured such that another pending look-ahead effect is not derived.

Means B-7. The derivation information storage means is configured to exercise the right to derive the pending pre-read effect for the pending display corresponding to the validity-related information for which the pending effect reservation flag is set (to derive the pending pre-read effect). It is configured such that a reservation release flag can be set to indicate that the
When the holding performance setting process is performed, the holding performance execution flag, the holding performance reservation flag, and the reservation cancellation flag are set,
Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information regarding the mode of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the suspension effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity related information is newly stored, the mode of the suspension pre-reading effect is determined, and the mode information is is stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the production execution flag is set, and the suspension display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the suspension performance execution flag is set. On the other hand, a pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the pending effect reservation flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending pre-reading effect is determined, and the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the production reservation flag is set;
When the reservation release flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area where the validity related information is newly stored,
Stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the reservation effect reservation flag is set for the reservation display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the reservation release flag is set. The pending look-ahead effect of the mode determined based on the mode information set is derived (as a temporary hold look-ahead effect),
Thereafter, the hold display from which the (temporary) hold look-ahead effect is derived is set to the hold effect reservation flag from the hold display corresponding to the validity-related information in the storage area where the hold release flag has been set. Means B-6 characterized in that the suspension display is changed to a suspension display corresponding to the propriety-related information in the storage area that has been set (thereby, the tentative suspension pre-reading effect is derived as a true pending pre-reading effect). The gaming machine described in .

According to means B-7, just by storing the validity-related information, regardless of its content, after the validity-related information for which the suspension performance reservation flag is set, the validity-related information for which the suspension performance reservation flag is set is always followed by the validity-related information for which the suspension performance reservation flag is set. It is possible to avoid deriving a pending look-ahead effect for a corresponding pending display. Furthermore, if the validity-related information for which the hold performance execution flag is set is not stored after the validity-related information for which the hold performance reservation flag is set, the hold display corresponding to the validity-related information for which the hold performance reservation flag is set is displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid a situation where the pending look-ahead effect is not derived. As a result, after the pending pre-read effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information, the pending display for which the pending pre-read effect is derived is changed to the pending display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid having too many, too few, or too unambiguous presentation opportunities such as changing to an earlier hold display. As a result, it is possible to improve performance and gameplay.

In addition, when the reservation release flag is set in a state where the reservation performance reservation flag is set in a plurality of pieces of success/failure related information stored in the reservation storage means, all the success/failure related information for which the reservation performance reservation flag is set are set. It may be configured such that a pending pre-reading effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the information, or the pending pre-reading effect is derived only for any of the validity related information for which the pending presentation reservation flag is set ( For example, it is determined whether or not the hold performance reservation flag is set in order from the newly stored one to the first stored one, and when it is determined that the hold performance reservation flag is set, the hold performance reservation flag is set. The configuration may be such that the process for confirming the performance reservation flag is ended.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the target pending display can be changed until the pending pre-reading effect makes the final suggestion (which is considered to be a true pending pre-reading effect) is not limited to one time. , may be changed multiple times. It should be noted that it may be configured such that the higher the number of changes to the target pending display, the higher the expectation of the occurrence of the special gaming state, or if the rule is broken when the target pending display is changed (rare If a special change pattern is selected), the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special gaming state may be dramatically increased, or the occurrence may be determined.

In addition, when the said hold effect execution flag is set regarding the said win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of said hold storage means, said win/fail related information for which said hold effect reservation flag has already been set. If it is determined that it exists, regarding the validity related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means (instead of the suspension performance reservation flag) The reservation release flag may be configured to be settable.

Means B-8. At the stage where the second validity related information is acquired, determining whether or not there is a possibility that the corresponding second response pending display is displayed together with the first response pending display in the pending display means; Means B-6 or B-, characterized in that when it is determined that there is a possibility of display, the rate at which the suspended performance reservation flag is set is increased compared to when it is determined that there is no display. 7. The gaming machine described in 7.

According to the means B-8, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of the most pleasant pattern among the prefetching target changing effects, such as switching the target of the pending prefetching effect from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display.

In addition, in the configuration in which the transition to the first gaming mode occurs when the variable display of the identification information is performed a first prescribed number of times in the second gaming mode,
a remaining measurement means capable of measuring the remaining number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner that can be executed in the second gaming mode;
end detection means for detecting that the remaining number of times the variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining number measuring means has become equal to or less than a second prescribed number;
When the second validity-related information is acquired in a situation where it is determined that the remaining number of times the variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining measurement means is less than or equal to the second specified number of times and is greater than or equal to one time. In this case, the rate at which the suspended performance reservation flag is set may be increased compared to the case where the second validity related information is acquired in a situation where no determination is made.

Further, "in a configuration in which the variable display of the identification information is performed a first specified number of times in the second gaming mode, the transition to the first gaming mode is performed,
a remaining measurement means capable of measuring the remaining number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner that can be executed in the second gaming mode;
end detection means for detecting that the remaining number of times the variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining number measuring means has become equal to or less than a second prescribed number;
In a state where the suspension performance reservation flag is set in the suspension storage means,
In a situation where it is determined that the remaining number of times of fluctuation display of the identification information measured by the remaining number measuring means is less than or equal to the second prescribed number of times and greater than or equal to one, the said winning lottery is determined to be unsuccessful. When the second win/fail related information is acquired, the rate at which the reservation cancellation flag is set is higher than in the case where the second win/fail related information is acquired, which results in a failure of winning in the win/fail lottery in a situation where it is not determined. It is also possible to say "to be enhanced."

Means B-9 (Control Example 2). Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with derivation information storage means for storing derivation information regarding the derivation status of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the win/fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means, a hold effect setting process is performed to set the hold lookahead effect corresponding to the win/fail related information, and the hold effect setting process The result is stored in the derived information storage means,
The derived information storage means includes:
a pending performance execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending pre-reading performance has been obtained and exercised;
A pre-change flag indicating that the right to derive the pending pre-reading effect has been obtained and exercised, but there is a possibility that the right will be transferred (that the target of the pending pre-reading effect may be changed);
The right to derive the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the pre-change flag is transferred (for the pending display corresponding to the validity-related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set) and a change destination flag indicating that the derived pending look-ahead effect is a change destination,
When the suspension performance setting process is performed, the suspension performance execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the change destination flag are set,
Each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information regarding the mode of the suspension prefetch effect,
When the suspension effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity related information is newly stored, the mode of the suspension pre-reading effect is determined, and the mode information is is stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the production execution flag is set, and the suspension display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the suspension performance execution flag is set. On the other hand, a pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the before-change flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the validity-related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is determined, and the mode information is changed to the state before the change. with respect to the pending display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the flag has been set, and the validity related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag has been set; A pending look-ahead effect of the determined aspect is derived,
When the change destination flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area where the validity related information is newly stored,
The target of the pending look-ahead effect that has been derived for the pending display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set is the same as the one where the pre-change flag is set. The pending display corresponding to the pass/fail related information stored in a storage area is changed to the hold display corresponding to the pass/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the change destination flag is set. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-8, characterized by:

According to means B-9, the target of the pending look-ahead effect that has been derived for the pending display corresponding to the previously stored validity-related information is changed to the pending display corresponding to the subsequently stored validity-related information. Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which it is feared that the target of the pending look-ahead performance will be changed, and it is possible to add a sense of tension to the progress of the game and to suppress feelings of fatigue. For example, in a state where a pending look-ahead effect has already been derived for a predetermined pending display, information more advantageous to the player (for example, the provision of a special gaming state, etc.) may be determined for a subsequent pending display. If it is decided to derive a pending look-ahead effect that is suggested or taught, after the hold display that is the target of the already derived hold look-ahead effect is changed, the hold look-ahead effect is It is possible to derive a series of modes in which the performance is promoted to a mode that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance, etc., compared to the case where a pending look-ahead effect is derived independently for each of a plurality of pending displays.

In addition, if "it is determined whether or not the validity-related information for which the suspension performance execution flag has already been set exists, and it is determined that the validity-related information exists", "the new storage area of the suspension storage means is The pre-change flag may be always set with respect to the validity-related information stored in the winning/failure-related information, or the pre-change flag may be set (based on a predetermined lottery) in place of the suspended performance execution flag. It may be configured such that there are cases where the flag is set and cases where the suspended performance execution flag continues to be set.

In addition, in the case where "the pre-change flag is set with respect to the validity-related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means", "the flag for which the suspension performance execution flag has already been set" Regarding the validity-related information that is determined to exist in the determination of whether or not the validity-related information exists, a deletion scheduled flag is set in place of the suspension performance execution flag, and thereafter, the suspension pre-reading performance is executed. The pending display to be derived is changed from the pending display corresponding to the pass/fail related information for which the deletion schedule flag is set to the hold display corresponding to the pass/fail related information for which the pre-change flag is set. It may also be used as "to be done".

In addition, the statement ``when the suspension performance execution flag is set regarding the validity-related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means'' does not mean only ``when it is set.'' , "If the state is such that it is determined that it does not exist in determining whether or not the validity-related information for which the suspended performance execution flag is already set exists, the suspended performance execution flag is set. This includes cases where it is certain that

Means B-10. The pending look-ahead effect suggests the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special game state according to its own aspect, and has a plurality of patterns ranked according to the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the special game state,
When determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect, the upper limit of the rank is determined based on the validity related information, and the execution rank is determined from among the ranks below the upper limit rank,
When determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect regarding the pending display corresponding to the validity related information stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set, when selecting the execution rank, In addition to the conditions that require the rank to be lower than the specified rank,
The suspension look-ahead effect in a mode corresponding to the execution rank is derived for the suspension display corresponding to the validity-related information stored in the storage area in which the pre-change flag is set. The gaming machine according to means B-9.

The predetermined suspension look-ahead effect derived for the suspension display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information stored in the predetermined storage area in which the pre-change flag has been set is then used when another validity-related information is stored. When the change destination flag is set in the storage area, the target of the predetermined pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display corresponding to the other validity related information. For this reason, if the rank of a predetermined pending look-ahead presentation mode is too high, the change destination flag cannot be set until the validity-related information corresponding to the rank is stored pending storage.

On the other hand, by setting the rank of the pending look-ahead effect of the pre-change flag as low as possible, as in method B-10, such concerns can be suppressed and the situation where the opportunity for the effect is extremely reduced can be avoided. can do.

Means B-11. If the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means corresponds to the occurrence of the special gaming state, the pre-change flag is not set regarding the win/fail related information. The gaming machine according to means B-9 or B-10, characterized by:

Before and after the change of the pending display that is the subject of the derivation of the pending look-ahead effect, for example, a change from "lost" to "lost" which does not win in a win/fail lottery based on win/fail related information, or a case where "lost" is changed to "lost" There is no problem if the change is made from ``hit'' to ``hit'', but there is a concern that a sense of discomfort may arise when the change is made from ``hit'' to ``miss''. That is, for example, the hold look-ahead effect that was derived in response to a predetermined hold display has been changed to correspond to a later hold display, but the hold look-ahead effect was originally derived. When a special gaming state occurs in a variable display of identification information corresponding to the predetermined pending display (a special gaming state does not occur in a variable display corresponding to a pending display from which a pending look-ahead effect is derived after the change), There is a possibility that the credibility of the look-ahead performance will be significantly reduced.

In this regard, according to means B-11, the winning/losing related information before the target of the pending pre-reading effect is changed is such that the winner will not be won in the winning lottery (although the pending pre-reading effect is derived even though it is a "loser") Since the above-mentioned concerns can be dispelled, the above-mentioned concerns can be dispelled.

In addition, in models where the criteria for determining the mode of the pending effect execution flag may change before and after the special gaming state, it is possible that the judgment criteria for determining the mode of the pending effect execution flag is set. It is desirable to stop setting the suspended performance execution flag with respect to the validity-related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspended storage means when it is determined that the suspended performance execution flag corresponds to the storage area of the suspended storage means.

In addition, "at the stage where the first validity related information is acquired, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the corresponding first response pending display will be displayed together with the second response pending display in the pending display means. If it is determined that there is a possibility that the change will be displayed, the rate at which the pre-change flag is set is increased compared to the case that it is determined that it will not be displayed. In this case, it is possible to increase the chance that the most pleasant pattern among the prefetch target change effects, such as switching the target of the prefetch effect from the first corresponding hold display to the second corresponding hold display, will occur.

Means B-12. A firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area provided on the front side of the game board, where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a starting ball entering means into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
and a starting ball entry detection means as the condition fulfillment detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means,
The main control means is configured to perform the win/fail lottery when the detection by the starting ball entry detection means is performed,
The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means,
With regard to the distribution of the type of the special gaming state that is given when a winner is won in the winning lottery conducted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means, the entry into the second starting ball entry means Sorting based on the ball makes it easier for the player to select a type that is more advantageous to the player than sorting based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering means;
In the suspension display means, depending on the mode of the suspension display, it is possible to grasp the number of storage areas of the suspension storage means in which the validity-related information is stored, and to display information stored in each storage area of the suspension storage means. The validity-related information that has been set includes first validity-related information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and first validity-related information based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means. 2. It is configured such that it is possible to identify which of the relevant information is valid or invalid,
In the hold display means, in a state where both a first hold display corresponding to the first pass/fail related information and a second hold display corresponding to the second pass/fail related information are displayed, the first hold display After the hold look-ahead effect is derived for a given hold look-ahead effect, the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived can be changed from the first hold display to the second hold display. The gaming machine according to means A-1.

The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-11, characterized in that:

According to means B-12, rather than winning the special game state with the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first win/fail related information (first variable display), the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second win/fail related information If the player wins the special gaming state in the second variable display, it is easier for the player to select the type of special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player. I think I want it. However, for example, in a state where both the first variable display and the second variable display are on hold, a pending look-ahead effect that increases the level of expectation for the special gaming state with respect to the pending display of the first variable display may be performed. If it is derived, there is a concern that the user may become disappointed, thinking that it would have been better if the suspension look-ahead effect had been derived for the suspension display of the second variable display. Furthermore, depending on the player, the expectations for the special gaming state for the hold display of the first variable display from which the hold look-ahead effect has been derived are increased, and for the hold display of the second variable display for which the hold look-ahead effect has not been derived. There is a concern that players may get the impression that expectations for the special gaming state have decreased relatively. In this case, there is a possibility that the negative image of the pending look-ahead effect will become stronger, resulting in a decrease in interest.

In this regard, according to the present means B-12, even if the pending pre-read effect is derived for the pending display of the first variable display, the target of the pending pre-read effect is changed from the first variable display to the second variable display. You can have expectations for what will happen. Therefore, the above concerns can be eliminated.

Note that, for example, after the hold look-ahead effect is derived for the hold display of the second variable display, a hold effect indicating that no further changes will be made may be derived. In this case, it is possible to increase performance opportunities and provide the benefit of a sense of security when a hold performance is derived. Also, for example, the target of the pending look-ahead effect may be changed from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display, but it will not be changed from the second corresponding pending display to the first corresponding pending display. It may also be configured as follows. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation where there is a pattern that is not pleasing to the player in the prefetch target changing performance where the target of the pending prefetch performance is changed. As a result, it is possible to make the look-ahead target changing performance a favorable phenomenon for the player, and it is possible to make the gameplay of expecting the occurrence of the pending look-ahead performance more reliable.

In addition, "the second game mode may improve the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry means compared to the first game mode".

Means B-13. In the suspension display means, a transition for visualizing a process (in the middle) in which a suspension display from which the suspension look-ahead performance is derived is changed from a suspension display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information to another suspension display. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-12, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to derive a performance.

For example, if a pending look-ahead effect that was derived to a predetermined hold display suddenly disappears, and a hold look-ahead effect is suddenly derived to another hold display, the previous hold look-ahead effect and the subsequent hold look-ahead effect are different. There is a concern that they may be perceived as independent (completely unrelated). In particular, if there is even a slight time lag between the time when the pending look-ahead effect that was derived from a predetermined hold display is deleted and the time when the hold look-ahead effect is derived from another hold display, or when the predetermined hold display is After deriving the derived pending look-ahead effect to another hold display, if you delete the hold look-ahead effect that had been derived to a predetermined hold display (there is a period in which it is duplicated), , such concerns are made more prominent.

On the other hand, according to means B-13, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from the source pending display where the target of the pending look-ahead performance is changed to the destination pending display by the connecting performance. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed.

In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, at a stage before the change of the hold look-ahead effect, a character etc. is displayed on the change source hold display and the change target hold display, and the hold look ahead effect is changed. In response to the pending display of the change source, display as if the pending prefetch effect has been sent out, and in response to the pending display of the change destination, display as if the pending prefetch effect had been received. You can also use it as In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, a display that allows you to see the trajectory of the movement of the mode of the pending look-ahead effect from the source hold display of the hold look-ahead effect to the destination display of the change (for example, a character is It may also be configured so that the user is shown carrying the device.

Means B-14. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
Means B-1 to B-13, characterized in that the display control means is configured to be able to change the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect is derived based on an operation on the operation means. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to means B-14, since the "pre-read target change performance" is performed based on the player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to arouse more interest in the "pre-read target change performance", and It is possible to prevent a situation where the "look-ahead target change effect" is overlooked.

Means B-15. The suspension display means includes an approach detection means capable of detecting contact or proximity of an object to a portion where each suspension display is displayed,
According to any one of the means B-1 to B-14, the holding display from which the holding look-ahead effect is derived can be changed based on the detection information of the approach detection means. Game machine.

According to means B-15, since the "pre-read target change effect" is performed based on the player's operation on the approach detection means, it is possible to arouse more interest in the "pre-read target change effect" and , it is possible to prevent a situation where the "prefetch target change effect" is overlooked. In particular, since the player is in the position of directly touching the pending display with his/her hand, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the "look-ahead target change effect". Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations where the player is confused by such an operation and the time runs out, or where the game tempo becomes slow due to setting a relatively long time for such an operation. In particular, when "prefetch target change effect" is derived simultaneously for multiple pending displays (selecting one from among multiple ones), it is possible to select the target pending display more clearly and reliably. It can be made possible to do so.

Means B-16. The hold display means includes:
a suspension corresponding area from which the suspension display corresponding to the validity-related information for which the fluctuation display of the corresponding identification information has not yet been performed;
Means B-1 to B-1 characterized in that an execution corresponding area is provided from which the pending display corresponding to the validity related information is derived while the fluctuation display of the corresponding identification information is being executed. The gaming machine described in any of B-15.

According to means B-16, in the hold display means, for example, when a change in the hold look-ahead effect is performed for the corresponding hold display immediately before the change display of the corresponding identification information is executed, the confirmation It is possible to avoid a situation where it is difficult to confirm (actually cannot be confirmed). In addition, when displaying changes in identification information, it is possible to check whether or not a hold look-ahead effect has been derived for the hold display corresponding to the change display, as well as the type of hold look-ahead effect (suggested content). By combining the contents of the look-ahead performance and the performance etc. during the variable display of identification information, it is possible to make various guesses and enjoy the variable display even more.

In addition, when the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect has been derived moves to the execution compatible area, an effect in which the mode of the hold display changes may be derived. In addition, when a pending display from which a pending look-ahead effect has been derived is moved to an execution-compatible area, only the mode of the pending look-ahead effect that has been derived for the held display is displayed in the execution-compatible area. You can.

Means B-17. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-16, characterized in that the timing at which the suspension look-ahead effect is derived in the suspension display means is only the timing at which the suspension display increases.

According to means B-17, the timing at which the pending pre-read effect is newly derived is limited to the timing at which the pending display is newly displayed, thereby making it easier to notice that the pending pre-read effect has been derived. I can do it. Therefore, for example, in a state where only the pending display for which the pending look-ahead effect has not been derived is displayed, even though it is not the timing for the pending display to increase (new validity-related information is suspended and stored), suddenly a predetermined Compared to a configuration in which a phenomenon occurs in which a pending look-ahead effect is derived in response to a pending display, this prevents a situation where the pending look-ahead effect becomes confusing and difficult to understand (making it difficult for players to get involved). be able to.

Means B-18. The mode of the pending look-ahead performance is such that the win/fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means is different from the win/fail related information that determines whether or not a winner will be won in the win/fail lottery depending on the gaming state, and the gaming state changes. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-17, characterized in that the setting is based on a determination result as to whether the result of the winning lottery is the same or the winning/failure related information. .

For example, the probability of winning a lottery or the meaning of the pending look-ahead effect may change at a predetermined timing (for example, before or after a special gaming state, etc.), and in that case, the hold look-ahead effect that was displayed before the predetermined timing If the performance is continued as it is after a predetermined timing, there is a concern that a contradiction may occur. For example, in a configuration where the probability of winning in a win/fail lottery is changed before and after a special gaming state, before the special gaming state, it was supposed to be won in the special gaming state, but by inserting the special gaming state, If a pending pre-reading effect indicating the occurrence of a special gaming state is continuously derived after the special gaming state for a pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information that no longer wins in the gaming state, the pending pre-reading effect will not be displayed. Trouble may occur if the special gaming state that was supposed to be given is not given.

In this regard, according to means B-18, it is possible to handle even if the gaming state (gaming mode) changes between the time when the success/failure related information is stored and the time when the variable display corresponding to the win/fail related information is executed. The mode of the pending look-ahead effect can be set in advance so that it can be performed (without causing any trouble). Therefore, when the gaming state changes, or when a timing when a change is likely to occur occurs, it is possible to avoid the situation of having to reconfirm the mode of the pending look-ahead effect or setting it again from scratch. I can do it. Further, for example, when the meaning (interpretation) of the win/fail related information changes due to a change in the gaming state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is forcibly changed.

Incidentally, after the end of the special game state, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect may be reset. In this case, even if various performances (for example, complex performances such as removing the correspondence between the pending pre-reading effect and the pending display) are performed using the pending pre-reading effect in the pre-game state, It can be reset after the special gaming state.

C. A pachinko machine is a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a firing means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and a variable display means A variable display is made to show the results of the lottery (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, many devices are configured such that when a winning lottery is performed while a fluctuating display is being performed, the fluctuating display corresponding to the winning lottery is suspended. Such gaming machines are generally provided with a pending display means that can derive a pending display that makes it possible to grasp the number of pending variable displays. Further, in a stage before the suspended variable display is executed, an effect that suggests the content of a predetermined variable display (so-called pending look-ahead effect) is performed for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined variable display. There is something.

By the way, when the hold display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of hold displays from which hold look-ahead effects have been derived, the player's mental image of the hold look-ahead effects may be influenced by the combination of hold look-ahead effects displayed on the hold display means. It may vary greatly. For example, in the hold display means, only the hold look-ahead performance A that slightly increases the expectation of the occurrence of a special gaming state is displayed, and the hold look-ahead performance that increases the expectation that the special game state will occur more than the hold look-ahead performance A. It is conceivable that expectations for the pending pre-reading effect A may differ greatly depending on the case where the pending pre-reading effect A is displayed together with the pending pre-reading effect A. In other words, although the former pending look-ahead effect A can be expected, the latter hold look-ahead effect A may not be expected. In particular, the closer the interval between the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect A is derived and the hold display from which the hold look-ahead effect B is derived, the stronger the impression is given that there is a strong relationship between the two, and the above tendency becomes stronger. There is a risk that Therefore, even if the suspension look-ahead performance is derived with great effort, there is a concern that the performance effect may be weakened depending on the situation, or that the hold look-ahead performance may be given a negative impression.

Note that the above-mentioned problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more reliably improve interest by performing a reservation look-ahead effect. It is in.

Means C-1. a condition fulfillment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the condition establishment detection means detects, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state is generated based on the result of the lottery. main control means;
variable display means capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner;
A gaming machine comprising: a display control means capable of variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means and then stopping displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning lottery;
Information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail related information regarding the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
a retention storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the validity-related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
A mode of the pending display corresponding to predetermined propriety related information stored in the pending storage means is a specific mode that suggests the content of the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display. configured to be derivable,
In the hold display means, in a state where at least a first hold look-ahead effect suggesting the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first hold display (with respect to the first hold display) is derived, a first hold look-ahead effect is derived. 2. If the right is granted to derive the second pending look-ahead effect that suggests the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second hold display, the second hold look-ahead effect is applied to the second hold display. A first appearance lottery process is performed to determine whether to exercise the right to derive.
If a decision is made to exercise the right in the first appearance lottery process, the second pending look-ahead effect is derived for the second pending display;
If a decision is made in the first appearance lottery process not to exercise the right, a standby state is stored that indicates that the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is obtained but is not exercised. A configuration for storing information in a means,
In the first appearance lottery process, the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first pending display is executed, and the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second pending display is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the difference between the two numbers is less than a specified number, the probability of winning in the first appearance lottery process is lower than when the difference is greater than or equal to the specified number.

For example, if a pending look-ahead performance with a relatively low expectation level for a special gaming state and a pending look-ahead performance with a relatively high expectation level for a special gaming state are derived in succession, the player will Not only will the user not have any expectations for the variable display corresponding to the look-ahead effect, but there is also a concern that the user may have a bad impression that the user does not want to waste time on the variable display.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such a situation, if you prevent multiple pending displays from deriving a pending look-ahead effect, it is very effective to reduce the chances of a pending look-ahead effect and to derive a pending look-ahead effect. (For example, even if the corresponding variable display corresponds to a special game state, etc.), since the pending look-ahead effect has already been derived, it will not be possible to derive it, which will cause a significant loss in terms of the effect. There is a risk.

Furthermore, for example, when deriving a new pending look-ahead effect in a state where a hold look-ahead effect has already been derived, the pattern of the new hold look-ahead effect can be determined by looking at the contents of the variable display corresponding to the previous hold look-ahead effect. It may be possible to change it to something that does not pose a problem. In this case, there is a concern that the combination of a plurality of pending look-ahead effects may lead to a situation where the contents of the corresponding variable display may be seen by the player. For example, when a plurality of pending pre-read effects are derived in succession, it is conceivable that at least the variable display corresponding to the previous pending pre-read effect may be interpreted as not winning the special game state.

In this regard, according to means C-1, when the right to derive a new pending look-ahead performance is obtained in a state where a pending look-ahead performance has already been derived, the interval (as a variable display) with the previous pending look-ahead performance is obtained. The system is configured to determine whether to derive a new pending look-ahead effect or to postpone the derivation (to wait with the right to derive it) depending on the difference in the order of execution). . In other words, when a plurality of pending pre-read effects are derived on the pending display means, the intervals between the pending pre-read effects can be adjusted and relative arrangement can be made so that each pending pre-read effect is utilized as much as possible.

Therefore, it is possible to improve performance by making it possible to derive a hold look-ahead effect for a plurality of hold displays in the hold display means, and also to To reduce a situation in which the contents and results of corresponding variable displays become obvious and lack interest due to the intervals between displays becoming too close, and the performance effect and significance of existence of each pending look-ahead performance is reduced. I can do it. As a result, it is possible to suppress the negative aspects of performing a pending look-ahead performance, and it is possible to more reliably link the pending look-ahead performance with an increase in interest.

In addition, if a decision is made not to exercise the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect in the first appearance lottery process, the right is not discarded but is carried over. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of deriving the pending look-ahead effect.

In addition, in the first appearance lottery process, the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first pending display is executed and the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second pending display is executed. If the difference between the first appearance lottery process and the first appearance lottery process is less than a predetermined number, the winning probability in the first appearance lottery process is lower than that when the difference is less than a predetermined number. , ``The difference between the order in which the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the first hold display is executed and the order in which the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the second hold display is executed is a specified number. If the number is less than 1, the present lottery process is configured so that no prize is won.''

Means C-2. When the standby state is stored in the standby state storage means, determine whether to exercise the right to derive the already obtained second hold look-ahead effect for the third hold display. configured to be able to execute the second appearance lottery process to determine,
If a decision is made to exercise the right in the second appearance lottery process, the second reservation look-ahead effect is derived for the third reservation display,
If a decision is made not to exercise the right in the second appearance lottery process, the storage state of the standby state storage means is maintained,
In the second appearance lottery process, the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first pending display is executed, and the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the third pending display is executed. Means C- characterized in that the winning probability in the second appearance lottery process is configured to be lower when the difference between the two is less than a predetermined number than when the difference is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the means C-2, the number of times the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is carried over is not just one, but multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently deal with a situation where carrying over the rights once is not enough.

Note that the "specified number" in means C-2 may be the same number as the "specified number" in means C-1 (the prescribed number), or a different number (the prescribed number in means C-1 is the first prescribed number, and the prescribed number of means C-2 is the second prescribed number).

Means C-3. If the second pending prefetch effect is derived from the third pending display, until the second pending display is erased from the pending display means (for example, the second pending display corresponding to the second pending display) until the fluctuating display of the identification information starts or stops),
The gaming machine according to means C-2, characterized in that the display mode of the suspension display means can be changed until the second suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the second suspension display.

As in the above means C-2, when the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived to the second pending display but is derived to the third pending display, the mode of the third pending display and the third pending display The correspondence relationship with the contents of the corresponding validity-related information (fluctuation display of the corresponding identification information) becomes deviated. In this case, the suggestion by the second pending look-ahead performance is off-target, and there is a possibility that the pending look-ahead performance has no meaning.

In this regard, according to the present means C-3, it is assumed that a state in which the correspondence relationship between the mode of the pending display and the contents of the validity-related information (fluctuation display of the corresponding identification information) corresponding to the pending display is misaligned has occurred. The system is also configured to eventually correct such deviations and make them match. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the content suggested by the mode of the pending pre-read effect does not match the content of the fluctuating display of validity related information corresponding to the pending display from which the pending pre-read effect has been derived.

Means C-4. In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
The right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised with respect to the third pending display corresponding to the third valid/failure related information that is held and stored in the pending storage means after the second validation related information. In case,
When the first suspension display is deleted from the suspension display means, the target of the second suspension look-ahead effect derived for the third suspension display is changed to the second suspension display, or Means C-3 is characterized in that the probability of winning is increased by a proximity lottery process in which the object of the second suspension look-ahead effect derived for the third suspension display is brought closer to the second suspension display side. The game machine described.

According to means C-4, while preventing a situation where the first pending look-ahead performance and the second pending look-ahead performance come too close to each other, after the preceding first pending look-ahead performance is consumed, the second pending look-ahead performance is performed. and the second suspension display (second validity related information) can be made to surely match.

Means C-5. The suspension storage means includes an execution area in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed is stored, and a plurality of suspension areas in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display in the suspended state is stored,
The hold display means includes an execution compatible area corresponding to the execution area, and a hold compatible area corresponding to each of the hold areas,
In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
The right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised with respect to the third pending display corresponding to the third valid/failure related information that is held and stored in the pending storage means after the second validation related information. In case,
When the second pending display moves to the execution compatible area, the target of the second pending display that is derived for the third pending display is changed to the second pending display. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-4.

According to the means C-5, it is possible to ensure that the second suspension look-ahead effect and the second suspension display (second validity related information) match.

Means C-6. In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By newly storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending pre-reading effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
If the first pending display is deleted from the pending display means before the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised, the third validity-related information that was subsequently stored in the pending storage means Regarding the information, the winning probability of the second appearance lottery process is increased, or the second pending look-ahead effect is always derived for the third pending display corresponding to the third win/fail related information. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to means C-5.

According to means C-6, it is possible to prevent the first pending look-ahead performance from being too close to the second pending look-ahead performance, and to avoid wasting the right to derive the second pending look-ahead performance as much as possible. can.

Means C-7. The suspension storage means includes an execution area in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed is stored, and a plurality of suspension areas in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display in the suspended state is stored,
In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
If the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third winning/failure related information that is held and stored in the holding storage means after the second winning/failure related information, the third winning/failure related information corresponding to the third winning/failure related information is won. A configuration in which the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised in response to the third pending display,
A second storage unit that stores a difference between the order in which the first validity-related information is displayed in a variable manner and the order in which the fluctuating display in the validity-related information corresponding to the pending display that is the target of the second suspension look-ahead effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-6, characterized in that it is equipped with one-interval storage means.

According to means C-7, in the first and second appearance lottery processing for determining whether to exercise the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect, the interval between the first pending display and the first pending display can be quickly grasped. becomes possible. In addition, in the state where the second suspension prefetch effect is derived for the third suspension display, the interval between the first suspension display and the third suspension display is stored in the first interval storage means. .

Means C-8. The suspension storage means includes an execution area in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed is stored, and a plurality of suspension areas in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display in the suspended state is stored,
In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
If the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third winning/failure related information that is held and stored in the holding storage means after the second winning/failure related information, the third winning/failure related information corresponding to the third winning/failure related information is won. In a configuration in which the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised in response to the third pending display,
The present invention is characterized by comprising second interval storage means for storing a difference between the order in which the variable display of the second validity-related information is executed and the order in which the variable display of the third validity-related information is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-7.

According to the means C-8, it becomes possible to more quickly determine whether or not the second suspension look-ahead performance derived for the third suspension display matches the second suspension display.

Means C-9. In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
If the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third winning/failure related information that is held and stored in the holding storage means after the second winning/failure related information, the third winning/failure related information corresponding to the third winning/failure related information is won. In a configuration in which the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised in response to the third pending display,
In the case where the winner is selected in an approach lottery process in which the object of the second pending look-ahead effect derived for the third pending display is brought to the side of the second pending display, the second pending display and the second pending display are If there is another pending display between the third pending display, the target of the second pending display is changed from the third pending display to the other pending display, and the target of the second pending display is changed from the third pending display to the other pending display, and further to the approach lottery The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-8, wherein the other pending display is changed to the second pending display by winning a game.

According to means C-9, when the second pending display and the third pending display are two or more spaces apart, the second pending look-ahead effect does not jump all at once, but the (adjacent) pending display between them After moving once to , it moves further until it is led to the second pending display, which is the final target. Therefore, it is possible to make the change of the target of the pending prefetch effect relatively easy to understand. Furthermore, in a situation where the player cannot gain an advantage by just moving one position, it is possible to use a performance that can be more enthusiastic, such as "Move more!" Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the pending look-ahead effect more spectacularly and more easily.

Means C-10. The suspension storage means includes an execution area in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed is stored, and a plurality of suspension areas in which the validity-related information corresponding to the fluctuating display in the suspended state is stored,
In a state where the first validity related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information, By storing the second validity related information, the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is granted regarding the second validity related information, but the second suspension display corresponding to the second validity related information is granted. In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
If the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third winning/failure related information that is held and stored in the holding storage means after the second winning/failure related information, the third winning/failure related information corresponding to the third winning/failure related information is won. In a configuration in which the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised in response to the third pending display,
A specific performance that determines whether or not to derive a specific performance using the aspect of the first pending pre-reading effect and the aspect of the second pending pre-reading effect (when winning the second appearance lottery process) A configuration in which lottery processing is performed,
If you win in the specific performance lottery process,
In the suspension display means, from a state in which the first suspension look-ahead effect is derived for the first hold display and the second hold look-ahead effect is derived for the third hold display,
A mode in which the aspect of the first pending look-ahead performance and the aspect of the second hold look-ahead performance are combined, or a mode that is substituted for the aspect of the first pending look-ahead performance and the aspect of the second pending look-ahead performance, The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to derive an integrated pending look-ahead effect that is derived in a display range that includes the second pending display.

Normally, the first pending look-ahead effect and the second pending look-ahead effect only suggest the content of one corresponding variable display (e.g. winning expectation level) depending on the mode of each hold look-ahead effect, but means C -10 integrated pending look-ahead effects can be used to suggest one variable display in the form of multiple pending look-ahead effects (before the result appears in the corresponding variable display), or It is possible to suggest a plurality of variable displays depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suspension look-ahead performance and improve the performance.

In addition, by combining (integrating) the first pending look-ahead performance and the second pending look-ahead performance, the integrated pending look-ahead performance is no longer bound by the order or interval of the first pending look-ahead performance and the second pending look-ahead performance. It is possible to make the player feel as if the state (special game state) expected by the player should occur in response to (any one of) the pending displays targeted for performance. Therefore, by deriving the pending look-ahead effect, it is possible to more reliably establish an association that improves the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the integrated pending look-ahead performance (aspect) is the expectation level of the first hold look-ahead performance (aspect) and the second hold look-ahead performance (aspect), whichever has a higher expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state. It is desirable to have at least the following, and it is more desirable to configure the system so that the expectation level may be improved by the amount that the pending look-ahead effect is integrated (combined) or synergistically. In other words, for example, if the targets of the first and second hold look-ahead performances are combined into one hold display, the number of hold displays that are subject to the hold look ahead performance will be reduced by one, but the expectation level will be reduced by one. By deriving an aspect indicating that the value has been increased, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction among players. Further, the aspect of the integrated pending look-ahead effect may be derived across three or more pending displays. In this case, it becomes possible to derive a series of effects on a larger scale.

Means C-11. comprising an effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the winning/fail lottery and capable of deriving a variable display for effect to be performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means;
If the integrated pending look-ahead effect has not been derived in the pending display means, the variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, It is displayed as if the fluctuation display is stopped and the display is stopped.
When the integrated hold look-ahead effect is derived in the hold display means, the change display of identification information in the variable display means corresponding to all the hold displays targeted by the integrated hold look-ahead effect; From the start to the stop display, the variable display for effect is continuously derived (across (straddles) a plurality of variable displays of the identification information on the variable display device, without being stopped and displayed in the middle). The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-10.

According to means C-11, during the period corresponding to the integrated hold look-ahead effect, simply visually checking the effect display means cannot determine whether or not it corresponds to any of the plurality of hold displays targeted by the integrated hold look-ahead effect. It becomes difficult to grasp whether the relevant information has been selected. Therefore, the effect of being able to proceed with the game without being restricted by the order, interval, etc. of the pending look-ahead effects can be achieved more reliably.

In addition, in recent years, there are some games where the fluctuating display time (fluctuating time) of the identification information is set to be relatively long, but it becomes inefficient in progressing the game, and for example, if the hold limit of the fluctuating display is exceeded, the condition is met. In a configuration where detection by the detection means would cause a disadvantage to the player, there is a concern that such a situation would be more likely to occur if the fluctuation time becomes longer. In this regard, in the present means, rather than one variable display, the variable time of a plurality of variable displays is used to perform a relatively long performance, so the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed.

Means C-12. The hold display means includes:
a first reservation display means capable of deriving a reservation display indicating the number of storage areas of the reservation storage means in which the validity related information is stored;
a second suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-11, characterized in that the suspension look-ahead effect can be derived for the second suspension display of the second suspension display means.

According to means C-12, even if various effects are performed in the second hold display means and a situation occurs where it becomes somewhat difficult to understand the correspondence between the hold display and the held variable display, the first hold display means Whether or not the variable display is on hold can be surely grasped by the hold display means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom and performance of the reservation pre-read performance in the second reservation display means. In particular, when measures C-10 and C-11 are adopted, such effects become even more remarkable.

Means C-13. In the suspension display means, a transition for visualizing a process (in the middle) in which a suspension display from which the suspension look-ahead performance is derived is changed from a suspension display corresponding to the predetermined validity-related information to another suspension display. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-12, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive a performance.

For example, if a pending look-ahead effect that was derived to a predetermined hold display suddenly disappears, and a hold look-ahead effect is suddenly derived to another hold display, the previous hold look-ahead effect and the subsequent hold look-ahead effect are different. There is a concern that they may be perceived as independent (completely unrelated). In particular, if there is even a slight time lag between the time when the pending look-ahead effect that was derived from a predetermined hold display is deleted and the time when the hold look-ahead effect is derived from another hold display, or when the predetermined hold display is After deriving the derived pending look-ahead effect to another hold display, if you delete the hold look-ahead effect that had been derived to a predetermined hold display (there is a period in which it is duplicated), , such concerns are made more prominent.

On the other hand, according to means C-13, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from the source pending display where the target of the pending look-ahead performance is changed to the destination pending display by the connecting performance. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed.

In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, at a stage before the change of the hold look-ahead effect, a character etc. is displayed on the change source hold display and the change target hold display, and the hold look ahead effect is changed. In response to the pending display of the change source, display as if the pending prefetch effect has been sent out, and in response to the pending display of the change destination, display as if the pending prefetch effect had been received. You can also use it as In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, a display that allows you to see the trajectory of the movement of the mode of the pending look-ahead effect from the source hold display of the hold look-ahead effect to the destination display of the change (for example, a character is It may also be configured so that the user is shown carrying the device.

D. A pachinko machine is a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a firing means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and a variable display means A variable display is made to show the results of the lottery (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, many systems have been configured so that when a winning/failure lottery is held while a fluctuating display is being displayed, the fluctuating display corresponding to the winning/failing lottery is suspended. A pending display means is provided that can derive a pending display that allows the number of displays to be grasped. Furthermore, before a variable display is executed, there are some cases in which an effect (so-called pending look-ahead effect) is performed that suggests the content of the corresponding variable display.

By the way, there is a need to further improve the interest of the game by using the pending look-ahead effect.

Note that the above-mentioned problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve interest through pending look-ahead effects.

Means D-1. a condition fulfillment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the condition establishment detection means detects, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state is generated based on the result of the lottery. main control means;
variable display means capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner;
A gaming machine comprising: a display control means capable of variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means and then stopping displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning lottery;
Information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail related information regarding the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
a retention storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the validity-related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
At a stage before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined propriety related information stored in the suspension storage means is executed, the mode of the pending display corresponding to the predetermined propriety related information is: configured to be capable of deriving a hold look-ahead effect that is a specific aspect that suggests the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the hold display,
a matching state in which each of the suspension display modes displayed on the suspension display means corresponds (on a one-to-one basis) with the validity-related information stored in each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means; A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to change its state between a non-corresponding state and a non-corresponding state.

According to means D-1, performances using the suspension display can be performed more diversely, more freely, and more dynamically than in the case where performances related to suspension are only performed so as not to disturb the matching state. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to perform a performance within a range that does not break the matching state, the performance may feel forced, the conditions for executing the performance may be strict, and there may be fewer opportunities to perform the performance, or players may not be able to operate the performance themselves. There is a concern that the user will lose the sense of being in control (no randomness), or that not only the variable display from which the pending look-ahead effect is derived, but also the contents of the preceding and succeeding variable displays may become transparent. On the other hand, as in this method, by intervening non-conforming states as necessary, each production up to the final form can be shown concisely (with fewer leaps in production). The amount of control to be performed at one time can also be reduced (dividing the control until the final form is achieved). Furthermore, even if the content of the variable display is suggested by the pending look-ahead effect, it may still be in a non-conforming state, so it is possible to maintain a sense of tension and to check the relationship with the surrounding variable displays. It can also be disorienting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay and performance, suppress the sense of monotony, and simplify control.

Means D-2. The hold display means includes:
a first reservation display means capable of deriving a reservation display indicating the number of storage areas of the reservation storage means in which the validity related information is stored;
a second suspension display means capable of deriving a suspension display indicating that (at least one) of the validity-related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means;
The suspension look-ahead effect is configured to be derivable with respect to the second suspension display of the second suspension display means, and
In the matching state, the number of each of the suspension displays displayed on the second suspension display means matches the number of the validity related information stored in each of the storage areas of the suspension storage means, and The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the gaming machine does not match in the non-matching state.

According to means D-2, for example, in the second suspension display means, a number of suspensions that are larger than the actual number of variable suspensions is derived with a suspension look-ahead performance, and by the subsequent performance, unnecessary suspensions among them are The number of pending displays is not limited to the number of validity-related information stored in a pending memory, such as a display in which the display is erased and only the necessary one remains, or a display in which multiple pending displays are combined into one. By making it possible to derive a hold effect that freely changes the hold effect, it is possible to dramatically increase the effect of the hold effect, and to perform effective effects such as dramatically increasing the expectation level of the corresponding variable display. I can do it.

Furthermore, even if the number of pending displays in the second pending display means does not match the number of variable pending displays, by checking the first display means, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of pending variable displays. .

Means D-3. comprising an effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the winning/fail lottery and capable of deriving a variable display for effect to be performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means;
configured to be able to derive an integrated pending look-ahead effect in which the plurality of second pending displays are combined into one,
When the integrated pending look-ahead effect has not been derived in the second pending display means, the variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, and The display stops when the changing display of identification information stops,
When the integrated pending look-ahead effect is derived in the second hold display means, in the effect display means, identification information in the variable display means corresponding to all the hold displays that were targeted by the integrated hold look-ahead effect. Means D-2 according to means D-2, characterized in that the variable display for effect is continuously derived over a plurality of variable displays of identification information on the variable display device, from the start of the variable display to the stop display. Game machine.

According to the means D-3, it is possible to ensure correspondence between the manner in which a plurality of second pending displays are grouped together in the second pending display means and the variable display in the effect display means, and it corresponds to the integrated pending look-ahead effect. It is possible to improve the expectation level of the variable display.

In addition, in recent years, there are some games where the fluctuating display time (fluctuating time) of the identification information is set to be relatively long, but it becomes inefficient in progressing the game, and for example, if the hold limit of the fluctuating display is exceeded, the condition is met. In a configuration where detection by the detection means would cause a disadvantage to the player, there is a concern that such a situation would be more likely to occur if the fluctuation time becomes longer. In this regard, in the present means, rather than one variable display, the variable time of a plurality of variable displays is used to perform a relatively long performance, so the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed.

Means D-4. In the matching state, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect derived corresponding to each of the pending displays displayed on the pending display means and the validity relationship stored in each of the storage areas of the pending storage means The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-3, characterized in that the contents of the information correspond to each other, but do not correspond in the non-matching state.

According to means D-4, it is possible to appropriately change the variable display from which the suspension look-ahead effect is derived, as necessary, making the effect easier to understand, improving the gameplay and performance, and reducing the sense of monotony. The above-mentioned effects such as suppression and simplification of control are more reliably achieved.

Means D-5. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
Any one of the means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that the mode of the hold display in the hold display means can be reset in response to a predetermined input based on the operation of the operation means. The game machine described.

Since the pending look-ahead effect is set based on the content of the corresponding variable display and, by extension, the result of the winning/failure lottery, a series of variable displays without any special effects are performed in response to "losers" in the winning/failure lottery. In this case, there is a concern that even if a pending look-ahead effect is derived for the corresponding hold display, the feeling of monotony may not be alleviated, or a period may continue in which the hold look-ahead effect itself is not derived.

On the other hand, if too many pending look-ahead effects are derived, there is a concern that the reliability of the pending look-ahead effects will decrease, and the performance effect of deriving the pending look-ahead effects will be reduced.

In this regard, according to the means D-5, the player's operations on the operation means are used as various triggers for the pending look-ahead effect, and the pending display is reset, etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunities for effects in which the player's intentions can be reflected in the game (during relatively boring times other than the timing when the result of the variable display is determined), improving the gameplay and effects. , it is possible to suppress the feeling of monotony.

Furthermore, with regard to resetting the mode of hold display, it is possible for the player to perform the operation himself, giving him more satisfaction. Players can be selectively involved in the performance. Therefore, in addition to alleviating the differences among players who feel that there are too many or too few pending look-ahead effects, the reliability of the hold look-ahead effects is actually improved due to the fact that too many hold look-ahead effects are derived. It is possible to avoid a situation where the number of players who can enjoy the reserved look-ahead effect is too rare and fewer players are able to enjoy it. As a result, both players who want to be actively involved in the game and players who prefer simple effects can be satisfied with the amount of pending look-ahead effects, and it is possible to Although the amount of control increases, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance effect by deriving the pending look-ahead performance becomes low.

In addition, even if there is no predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means, there are cases where a pending look-ahead effect is derived (if the mode of pending display in the pending display means becomes a specific mode, or even if it does not). It may be configured as follows. Further, for players who prefer simple performances, the configuration may be such that the state in which the mode of the pending display does not change is made possible at the player's will.

Means D-6. A plurality of patterns are prepared for the hold display mode in the hold display means that is reset in response to a predetermined input based on the operation of the operation means, and the hold display mode in the hold display means is set in a specific mode. The gaming machine according to means D-5, characterized in that when the pending pre-read effect is derived, or the right to have the pending pre-read effect derived is granted.

According to the means D-6, it is possible to provide a new game experience using the hold display, and the above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the feeling of monotony are further achieved.

In addition, it may be arranged that "the suspension look-ahead effect is derived when the combination of the plurality of suspension displays in the suspension display means becomes a specific format". In this case, it is possible to enjoy how the appearance of a combination of multiple pending displays gradually changes toward a specific appearance, which makes it possible to attract more interest in such a presentation, and makes it less monotonous. The above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the sensation are further achieved.

Means D-7. A predetermined input based on the operation of the operation means is configured to be switchable between a resetting valid state and a resetting invalid state, which are effective as a trigger for resetting the hold display mode in the hold display means,
Means D characterized in that, when a predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means is detected in the resetting valid state, a resetting mode lottery process is performed to determine the mode of the hold display in the hold display means. -5 or the gaming machine described in D-6.

According to means D-7, since it is not determined in advance what kind of mode will be derived when the player performs a predetermined input based on the operation means, the mode of the pending display cannot be replayed. It is possible to add gameplay to the setting itself. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the feeling of monotony are further achieved.

In addition, "in the reset valid state, after the predetermined input is performed based on the operation of the operating means, the reset invalid state remains until the resetting of the hold display mode in the hold display means is completed. It may also be referred to as ``to be considered as such.'' In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation where the resetting of the pending display mode is not completed no matter how long it takes. Therefore, it is possible to establish effects such as resetting the mode of hold display, and to simplify control. Alternatively, it may also be defined as "having a validity teaching means for indicating that the resetting is in the valid state". Further, "the visual recognition mode of the operating means changes between the resetting enabled state and the resetting disabled state", and "the effective teaching means derives a display prompting the operating means to operate". It may also be called ``koto''.

Means D-8. an operation time measuring means for measuring the operation time of the operating means; and
comprising at least one of operation number counting means for counting the number of operations of the operation means per specified time;
Means D-5 to D- characterized in that the algorithm of the resetting mode lottery process is different depending on whether a first input is made by the operating means or a second input is made. 7. The gaming machine according to any one of 7.

According to the means D-8, various inputs can be performed with one operating means. Therefore, in addition to making it easier to reflect the player's intentions regarding effects such as changing the mode of the pending display, the number of operating means that trigger a predetermined operation to reset the mode of the pending display is minimized, and You can improve your sexual performance or increase your interest in operations. By reducing the number of operating means as much as possible, it is possible to make it easier for players to understand the performance that involves operating the operating means, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the space required for installing the operating means.

Means D-9. Equipped with an approach detection means for detecting contact with or proximity to a predetermined part provided on the front side of the gaming machine,
The game according to any one of means D-5 to D-8, characterized in that the mode of the hold display in the hold display means can be reset based on the detection information of the approach detection means. Machine.

According to the means D-9, various inputs can be made when resetting the mode of hold display. For example, if the approach detection means is configured to be able to detect an object approaching the operating means, the result may change depending on how long you hold your hand in front of the operating means before operating the operating means. It is possible to perform resetting using the detection by the approach detection means as a trigger before operating the . Further, for example, if the approach detection means is configured to be able to detect contact with or proximity to the hold display means (the part where each hold display is displayed), it is possible to directly touch each hold display. This makes the operation intuitive and easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the user more interested in the hold display, and it is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the option to "reset the hold display mode". Furthermore, by making the operations easy to understand, it is possible to avoid situations such as being confused by the operations and causing a timeout, or the game tempo becoming slow due to setting a relatively long time for such operations. . In particular, when an operation is required to select one of the plurality of pending displays, it is possible to select the target pending display more clearly and reliably. .

Means D-10. comprising a covering means whose state can be changed between a covered state that covers the front of the reservation display means and an exposed state that exposes the reservation display means to the front;
The game according to any one of means D-1 to D-9, characterized in that the covering means in the covering state covers at least a part of the front of the reservation display displayed on the reservation display means. Machine.

According to means D-10, a more interesting performance can be derived by combining changes in the mode of the hold display or hold look-ahead effect and the behavior of the covering means. In addition, if the covering means is configured to be able to cover the entire pending display so as to make it invisible or difficult to see, it may be possible to hide the moment when the mode of the pending display or the pending look-ahead effect changes from being visible. It is possible to improve the effect of showing whether there has been a change or whether there has been no change. In particular, when the covering means is configured to be able to individually cover each hold display displayed on the hold display means, it is possible to limit the hold display that you want to draw attention to among the plural hold display means, and to It is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize whether or not a change has been made. Furthermore, if the covering means is configured to be able to cover a part of the hold display so as to make it invisible or difficult to see, the form of the hold display or hold look-ahead presentation and the form of the covering means may be combined. , a more interesting aspect can be derived.

It should be noted that the covering means has two states: a fully covered state in which the covering means can cover the entire predetermined pending display (the pending display is virtually unrecognizable), and a partial covering state in which it can cover a part of the predetermined pending display (the pending display cannot be recognized). It may be configured such that the state can be changed between a state (which can be narrowed down to a plurality of patterns, but it is difficult to know exactly) and a retracted state.

Means D-11. comprising an effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the winning/fail lottery and capable of deriving a variable display for effect to be performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means;
The variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, and is stopped and displayed when the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means is stopped,
The hold display means is constituted by a part of the effect display means,
The gaming machine according to means D-10, wherein the covering means is configured to be able to cover only a portion of the performance displaying means that corresponds to the pending displaying means.

According to means D-11, for example, compared to a structure in which the covering means covers the entire production display means, attention can be drawn to the mode of the hold display means, and changes in the form of the hold display means can be more easily recognized. We can make it easier for you to do so. Further, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of other parts of the effect display means by the covering means in the covering position. As a result, the degree of freedom in the timing of presentation using the covering means can be improved.

Means D-12. comprising an effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the winning/fail lottery and capable of deriving a variable display for effect to be performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means;
The variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, and is stopped and displayed when the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means is stopped,
The hold display means is constituted by a part of the effect display means,
When the mode of the hold display is changed (reset) in the hold display means, the visual recognition mode changes before and after the change in the mode of the hold display in an area other than the hold display means of the effect display means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-11, characterized in that it is configured to be able to display a changing object.

According to means D-12, while the player's attention is focused on the hold display means, the visual recognition mode quietly changes (without sound effects, etc.) in other parts of the performance display means, so that the game is subsequently stopped. When the person's attention shifts to the performance variable display of the performance display means, the person can feel surprised and amused by noticing the change in the visual recognition mode of the performance display means.

Means D-13. A firing means for firing a game ball;
A firing operation means as the operation means, which is provided at a position that can be operated by a player, and causes the game ball to be fired by the firing means based on the player's operation;
a game area provided on the front side of the game board, where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a starting ball entering means into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
and a starting ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means,
The main control means is configured to perform the win/fail lottery when the detection by the starting ball entry detection means is performed,
When the detection by the starting ball entry detection means is performed during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means, the validity related information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the vacant memory of the reservation storage means. stored in the area,
The suspension storage means is configured to be able to store a specified number of the validity-related information acquired based on the detection by the starting ball entry detection means,
When the detection by the starting ball entering detecting means is performed in the state in which the predetermined number of the validity related information acquired based on the detection by the starting ball entering detecting means is stored in the holding storage means; Means D-1 characterized in that (the mode of the pending display in the pending display means is a specific mode), the pending pre-read effect is derived, or the right to derive the pending pre-read effect is granted. The gaming machine according to any one of D-12.

Conventionally, even if a game ball enters the starting ball entry means in a state in which no more winning/failure related information can be stored in the holding storage means (there is no free storage space), the so-called "over winning" occurs. ''), the information related to the validity of the game is not stored in the suspension storage means (the fluctuation display is not suspended), so when such an event occurs, the player feels like he has lost. Ta. On the other hand, it may be possible to increase the number of storage areas of the holding storage means, but in that case, the ease with which a game ball enters the starting ball entry means differs depending on individual differences among gaming machines. As a result, the difference in the ratio of the number of fluctuation displays of identification information to the number of game balls fired becomes large, or the fluctuation display becomes easier to suspend, resulting in an increase in the game balance (number of game balls fired and In order to adjust the ratio of the number of game balls paid out, etc.), by lowering the probability of a winning lottery or reducing the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the starting ball entry means, There is concern that the difference will become larger and the degree of freedom in design will decrease.

In this regard, according to the means D-13, when a game ball over-wins in the starting ball entering means, a pending pre-reading performance is derived, or a right to derive a pending pre-reading performance is granted. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball over-entering the starting ball entering means is a complete waste, and the negative impression caused by over-entering the starting ball entering means with the game ball can be avoided. can be achieved. According to this means, the detection of a game ball that has entered the starting ball entering means by the starting ball entering detecting means corresponds to a predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means. Furthermore, in a special state where no variable display is performed, such as a special gaming state, it may be configured such that even if an over-win is made, a pending look-ahead performance is not derived or a right to derive a pending look-ahead performance is not granted. .

Means D-14. The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means,
a first ball entry mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry means; and a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means compared to the first ball entry mode. There is a second ball entry mode that makes it easier to ball,
With regard to the distribution of the type of the special gaming state that is given when a winner is won in the winning lottery conducted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means, the entry into the second starting ball entry means Sorting based on the ball makes it easier to select the type to which the second ball entry mode is applied than distribution based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry means,
First validity related information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and second validity information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means. If the related information is stored in the holding storage means, the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the second validity related information is greater than the fluctuating display of the identification information corresponding to the first validity related information. A composition that is preferentially digested,
The reservation storage means is configured to be able to store a first specified number of the first validity related information, and is configured to be able to store a second specified number of the second validity related information,
In the case where the second starting ball entry detection means performs detection in a state where the second specified number of the second validity-related information is stored in the suspension storage means,
Means D-13 according to the means D-13, characterized in that the suspension look-ahead effect is derived with priority to the suspension display corresponding to the first validity related information stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means. Game machine.

In particular, "the second starting ball entry detection means performs the detection in a state in which the second validity related information is stored in the second predetermined number in the suspension storage means, so that the suspension pre-reading performance is derived. or if it is determined that the right to derive the pending look-ahead effect is granted, the result of the winning lottery itself is taught based on the predetermined first winning/losing related information stored in the holding storage means. The suspension look-ahead effect may be derived for the suspension display corresponding to the predetermined first validity-related information.

When both the first validity-related information and the second validity-related information are stored in the suspension storage means, if the state in which the second validity-related information is stored in the suspension storage unit is not interrupted, the first validity-related information This is possible in the second ball entry mode. In other words, in the second entry mode, although it is expected that the second winning/failure related information will win the winning lottery, if the first winning/failure related information is stored in the holding storage means, the first winning/failure related information is There is a concern that a situation may arise in which the user is unable to leave his/her seat even if he or she wants to (continually inserts the game ball into the second starting ball entry means) because the user does not want to digest the information related to the success/response.

In this regard, according to the means D-14, by causing the game ball to enter the starting ball entering means in excess, the pending pre-read effect is derived with priority over the pending display corresponding to the first win/fail related information. ing. Therefore, by such a pending pre-reading effect, it may be possible to grasp the contents (validity) of the first validity-related information in advance, and whether there is no harm in digesting the first validity-related information or not. This can be determined at a preliminary stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of situations where the user has to refrain from leaving their seat. Particularly, when the pending look-ahead performance is derived in a manner that teaches the result of the winning lottery of the first winning/losing related information itself, such effects are more reliably achieved.

Note that in the first ball entry mode, it is virtually impossible to keep the memory of the second correctness-related information uninterrupted. It may also be possible to say that a pending look-ahead effect is derived. In addition, ``Only when a game machine that can exchange gaming information with a server via a communication mobile terminal owned by the player is playing a mobile-linked game that is played with information input from the server. , the pending look-ahead performance may be derived in response to detection by the starting ball entry detection means. In this case, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the mobile-linked game.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by the player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A pinball game machine that includes a game area where game balls are guided, and ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine having a gaming area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by the player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) in which the game ball is guided and extends substantially vertically, and each ball entry means (general winning hole, A pinball game machine is equipped with a variable prize winning device, an operating port, etc., and is configured such that the behavior of game balls flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "a sequence of identification information (symbol sequence; specifically, a rotating object such as a reel or belt with a pattern) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotary body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after the rotation of The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and when the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped, the identification is aligned on the effective line. An example of this is a reel-type gaming machine that is configured so that a gaming value is awarded on the condition that the information is specific identification information.

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly a gaming machine with slot machine specifications that uses game balls as a gaming medium). As a more detailed example, "a sequence of identification information (symbol sequence; specifically, a rotating object such as a reel or belt with a pattern) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotary body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after the rotation of The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and when the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped, the identification is aligned on the effective line. A system is configured such that a gaming value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and further includes a taking means for providing a ball receiving tray (such as an upper tray) and taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray; and a payout means for paying out game balls, and configured such that a game start condition is satisfied when the game balls are taken in by the taking means.

10... Pachinko machine, 32... Variable winning device, 33a... First starting winning device, 33b... Second starting winning device, 34... Through gate, 42... Decorative pattern display device, 43a... First special display device, 43b... Third 2 special display device, 46a, 46b... hold display device, 261... main control device, 262... sub control device.

Claims (1)

a condition fulfillment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
control means for conducting a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the condition establishment detection means detects the condition, and generating the special gaming state based on the result of the lottery; In a gaming machine equipped with
information acquisition means for acquiring lottery-related information regarding the lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
Storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the lottery related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a display means capable of deriving a display based on the lottery related information stored in the storage area ,
The display means is configured to be able to display a first display body and a second display body, and the display mode of the first display body and the display mode of the second display body can be distinguished,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state,
The display means is configured to be able to derive a first specific mode that is a specific mode using the first display body and a second specific mode that is a specific mode using the second display body,
By deriving the first specific aspect and the second specific aspect, respectively, a suggestion regarding the occurrence of the special gaming state is made,
It is configured such that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the second special gaming state is higher when the second specific mode is derived than when the first specific mode is derived,
configured to be able to execute a change effect in which the second specific aspect is derived after the first specific aspect is derived,
The change effect is configured to be able to derive a connecting effect representing a process in which the second specific mode is derived after the first specific mode is derived,
The change effect is configured such that the first specific mode is not derived after the second specific mode is derived,
After the first specific mode is derived, the first specific mode is configured to be able to perform a performance in which the first specific mode is derived via the connecting performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the change performance, an aspect indicating that no further change of the specific aspect is to be derived can be derived .

Images